Film - Television - Sound Archive Series

Papers and Reference Tools for Film Archivists

Dealing with Audiovisual Material

Vol 1
Fédération Internationale des Archives du Film (FIAF)

The FIAF
Cataloguing Rules
For Film Archives

Compiled and edited

By Harriet W. Harrison
for the
FIAF Cataloguing Commission

K⋅G⋅Saur
München⋅London⋅New York⋅Paris 1991
CIP-Titelaufnahme der Deutschen Bibliothek

International Federation of Film Archives:

The FIAF cataloguing rules for film archives / Fédération Internationale des
Archives du Film (FIAF). Compiled and ed. by Harriet W. Harrison for the FIAF
Cataloguing Commission. – Munich ; London ; New York ; Paris : Saur, 1991
(Film, television, sound archive series ; Vol. 1)
ISBN 3-598-22590-3
NE: Harrison, Harriet W. [Hrsg.]; HST; GT

Gedruckt auf säurefreiem Papier

Printed on acid-free paper

Alle Rechte vorbehalten / All Rights Strictly Reserved

K.G. Saur Verlag, München 1991
Part of Reed International P. L. C.

Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany

Printed and bound by Strauss Offsetdruck, Hirschberg 2

ISBN 3-598-22590-3
 CONTENTS

Members of the Cataloguing Commission vii

Acknowledgements viii
Introduction ix

0. PRELIMINARY NOTES 1

1. TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY 12

2. EDITION/VERSION/VARIATION STATEMENT 40

3. PRODUCTION, DISTRIBUTION, ETC. 56

4. COPYRIGHT STATEMENT 67

5. PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION 72

6. SERIES AREA 95

7. NOTES AREA 105

APPENDICES

A. EXAMPLES 137

B. GLOSSARY 185

C. ISO DATE STANDARD 204

D. CONVERSION CHARTS; METERS, FEET, MINUTES 208

E. ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THE TEXT AND APPENDIXES 212

F. FIAF ARCHIVE CODES 218

G. BIBLIOGRAPHY 223

INDEX 227

v
MEMBERS OF THE CATALOGUING COMMISSION

The members of the Cataloguing Commission are:

Harriet Harrison - Library of Congress, Washington

Chair

Jon Gartenberg - Museum of Modern Art, New York

Dorothea Gebauer - Deutsches Institut für Filmkunde, Wiesbaden

Rolf Lindfors - Cinemateket, Svenska Filminstitutet, Stockholm

Vladimir Opela - Ceskoslovensky Filmovy Ustav, Filmovy Archiv, Praha

Günter Schulz - Staatliches Filmarchiv der DDR, Berlin

Roger Smither - Imperial War Museum, London

Ani Velchevska - Bulgarska Nacionalna Filmoteka, Sofia

vii
 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

These rules represent the combined efforts of both past and present members of the
Cataloguing Commission. Discussion and draft chapters were contributed by: Roger Smither –
preliminary notes, titles, and series; Günter Schulz – editions, versions, and variations; Ani
Velchevska – languages and countries; Harriet Harrison – companies and dates; Marta Luttor
(formerly Magyar Filmtudomanyi Intezet es Filmarchivum, Budapest) – physical descriptions;
Rolf Lindfors – cast and credits; and Roger Holman (National Film Archive, London) -
summaries and notes. Dorothea Gebauer edited and compiled the papers into our first complete
working draft. Dorothea Gebauer, Harriet Harrison, Vladimir Opela, Günter Schulz and Roger
Smither contributed examples; Rolf Lindfors suggested the use of the ISO date standard; and
Roger Smither compiled conversion tables for meters = feet = minutes. All the Commission
members contributed to the review of this draft and provided thoughtful suggestions for
improvement.

In addition to the members of the Commission, Jan-Hein Bal (Nederlands Filmmuseum,

Amsterdam) and Nicole Schmitt (Service des Archives du Film du Centre National de la
Cinématographie, Bois d’Arcy) graciously contributed their knowledge and experience to the
review, and Jan-Hein Bal provided useful suggestions and examples concerning the treatment of
international co-production.

A very special debt is owed to the work of Wendy White-Hensen, my former colleague at
the Library of Congress, who authored the U.S. national standards for cataloging archival
moving images, Archival Moving Image Materials: A Cataloging Manual. During the course of
our work on rules, Wendy and I spent long hours discussing cataloging problems and issues. She
helped to refine my thinking in many areas, and I have borrowed heavily from the language and
wording of her text in the preparation of this draft. Thanks also to Jon Gartenberg and Roger
Smither for proofing the final version of the draft and to the Executive Committee of FIAF, to
the Executive Secretary – Brigitte van der Elst – and to the members of the Commission for their
encouragement and support throughout the years of preparation required to bring these rules into
existence.

Harriet W. Harrison

viii
 INTRODUCTION

This manual consists of a set of rules for cataloging materials held in moving image
archives. Its immediate purpose is to provide a means of facilitating the exchange of information
between and among archives, so that cataloging records, created in one archive, may be readily
interpreted and understood in another. This goal supports the basic aims of FIAF, which lists the
following goals in Article I of its Statutes and Internal Rules: “to encourage all countries to
create and develop film archives,” “to develop cooperation between its members and ensure
international availability of films and documents,” “to promote film art and culture and
encourage historical research into all aspects of cinema,” and “to promote the collection and
preservation of films, as works of art and/or as historical documents.”∗

The creation of catalogs is perhaps the least visible activity of a film archive. Cataloging
work includes the complex, professional tasks of gathering and arranging data within systems (as
well as the creation of those systems) upon which the entire organization and operation of an
archive depend. Indeed, accurate, well-organized descriptions of both filmographic and
technical information about an archive’s collection serve as the basis for informed preservation,
collections development, and outreach or screening programs. They further constitute the key to
the use of collections by scholars, researchers and the general public – both now and for future
generations.

Although not highly visible, professional cataloging work is expensive, and archivists
have long dreamed of being able to avoid duplication of effort by sharing completed cataloging
work, thereby reducing costs. Developments in the related fields of automation and
telecommunication over the last three decades have now given us the tools through which to
bring this dream of shared cataloging into the realm of the possible.

History and Development of the FIAF Cataloging Rules

When FIAF established its Cataloguing Commission in 1968, the new Commission set,
as its first task, the creation of a compendium of advice on practical cataloging matters –
including the identification of essential and desirable elements of information, training
requirements for catalogers, location and technical controls, machinery and methods, etc. The
result of this work was a manual, completed in the 1970s, and published in 1979 as Film
Cataloging (New York: Burt Franklin & Co.).

∗
International Federation of Film Archives. Statuts et Reglement Interieur = Statutes and
Internal Rules. Brussels: FIAF, 1987, p.3.

ix
 Having completed this background work, the Commission turned, in 1980, to the next
task – that of providing precise rules for the style, content, and format of cataloging records.
While the members of the Commission recognized that established archives, many with long-
existing formats and cataloging systems, could not easily abandon past practices in order to
adopt an international standard set of rules, they nonetheless felt that work on such rules was
essential for several reasons:

1) Computerization and telecommunication costs, which had initially been beyond the
means of most archives, were decreasing rapidly, bringing with them greatly
increased possibilities for effective international cooperation and communication, and
effective cooperation and communication requires the use of standards.

2) Developing archives, who were just beginning cataloging work, were looking to the
Commission to provide them with recognized standards upon which they could rely.

3) Work to provide international rules for cataloging moving image materials had
already been undertaken by professionals from the related discipline of librarianship.
The results of their work, the International Standard for Bibliographic Description for
non-Book Materials (ISBD(NBM)) (London: IFLA, 1977, rev. 1987), had already
achieved recognition among library professionals worldwide. While its rules,
directed as they were to generalized collections of widely available audio-visual
materials, did not solve the technical and scholarly information needs of moving
image archives, they could nonetheless serve as a model for FIAF by providing a
framework into which the Commission could place its basic principles of archival
moving image cataloging (as already outlined in Film Cataloging) and upon which it
could then build these principles into a complete set of cataloging rules.

To begin, the members of the Commission divided archival cataloging information into
areas of description along the lines of ISBD (NBM), each member accepting an assignment to
prepare discussion papers on one of the areas. Working first on their own and then together
through annual Commission meetings, the members reviewed these discussion papers. The
author of each discussion paper next elaborated a set of rules, incorporating both archive
principles and ISBD style, format, and punctuation. Subsequent tasks required the merging and
editing of the papers into a consistent and cohesive set of rules. The Commission next reviewed
and modified the draft, chapter by chapter. The result was then presented for review to the
members of FIAF and to the Cataloging Commissions and specialists of other interested
international organizations. Comments and suggestions from reviewers have been incorporated
into the final publication.

x
 Relationship of FIAF Cataloging Rules to ISBD (NBM)
And Principles of Library Cataloging

The principles of organization found in the FIAF Cataloging Rules differ in several
respects from library cataloging principles as codified in ISBD (NBM). These differences stem
from the need in moving image archives to describe, in one record, data covering several
physical pieces, perhaps bearing different identifying indicia, but belonging to the same moving
image title. These separate physical pieces may be either copies (in whole or in part) of the
original or they may be other manifestations; there is little of the “normal” concept for a single,
ideally complete, physical unit. Catalog records for books and other non-archival library
materials describe complete items, usually produced separately, edition-by-edition (or, in some
cases, issue-by-issue), and thus the records reflect their different bibliographic indicia more or
less faithfully. This normally means transcribing exactly one title, one sequence of statements of
responsibility, one edition statement, one set of publication details, and formulating one physical
description – per record.

The phenomenon of sets of single details needed per catalog record is also reflected in
archival moving image materials, as when the archive holds only the original in one copy.
Frequently, however, such simplicity is not possible. The moving image archive may have
several manifestations of a work, each incomplete, but which when taken together approximate a
single whole item. It also may hold in separate physical items various manifestations that are
dependent, e.g., a separate sound track. Thus a single record may include an original title and
original release details, plus associated variation information, followed by the physical
descriptions for the original and later variations with minor changes all grouped together in a
listing, one physical description after the other.

A moving image archive considers that these sets of multiple details need to be given in
one catalog record: a complete “item” may be the sum of these parts. Under this concept the
details relating to the original title are the basic part of the record, with other details added for
later variations – even when the original is not in the archive (in that case a physical description
for the original is omitted). All these details are given whether or not the pieces of film or video
material being cataloged actually bear them. This introduces another major departure from
traditional library cataloging: the recording of data from reference sources without the
contradistinction normally made between such data (off a “chief source” or outside the item) and
data transcribed from formal statements on the material. In most cases then, there will be no
bracketing of any data (traditionally signifying a source other than the item itself), except
possibly a word or phrase made up by the cataloger.

Attention must be called to the multiple physical descriptions the system described above
entails. As mentioned already, not only are different pieces of various versions accounted for in
archival records but also

xi
differing copies: negative and positive copies, master and viewing copies, etc. A film and/or
television archive can have as many as forty or fifty physically separate items, all of which are
essential parts of a single feature film. All elements must be described accurately and carefully,
with a shorthand which draws component parts of negatives, masterpositives, sound tracks,
prints, etc. together and provides a quick method for comparing each set, one with the other.
This interrelationship is expressed by providing multiple lines of physical description, each
arranged in a standard manner.

Edition/version/variation

As has been explained above, the incorporation of variation information into a record
enables this one record to carry within it all the details relative to the differing components of a
whole. This technique is not used for every case of different editions, versions, or variations. A
detailed explanation follows.

It is essential to users of archival moving image material that information describing the
original item and information describing the item in hand are presented in a manner that clearly
delineates this relationship. The relationship in library terms is described as the concept of
“edition.” For moving image materials, the terms most analogous to edition are versions with
major changes and variations with minor changes. Separate editions of printed library material
are cataloged separately, and usually no attempt is made to determine whether edition statements
always indicate major changes in content. In moving image archives, both the occurrence of a
change in the content and the extent of the change are important. In most cases, for moving
image materials, the changes are a function of some form of editing.

Versions with major changes. If the cataloging agency has determined that the item in
hand differs significantly from the original work, i.e., major editing has been done, the item is
described in a separate cataloging record. The item in hand is designated a version of the
original work with major changes, e.g., short version, classroom version, etc., and the
distribution information for the separate version is recorded. The relationship to the original
work is indicated in the edition/version statement, and, in most instances, in a note. Distribution
information relating to the original work may also be indicated in a note.

Variations with minor changes. When the cataloging agency determines that an item,
although designated as being re-edited, e.g., a “new edition,” has not indeed been changed
significantly, it may express this relationship by recording the statement of responsibility for the
original in

xii
area one, the variation and statement of responsibility for the variation in area two, and the
production, distribution information for both the original and variation copies in area three.
Multiple edition/version/variation statements may be given when cataloging multiple variations
with minor changes.

Choice of original release title in country of origin as main entry

This manual includes prescriptions and guidelines for the choice of main and added
entries, which can act as index or access points to the cataloging record. Of these, the single
most important access point – around which the entire bibliographic description is arranged – is
the main entry. These rules follow the precepts already outlined in Film Cataloging by defining
main entry as the original release title or broadcast title in the country of origin, i.e., the country
of the principal offices of the production company or individual by whom the moving image
work was made. Owing to the complex interrelationships of persons and corporate bodies in the
creation of a moving image work, the original release or broadcast title is chosen as the single
element which can provide the level of consistency and standardization requisite for any national
and international networking or sharing of cataloging data. Variant titles, e.g., translated titles,
rerelease or reissue titles, titles on the item or accompanying material, etc., are noted, and linking
references from variant titles to the original release title are provided.

Because, however, it is not always possible for a cataloger to determine an original

release title, the rules also provide guidelines for choice of main entry when either: 1) the
concept of original release title is not applicable (as in the case of unedited footage, cf. 1.5.2.4),
or when 2) a cataloger is unable, through research, to determine the original release title (cf. 1.5).

Research and chief source of information

Owing to the mutable nature of film and video materials, some amount of research must
almost always be performed to identify and verify the original release title accurately. Titles can
be readily changed, misidentified by a well-meaning collector, or completely eliminated before
moving image material reaches an archive. Archival cataloging should include a complete
filmographic description of the original work expressed as exactly as possible. The “chief”
source of information is not always the item itself, but may also include the standard and
specialized reference works consulted by the cataloger.

xiii
 These rules are not intended to provide instructions on conducting intensive film and
television research because the assumption is made that catalogers are familiar with both the
principles of cataloging and with film and television information. Instead, the rules provide
guidance in organizing information obtained by viewing the material and by examining
accompanying material and other sources, for example by prescribing that the source of the title
be carefully documented in the notes area (cf. 0.4. Sources of information).

Choosing a form of name for added entries and providing subject access

These rules provide guidance concerning the types of names to be chosen as additional
access points, but exclude provisions for choosing the forms these names should take. For
guidance in choosing between various forms of names, the use of appropriate existing national or
international standards are recommended, e.g., IFLA’s Form and Structure of Corporate
Headings and/or the Anglo-American Cataloging Rules, 2d ed., etc. Following already
recommended standards for the form of name in chosen access points will enable data to be
shared more widely through existing national and international bibliographic information
systems, while at the same time addressing the special needs of archives through an organization
of the description according to archival principles.

In the same way, the rules include guidance for describing the content of a moving image
work (cf. 7.2.16 and 7.2.17), but do not address issues related to providing subject access.
Subject indexes may be provided through the assignment of classification numbers from
standardized classification schemes such as the Universal Decimal Classification (UDC),
through the assignment of natural language terms from standardized thesauri, or, in the case of
automated records, through the use of software designed to index and retrieve words (either
singly or in a variety of combinations) already found in a catalog record. The international
standardization of subject access for moving image archives remains an issue for discussion and
future work by the Commission and other interested moving image archivists. While certain
types of subject access may be appropriately handled through classification schemes and thesauri
borrowed from other fields (thus reaping the advantages noted above in sharing standards for
form of name), the creation of thesauri for other types of subjects, such as film and television
genres, film schools and movements, etc. will require additional work from cataloging and
subject specialists in our own field.

xiv
Copyright

Because national and international copyright regulations for moving image materials
govern not only the copying of materials for subsequent use, but also the screening and/or
viewing of such materials, information concerning copyright ownership is considered of
paramount importance to most film and television archives. These rules introduce a separate
area – area four – for the recording of information about the copyright status of moving image
materials. The rules include provisions for recording both original and current copyright
ownership, as well as for indicating when the cataloger has not been able to find any information
concerning copyright status. Since copyright issues are complex legal matters, some archives
prefer to maintain separate legal files, or sometimes even to leave the resolution of copyright
issues entirely to the responsibility of the user or client. For these reasons, the use of the
copyright area has been designated “optional."

Alternatives and options

Certain of the individual rules or parts of rules in this manual are introduced by the
words, “alternatively” or “optionally.” Optional provisions arise from the recognition that
different solutions to a problem and differing levels of detail and specificity are appropriate in
different contexts. Some alternatives and options should be decided as a matter of cataloging
policy for a particular catalog or archive and should therefore be exercised either always or
never. Other alternatives and options should be exercised case by case. It is recommended that
all cataloging archives distinguish between these two types of options and keep a record of their
policy decisions and of the circumstances in which a particular option may be applied.

The necessity for judgment and interpretation by the cataloger is recognized in these
rules. Such judgment and interpretation may be based on the requirements of a particular catalog
or upon the use of the items being cataloged. The need for judgment is indicated in these rules
by phrases such as “if appropriate,” “if important” and “if necessary.” These indicate
recognition of the fact that uniform legislation of types and sizes of catalogs is neither possible
nor desirable, and encourage the application of individual judgment based on specific local
knowledge. This statement in no way contradicts the value of standardization. Such judgments
must be applied consistently within a particular context and must be documented by the
individual archive.

xv
Examples

The examples used throughout these rules are illustrative and not prescriptive. They are
intended to illuminate the provisions of the rules to which they are attached, rather than to extend
those provisions. Neither the examples nor the form in which they are presented should be taken
as instructions, unless the accompanying text specifically states that they should. A case in point
is the underlining of titles in certain of the examples given within the text. This underlining has
been done for the sake of clarity, and does not constitute a cataloging recommendation. Most
examples are from actual titles; in the few made-up examples an attempt has been made to
formulate realistic data. Examples of complete entries in various languages may be found in
Appendix A.

xvi
0. Preliminary notes

0.1. Scope, purpose and use

0.1.1. Scope

The FIAF Cataloging Rules specify requirements for the description and identification of
archival moving image materials, assign an order to the elements of the description, and specify
a system of punctuation for that description. They are designed for use by moving image
archives as a guide in the preparation of cataloging records and as a standard for the exchange of
bibliographic or filmographic information. Their provisions relate to the bibliographic records of
moving image materials for generalized film and television archives, and may require
elaboration in more specialized archives whose holdings are exclusively of a single format or
type, e.g., commercials, newsfilm, unedited footage, etc.

Moving image materials include a range of documents upon which sequences of visual
images have been recorded or registered and which create the illusion of movement when
projected, broadcast, or played back (by means of a television set or equivalent device). Such
images may, or may not, be accompanied by sound. The definition includes motion pictures and
video recordings of all types, e.g., features, shorts, news footage (whether film or video), trailers,
outtakes, screen tests., educational and training documents, experimental or independent films or
video, study films or video, home movies, unedited materials, television broadcasts,
commercials, and spot announcements. It also covers both live action and animation.

The FIAF Cataloging Rules are based upon the prescriptions found in the International
Standard Bibliographic Description for Non-Book Materials (ISBD (NBM)) (London: IFLA
International Office for UBC, 1977, rev. 1987) in order to achieve as much standardization as
possible with the guidelines and principles of the international library community. They do,
however, differ in several important ways, owing to differences between the way in which
library materials and archival moving images are produced and distributed. In its preliminary
notes, the first edition of ISBD (NBM) states that its definition of non-book materials applies
“for the most part to materials published in multiple copies.” As regards the materials held by
moving image archives, the situation is often quite different. Owing to the ease with which
moving image documents may be altered and copied in a variety of formats, copies are often
made in response to specific orders rather than in anticipation of demand. Thus, production of
copies on a one-for-one basis is not at all unusual and is particularly characteristic of archival
preservation activities. The ease with which the documents can be altered (erased, cut, spliced,
resequenced, etc. for repair or other deliberate purposes) has led to the situation, common in
archives, where there are few, if any, examples of “ideal” copies, i.e., complete items, usually
produced separately edition-by-edition or issue-by-issue (i.e., printing-by-printing).

1
 Archival cataloging for moving images has therefore centered around the construction of
unitary cataloging records based upon the description of an ideal “original release,” coupled with
the elaboration of details which describe the variations represented in the holdings of archives.
This principle leads to differences in the rules for “principal” or “prescribed source,” concepts of
“edition” and “version,” and in the necessity for performing research in addition to examining
items as prerequisite for the creation of bibliographic records. These differences are reflected in
the rules which follow.

0.1.2. Purpose

The primary purpose of the rules is to aid in the exchange and international
communication of bibliographic data for moving image documents held in archives throughout
the world. This purpose is very similar to and supports that outlined in ISBD (NBM) (2d ed.):

to (A) make records from different sources interchangeable, so that

records produced in one country can be easily accepted in library catalogues or other
bibliographic lists in any other country; (B) assist in the interpretation of records across
language barriers, so that records produced for users of one language can be interpreted
by users of other languages; and (C) assist in the conversion of bibliographic records to
machine-readable form.

It is for this reason that every effort has been made to parallel ISBD (NBM) wherever possible,
particularly as to the prescribed order of elements and as to punctuation.

0.1.3. Use

The FIAF Cataloging Rules are intended to provide a framework for the maximum
amount of descriptive information required in a range of archival cataloging activities existing in
a great variety of national and local environments. The elements listed in the outline of areas and
elements (cf. 0.2.1.) are therefore divided into two categories, mandatory (if applicable) and
optional. The elements listed as mandatory should be considered the minimum necessary for the
effective exchange of bibliographic information, and archives are encouraged to include as many
of the optional elements as goals and circumstances permit.

This set of rules is intended to cover rules for description and bibliographic access;
subject access to the materials is not addressed, nor are rules presented for standardizing personal
and corporate names. For guidance in these areas, archives should refer to national or
multinational cataloging codes, such

2
as the Anglo-American Cataloging Rules, 2nd ed. and to International Federation of Library
Associations (IFLA) publications, such as Form and Structure of Corporate Headings (London:
IFLA International Office for UBC, 1980).

0.2. Order of the elements of description

The order of the elements of description is based as closely as possible upon the order
prescribed in ISBD (NBM). Elements are grouped into the following areas.

Title and statement of responsibility

Edition/version/variation
Production, distribution, etc.
Copyright statement
Physical description
Series
Notes

The elements which appear in each area are set out in the following outline and in chapters 1 to
7. Not all areas will apply when describing individual items. For a definition of the area terms,
see the rules for each area and the Glossary, Appendix B.

0.2.1. Outline of the elements of description

Note: Precede each area, other than the first, with a period, space, dash, space (. -- ).

Area Prescribed preceding (or Element

enclosing) punctuation
for elements
1. Title and statement of 1.1 Title proper
∗
responsibility area. [] 1.2 General material designation
= 1.3 Parallel title
: *1.4 Other title information
1.5 Statements of responsibility
/ First statement
; *Subsequent statement(s)

2. Edition/version 2.1 Edition/version/variation

variation area statement
= *2.2 Parallel edition statement
2.3 Statements of responsibility
relating to the edition
/ First statement
; *Subsequent statement(s)

∗
Asterisked items are optional, cf. 0.1.3.

3
 Area Prescribed preceding (or Element
enclosing) punctuation
for elements
2. Edition area (cont.) , 2.4 Additional edition statement
2.5 Statements of responsibility
following an additional
edition statement
/ First statement
; *Subsequent place(s)
3. Production, distribution, 3.1 Place of original production
etc., area First place
; *Subsequent place(s)
: 3.2 Name of producer
[] 3.3 Statement of function of
producer
, *3.4 Date of original production
-- 3.5 Place of original distributor
: Name of distributor
[] Statement of function of
distributor
, Date of original distribution
-- *Place of additional company
involved in production,
distribution, etc.
: Name of additional company
involved in production,
distribution, etc.
[] Statement of function of
additional company
, *Date of additional company
involvement
4. Copyright statement : *4.2 Copyright and country
area : *4.3 Registration notice
: *4.4 Copyright owner (claimant)
; *Copyright date
: *4.5 Unprotected materials
: *4.6 Copyright status unknown
-- *4.7 Subsequent ownership
5. Physical description 5.2 Specific material designation
area 5.3 and extent of item
; 5.4 Dimensions of item
: 5.5 Other physical details
/ 5.6 Inventory or location number
6. Series area 6.1 Title proper of series
= 6.2 Parallel title of series

4
 Area Prescribed preceding (or Element
enclosing) punctuation
for elements

6. Series area (cont.) : 6.3 Other title information of

series
6.4 Statements of responsibility
relating to the series
/ First statement
; *Subsequent statement(s)
, 6.5 International Standard Serial
Number of series
; 6.6 Numbering within series
. 6.7 Enumeration and/or title of
sub-series
= 6.8 Parallel title of sub-series
: 6.9 Other title information of
sub-series
6.10 Statements of responsibility
relating to the sub-series
/ First statement
; *Subsequent statements
, 6.11 International Standard Serial
Number of sub-series
; 6.12 Numbering within sub-series

7. Note area

0.2.2. See the following example for a schematic representation of a complete description.

5
Example: The organization of the description of a catalog entry.

TITLE STATEMENTS OF RESPONSIBILITY

The PRINCESS’ NECKLACE / director, Floyd France ;

story, Clare Freeman Alger ; scenarist, E. Clement
PRODUCTION, D’Art. – US : Thomas A. Edison, Inc.
DISTRIBUTION, ETC. [producer], 1917 ; US : K.E.S.E. [distributor],
1917. – (c) : US : Thomas A. Edison, Inc. 31Aug17;
COPYRIGHT LP11335.

Viewing print: 4 reels of 4 (1498 ft.) : 16 mm.:

S., b&w, si. / USW FLA 1742-1745.
Duplicate negative: 4 reels of 4 (1498 ft.) ;
PHYSICAL 16mm. : S., b&w, si. / USW FRA 4336-4339.
DESCRIPTION Archival positive: 4 reels of 4 (1498 ft.) ;
16mm. : S., b&w, si. / USW FRA 4340-4343.
SERIES (CONQUEST PROGRAM ; NO. 8)

Cast: William Calhoun, Kathleen Townsend, Wallace

MacDonald, Susan Mitchell, Dorothy Graham, Roy Adams.
Summary: A fairy tale in which a stranger comes to
Happyland in order to learn the master secret of
happiness, and, while there, manages to retrieve the
NOTES princess’s necklace from the wicked dwarfs who had
stolen it. The stranger who reveals himself later as
the king of Roseland, learns that the real secret of
happiness is making others happy, and he and the
princess are wed.
References: Moving Picture World, v. 33.2, p. 1583;
Motion Picture News, v. 1 .2, p. 2389.

6
0.3. Punctuation

As previously noted, punctuation for the description of moving image materials is based
on ISBD.

0.3.1. Precede each area by a period, space, dash, space (. -- ) unless the area begins a new
paragraph.

0.3.2. Precede or enclose each occurrence of an element of an area with standard punctuation
prescribed at the head of each section of these rules (cf. also outline in 0.2.1).

0.3.3. Precede each mark of prescribed punctuation by a space and follow it by a space, except
for the comma, period, hyphen, and opening and closing parentheses and square brackets. The
comma, period, hyphen, and closing parenthesis and square bracket are not preceded by a space;
the hyphen and the opening parenthesis and square bracket are not followed by a space.
Punctuation, other than prescribed punctuation, e.g., natural language punctuation, may be
included at the discretion of the archive, as is the spacing before or after such punctuation.
Retain ISBD punctuation even when this results in double punctuation, except as in 0.3.7.

0.3.4. Precede the first element of each area, other than the first element of the first area or the
first element of an area beginning a new paragraph by a period, space, dash, space (. -- ). When
that element is not present in a description, precede the first element that is present by a period,
space, dash, space (. -- ) instead of the prescribed preceding punctuation for that element.

0.3.5. When an area is repeated, precede each repetition with a period, space, dash, space
(. -- ), except when the repetition begins a new paragraph.

0.3.6. When an element is repeated, precede each repetition with the prescribed punctuation
appropriate to that element.

0.3.7. When an element ends with an abbreviation or other word or character which is normally
followed by a period and the punctuation following that element either is or begins with a period,
omit the period indicating the abbreviation.

Example: 3rd ed. –

not 3rd ed.. --

7
0.3.8. Indicate data supplied by the cataloging agency and appearing in areas 1 – 4 and 6, and
conjectural data, i.e., data that cannot be verified but is judged to be probable, appearing
anywhere in the record, with square brackets ([data]). If the data is judged to be questionable,
but the determination is made to include it in the description, indicate this determination with a
question mark following the data and enclose the data and question mark in square brackets
([data?]). Do not use question marks within bracketed parts of titles. For more specific rules
concerning the use of brackets within titles, see Chapter 1, Title and Statement of Responsibility.

0.3.9. Indicate the omission of part of an element by an ellipsis ( . . . ). Omit any area or element
that does not apply in describing an individual item; also omit its prescribed preceding or
enclosing punctuation. Do not indicate the omission of an area or element by an ellipsis. Never
omit words within the title proper. If an ellipsis is used within other title information, enclose it
in square brackets.

0.3.10. Information in two or more languages and/or scripts can be recorded in any area and can
relate to one or more elements., When one element is recorded in one or more languages and/or
scripts, the information in each language and/or script, after the first, is preceded by a space,
equals sign, space ( = ). When, in a single area, two or more elements are recorded in two or
more languages and/or scripts, give the elements in each language and/or script together with the
appropriate preceding punctuation for each element. Precede the whole group of elements for
the first language and/or script by punctuation appropriate to the first element and each group
after the first with a space, equals sign, space ( = ).

0.3.11. When information is given in scripts written from right to left, commas and semi-colons
used as prescribed punctuation are reversed when that is the style of the script. Similarly, the
period, space, dash, space combination of prescribed punctuation reads from right to left and the
meanings of open and closed parentheses and square brackets are reversed. The diagonal slash
and groups of western arabic numerals which are not reversed in such scripts are not reversed
when given. See IFLA’s ISBD series for the treatment of information given both in scripts
written from left to right and in scripts written from right to left.

0.4. Sources of Information

Since neither the title frames on nor any label attached to nor insert accompanying archival films
or videorecordings provides a reliable “principal source” for the description of such material, it
follows that the cataloging of these items must be heavily dependent on research tools more
remote from the object in hand. The material held and described by any one archive will consist
of a copy or copies of a particular version of a given original work. To document its holdings
accurately, an archive will need both to describe the material in hand and to describe the major
bibliographic aspects of the original work – very little of the latter information may be found on
the material held. The principal source for the cataloging of archival films and video recordings
is therefore the established body of knowledge concerning the originals of those films and
recordings, as determined by those involved

8
in their production and by scholars, researchers, and archivists. The “principal sources”
conventional to books and to other non-book material contribute to the description of archival
film and video material, but they relinquish their primacy. In practice, therefore, no distinction is
made between the “principal source” and other sources. For this reason, the only information
which should be enclosed in square brackets is information which is supplied by the cataloging
agency, or archive, or information which is uncertain, cf. 0.3.

When information is included in the cataloging record which does not appear on the item
itself, as is often the case, citations for the source(s) of such information should be given in
notes, thereby making clear to users/researchers the sources for information appearing in the
cataloging record. Regardless of whether the information appears on the item or not, notes are
also given when any additional explanation is necessary, e.g., when there are inaccuracies,
conflicting information, ambiguities, etc. Experience has shown that citing sources for
information which does not appear on the item eliminates frustrating arguments with users and
the costly process of reverifying data. This practice has been incorporated into the rules that
follow. Individual archives may choose to set their own practices for recording the sources of
information.

0.5. Language and script of the description

Elements in the following areas are normally given in the language appropriate to the original
work (see 0.4) and may therefore be transcribed from the item or from other sources in the
appropriate language and/or script.

Title and statement of responsibility

Edition/Version/Variation
Production, distribution, etc.
Series

Interpolations in these areas are enclosed in square brackets and are given in the language
and/or script of the context except for statements of function appearing in the statement of
responsibility or production, distribution areas. These may be supplied in the language and/or
script of the cataloging agency or archive, if preferred.

The description of items appearing in scripts other than that used by the cataloging
agency or archive may, if necessary, be transliterated or transcribed in the script of the archive.

Symbols or other matter that cannot be reproduced by the typographic facilities available
within an archive may be replaced with a cataloger’s description enclosed in square brackets.
Give an explanatory note if necessary.

9
 Examples:

Title: I [LOVE] DOLLARS

[Note] The word “love” in the title is represented by the drawing of a heart.

Title: TABLES OF THE ERROR FUNCTION AND ITS DERIVATIVE, [re-

production of equations for the functions]

[Note] Mathematical equations appear as part of the title.

Statement of responsibility:

FINDING THE ELEMENTS OF MUSIC THEORY IN EVERY DAY LIFE

/ by [E. B. C.]

[Note] Initials in the statement of responsibility appear in musical notation on a stave.

0.6. Abbreviations

The following abbreviations are prescribed by ISBD for use with roman script records:

For use in areas et al. et alii , and others (for

1 or 3 use when abridging single
statements of responsibility)

For use in area 3 s.1. sine loco, place of production,

distribution, etc., unknown

For use in area 3 s.n. sine nomine, name of production,

distribution, etc., company
unknown

For use in area 5 mm. millimeters

For non-roman scripts, use equivalents in other scripts.

Additional abbreviations used in the examples are illustrative rather than prescriptive.
They are listed in Appendix E.

10
0.7. Capitalization

It is common practice in many film archives to render film titles in capitals – all upper-
case – as a simple typographical method of identifying these key items of information. This
usage is permitted by these rules, although archives may prefer to retain the normal ISBD
practice of capitalizing only the first letter of a title and other letters as dictated by the usage of
the language in which the information is given. When the “all capitals” rule is followed,
archives have the additional option of reducing to lower case words which are of minor
importance to the substantive title (for filing purposes, etc.), such as sub-titles, a definite or
indefinite article appearing as the first word of a title, etc. Experience has shown that this
practice can make it easier for staff in archives handling multi-lingual material to recognize, for
filing purposes and interpretation, the different significance of words that are articles in one
language but not in others.

Examples: DIE HARD

Die DREIGROSCHENOPER
LES PATTERSON SAVES THE WORLD
Les MISERABLES

Optionally, archives may choose to follow any established standard rules for
capitalization.

0.8. Examples

The examples given throughout the rules are illustrative and not prescriptive except when
otherwise stated.

0.9. Errors

Misprints and other errors found in information as given on or with a copy of a film or
video item need only be referred to in the Notes Area. As these rules recognize the primacy of
researched information in the catalog entry, there is no need to encumber the main entry with
indications of errors found only in a single source. An exception to this rule is made in cases
where an apparent error is incorporated in the information itself, not in any single rendition of it
(e.g., a misspelt translation). In such cases, a “[sic]” entry may be used to confirm that the error
is original and not a slip by the cataloging agency.

Example: HENRY BROWNE, FARMER = Il CONTADINO HENRY BROWN [sic]

(title on Italian language version)

11
1. Title and statement of responsibility area

Contents

1.1. Title proper

1.2. General material designation (GMD)
1.3. Parallel title
1.4. Other title information
1.5. Items without a title
1.6. Statements of responsibility

Punctuation Pattern

For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 0.3.

Enclose the general material designation (if used) in square brackets ([ ]). See 1.2.

Examples: FATHER’S DOING FINE [motion picture]

GEORGIA O’KEEFE [videorecording]

Enclose cataloger-supplied titles in square brackets (see 1.5.2).

Example: [LAUNCHING OF THE ARIZONA]

Precede parallel titles by a space, equals sign, space ( = ). See Appendix B, Glossary for
definition of parallel title and 1.3.

Example: Il FAZZOLETTO REVELATORE = The TELLTALE HANDKERCHIEF

Precede each unit of other title information by a space, colon, space ( : ). See Appendix
B, Glossary for definition of other title information and 1.4.

Example: GUILTY OR INNOCENT : The SAM SHEPPARD MURDER CASE

Precede the first statement of responsibility by a space, diagonal slash, space ( / ). See
1.6.

Example: FATHER’S DOING FINE / director, Henry Cass

12
 Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a space, semicolon, space ( ; ).
See 1.6.

Example: FATHER’S DOING FINE / director, Henry Cass ; producer, Victor

Skutezky

1.1. Title proper

1.1.1. The title proper is the chief name of any moving image material and is the primary access
point to the material. For archival moving image material, the title proper is the title on original
release in the country of origin (cf. 3.5.1 for a definition of the release date). The country of
origin is defined as that of the principal offices of the production company by whom the work
was made. In cases where the original title cannot be determined, the title on the item being
cataloged may be used as the original title. In this case, an explanatory note should be used.
When no title at all can be found for an item, follow the procedure set out in 1.5. The title proper
includes an alternative title but excludes parallel titles and other title information. (See below or
Appendix B, Glossary for a definition of alternative title, parallel title, and other title
information.)

Transcribe the original release title in the country of origin exactly as to wording, order,
and spelling, without omissions, but not necessarily exactly as to punctuation and capitalization.
Give accentuation and other diacritical marks that are present in sources of information. Use an
appropriate standard for transliteration where transcription from a script outside the
typographical capabilities of the archive is involved. For transcribing titles for moving image
materials issued in multiple parts, see 1.1.2.

Examples: JULES ET JIM

The GILDED CAGE

BOB & CAROL & TED & ALICE

If the title on the film includes a statement of responsibility, the name of a company, or a
cast member, etc., do not transcribe it as part of the title proper, regardless of linguistic
construction. If the predominant form of the title in reference works includes the possessive, the
cataloger may include it as part of the title. Create added entries from the title not chosen as the
title proper as appropriate, particularly when citations for such titles vary in secondary sources.
In doubtful cases, do not include the possessive statement of responsibility as part of the title
proper. In most cases the statement of responsibility or name was not intended to be part of the
original release title, but was included for publicity purposes.

Examples: VICTOR/VICTORIA

not BLAKE EDWARDS’ VICTOR/VICTORIA (title on film)

13
 but: Il CASANOVA DI FEDERICO FELLINI = FELLINI’S
CASANOVA

added entries: FELLINI’S CASANOVA

CASANOVA

(Research indicates that the possessive form of

proper name is part of the parallel release title.)

NB: Do not confuse possessive forms or other grammatically related phrases for statements of
responsibility with such phrases or forms which are not statements of responsibility, e.g.,
character names. Treat such forms or phrases as part of the title proper. Create added entries for
part titles which do not include such forms or phrases where, in the judgement of the cataloger,
such part titles would be helpful points of access.

Examples: FATTY’S WEDDING DAY

GANDY GOOSE IN FISHERMAN’S LUCK?

added entry: FISHERMAN’S LUCK

MIGHTY MOUSE IN ALADDIN’S LAMP

added entry: ALADDIN’S LAMP

An alternative title is part of a title proper that consists of two parts, each of which is a
title; the parts are joined by the word “or” or its equivalent in a foreign language. Title cross
references (title added entries) are usually made for the second title. Follow the first part of the
title and the word “or” (or equivalent) with commas and, if following ISBD capitalization
practices, capitalize the first word (and the second if the first word is an article) of the alternative
title.

Examples: DR. STRANGELOVE, OR, HOW I LEARNED TO STOP

WORRYING AND LOVE THE BOMB

Film d’amore e d’anarchia, ovvero, Stamattina

alle 10 in Via dei Fiore nella nota Casa du
Tolleranza

14
1.1.2. Multi-part items

1.1.2.1. Multi-part items issued as a unit and bearing a collective title

Two types of items fall under this category:

1.1.2.1.1. A work may be the result of a deliberate cooperation between various individuals or
production teams, each contributing a separate section to a complete whole, e.g. VISIONS OF
EIGHT. Such works may be described in the style recommended by ISBD for multi-level items,
i.e., information relating to the entire work is given at the primary level, with information on the
contributing sections given at the secondary level.

1.1.2.1.2. The procedure just outlined is not followed in the case of new works containing the
whole of, or substantial extracts from, previous separate works which the cataloging agency
wishes to record in their “new” form. A new work, with its own original title, may be a
conscious exercise in compilation or montage, or may use excerpts from previous works for
comic or social effect, for economy, or for purposes of homage: in all cases, however, the film is
cataloged under its “new” original title. Any work done by the cataloging agency on identifying
the sources of the extracts should be reflected in the notes area, rather than in additional title area
entries.

Examples: DEAD MEN DON’T WEAR PLAID

The LONGEST DAY

WHAT’S UP TIGER LILY?

The LAST PICTURE SHOW

The HARDER THEY COME

1.1.2.2. Items issued in multiple parts, for example, items constituting chapters, parts, or
episodes of an extended but finite fiction or documentary series or of an indefinite series, such as
newsreels, television news or magazine programs, television entertainment series, and
educational films or video intended to be viewed consecutively

Enter the following types of moving image material under their series and episode, part,
individual, or segment titles: television series, theatrical serials, newsreels, educational and
technical series that are intended to be viewed consecutively (if this can be determined). The
principle that the primary access point includes both the series and episode titles is a cataloging
standard in archives for several reasons. In most cases individual titles of parts or episodes are
almost meaningless without the title of the series or serial to which they are subordinate. Placing
series title and episode title in two different places in a catalog description is confusing and
misleading to users. For those archives that are not automated, the benefits of having all the
episodes/parts of a series/serial file in one place is significant.

15
 Episode or part titles should be separated from the series title with the use of a period and
a space (. ). Titles may be presented in block capitals or capitalized in accordance with the
ISBD recommendations (i.e., following rules for capitalization appropriate to the language of the
title). When the episode or part title is preceded by a number or alphabetic designation, record
the designation, followed by a comma, and the episode title. Capitalize the first alphabetic
designation. Added entry access may be provided for episode titles.

Examples: MARY TYLER MOORE. CHUCKLES BITES THE DUST

GENERAL HOSPITAL. NO. 237

INTRODUCTION TO MATHEMATICS. NO. 1, NUMERATION SYSTEMS

The March of Time. Vol. 14, no. 18, Watchdogs of

the mail

WELT IM FILM. NO. 100

WARWORK NEWS. PILOT ISSUE A

1.1.2.2.1. Television series

As noted above, enter television series programs by the series and episode title or part
number, etc., separated by a period, space.

Examples: BONANZA. A FENCE AROUND THE WATERHOLE

AMERICA 2NIGHT. EPISODE NO. 233

M*A*S*H*. ABYSSINIA HENRY

60 MINUTES. VOL. 7, NO. 29

ROOTS, THE FIRST GENERATIONS. SHOW NO. 1

BIFF BAKER, U.S.A. TROUBLE IN PAKISTAN

NBC Reports. Sinai

CBS NEWS SPECIAL REPORT. THE DUKE, 1907-1979

ABC news closeup. The Weekend athletes

16
 For television series and serials that do not have episode titles, but have only number
designations, use the number as the episode title. In most cases, when television episode titles
are present, episode numbers included as part of the episode title do not provide helpful
information to users and may cause confusion. Therefore, when an episode title has been
identified, place the episode number in a note. See 7.2.3.

Examples: GENERAL HOSPITAL. NO. 237

MARY TYLER MOORE. CHUCKLES BITES THE DUST

[Note] Episode no. 233.

Not MARY TYLER MOORE. EPISODE NO. 233, CHUCKLES BITES THE DUST

Optionally, if there is evidence that the episode number is an important element integral
to the episode title, include the number in the title. If the episodes are intended to be viewed
sequentially, optionally include the episode numbers.

If no episode title, number, or other descriptor can be found to distinguish episodes

within a television series, supply an appropriate one (e.g., a regularized number, a date, etc.), and
enclose it in square brackets.

Examples: SALE OF THE CENTURY. [1985-04]

[Note] Episode no. appears on item as 4/85.

REDSKINS REPORT. [1983-10-31]

DRUGS IN THE CITY. [PART 1]

Do not confuse production numbers with episode numbers. Place production numbers
for television entertainment in the notes area. Indicate the type or source of number. If the type
of number is not clear, give the number and a brief explanation. See 7.2.3 and 7.2.18.

Examples: [Note] Episode no. 233.

[Note] Production no. B-324.

[Note] No. 209 appears on leader.

[Note] “Hsp 80” appears on accompanying synopsis.

17
 In addition to a series title and a title of an individual segment or episode, a television
series title may also include a title for a sub-series, i.e., a series within a series. A sub-series is a
group of programs which appears in conjunction with another, more comprehensive, series of
which the sub-series forms a part. Though they may not formally be designated a sub-series, a
group of programs with the same title that is subordinate to or part of a larger series is treated as
a sub-series. There may be several different sub-series within a particular series. The series title,
the sub-series title, and the title of the individual segment or episode are considered part of the
original release title when they appear on the item and/or research indicates the intention that the
work be identified by series, sub-series and individual program title. Precede the title of a sub-
series by a period, space and capitalize the first word of the sub-series (if following ISBD
capitalization practices). Provide added entry access points for sub-series and episode titles.

Examples: ABC SCOPE. The VIETNAM WAR. CHILDREN OF WAR

ABC scope. The Vietnam war. How much dissent?

CBS NEWS SPECIAL. ADVENTURE. LURE OF THE TALL SHIP

CBS news special. Adventure. The Incredible auto race

CBS NEWS SPECIAL. CONVERSATIONS WITH RICHARD SEVAREID.

WILLY BRANDT

DANCE IN AMERICA. MARTHA GRAHAM DANCE COMPANY.

CLYTEMNESTRA

In television particularly, but not exclusively, there may be a secondary series title that
more broadly identifies the context of a particular series title. Such secondary series may be
considered roughly equivalent to publishers’ series for books in that they serve as broad
umbrella-like identifiers, and are not directly linked to specific part titles, or to the
viewing/reading of individual titles in sequential order. An example would be U.S. public
television’s programming group, MASTERPIECE THEATER, which includes separate series
such as UPSTAIRS, DOWNSTAIRS, and of course individual episodes within the series. For
the treatment of these types series titles, see 6. Series area.

1.1.2.2.2. Theatrical serials

Theatrical serials are always intended to be viewed in a specified order. Therefore

chapter numbers and episode titles are usually readily available on the material itself or in
secondary sources. Use the period, space punctuation (. ) to separate the serial title from the
episode number and title. Separate the episode number and the episode title with the comma,
space punctuation ( , ).

18
 Examples: PERILS OF NYOKA. CHAPTER 9, BURNED ALIVE

CAPTAIN MIDNIGHT. CHAPTER 14, SCOURGE OF REVENGE

The TRAIL OF THE OCTOPUS. EPISODE 2, The PURPLE DAGGER

The ADVENTURES OF REX AND RINTY. CHAPTER 1

1.1.2.2.3. Newsreels

For complete newsreel issues, treat the numbering information, such as volume number
and issue number, as the episode title. If no numbering information appears and cannot be
identified, enter the issue date, optionally followed by the episode title. Follow the designation
by a comma. When using ISBD capitalization practices, capitalize the alphabetic designation
and the first word (the first two words if the first word is an article) of the episode or part title.

Examples: The NEWS PARADE. NO. 228

Pathe news. No. 21

News of the day. Vol. 37, no. 284

The MARCH OF TIME. VOL. 14, NO. 13, WHITE-COLLAR GIRLS

PATHE REVIEW. NO. 13, WITH THE PUTNAM EXPEDITION

TO GREENLAND

1.1.2.2.4. Educational and technical series intended to be viewed consecutively

An educational or technical series title and episode title should be considered the title
proper when it can be determined that the work is part of a series intended to be viewed
consecutively or as a group, or that the episodes or segments build upon one another in a
cumulative manner. The presence of numbers is one of the major, though not the only, indicator
of this situation. Segments that are quite short and that are intended to be viewed together, rather
than independently, should be described using their series and segment title. Good judgement
must be exercised in making the determination to describe a work using both the series and
segment or episode titles.

Educational series made for television broadcast should be treated in this manner because
they are television as well as educational series.

19
 Examples: BIBLICAL MASTERPIECES. SONG OF SONGS

INTRODUCTION TO MATHEMATICS. No. 1, NUMERATION

INTRODUCTION TO MATHEMATICS. No. 2, NON-DECIMAL

NUMERATION SYSTEMS

PROCESS PIPING DRAFTING. BASIC PIPING DATA

PROCESS PIPING DRAFTING. SPECIFICATIONS AND

EQUIPMENT DETAIL

MUSIC AS A LANGUAGE. MUSIC AS EMOTION

MUSIC AS A LANGUAGE. MUSIC AS SOUND

1.1.2.2.5. Optional rule – Television news

Although news programs often do have a title proper, archives may choose to format
uniformly regularly scheduled news titles to provide quicker and more consistent access to
television news. The access points important to users are usually network, date, and time
(morning, midday, evening, night). Therefore, for scheduled television news broadcasts, use the
format: (Name of network or originating broadcast station) news. Date (using a designation that
will provide for logical filing or sorting). Time of day (Morning, Midday, Evening, Night, or the
appropriate designation). Using a uniform format allows the user quick access to a particular
newscast and avoids the problems of inconsistently titled items and changes in newscasters.
These instructions do not apply to television news specials or to magazine format programs
which are entered under their titles (see examples in 1.1.2.2.1).

Examples: ABC NEWS. 1983-10-31. MIDDAY

NBC NEWS. 1980-12-12. EVENING

An archive may hold separate feeds or times of broadcast, and will want to make a
distinction between them. Describe them as instructed above and add in brackets, the time and
the word “feed” or its equivalent in another language. For undated news, estimate a date and
enclose it in square brackets.

Examples: CBS NEWS. 1980-11-04. EVENING [6:30 FEED]

CBS NEWS. 1980-11-04. EVENING [7:00 FEED]

NBC NEWS. [1965-12-03]

ABC NEWS. [1978-10-?]

20
 For news programs that are broadcast on the same day, with the same designation, e.g.,
Update, Newsbreak, etc., but at different times, include the time enclosed in brackets following
the title.

Example: CBS NEWS. 1982-09-25. UPDATE [17:20-17:30 EST]

Qualify the call letters of local stations with the name of the city in parentheses.

Example: WTTG-TV NEWS (WASHINGTON, D.C.). 1981-05-05. MIDDAY

1.2. General material designation (GMD)

The use of general material designations is optional and not particularly useful for
moving image archives since full physical details are given elsewhere in the record and holdings
for individual titles may include materials in both formats. Its use is therefore not recommended
for archival moving image cataloging. Institutions wishing to integrate their cataloging records
with records for other media may nonetheless desire to use GMDs. In this case, they should
refer to the rules for usage as outlined in the ISBD (NBM).

ISBD authorizes the use of the following two general material designations for moving
image materials.
motion picture
videorecording

1.2.1. If general material designations are used, add them immediately following the title proper
and enclose them in square brackets.

Examples: HEART TO HEART [motion picture]

STAR VIRGIN [videorecording]

The LIMEJUICE MYSTERY, OR, WHO SPAT IN GRANDMOTHER’S

PORRIDGE? [motion picture]

MAGAZINE. EDITION NO. 48, MARCH MAGAZINE [videorecording]

I LOVE LUCY. THE BLACK WIG [videorecording]

La GUERRE DE FEU [motion picture] = QUEST FOR FIRE1

The CHEESEMAKERS [motion picture] : TRAVELING THROUGH

THE WORLD OF CHEESE2

1
See also 1.3. Parallel titles.
2
See also 1.4. Other title information.

21
1.3. Parallel title

A parallel title is defined in library usage as the title proper in another language and/or
script. For archival moving image cataloging, this concept has been expanded to include any
title qualifying as an original title but which is not used as the title proper (cf. 1.3.3 parallel titles
for international co-productions), any title appearing on the item described which is not an
original title, and any title by which the work in hand is commonly known to users and
researchers. Added entries should be made for parallel titles. Parallel titles are recorded with
wording and spelling as established by an appropriate principal source. Where this involves
transcription between scripts, use an appropriate standard for transliterations.

1.3.1. Parallel titles are transcribed following the title proper (and, if used, the general material
designation) and preceded by a space, equals sign, space ( = ).

Examples: Il DISPREZZO = CONTEMPT

[English title on a subtitled print.]

UTVANDRARNA = The EMIGRANTS

BATTLE OF MARS = JUPITER’S WAR

[Second title is 1943 reissue copy held by cataloging archive.]

ÉTAT DE SIÈGE [motion picture] = STATE OF SIEGE

FILM D’AMORE E D’ANARCHIA, OVVERO, STAMATTINA ALLE

10 IN VIA DEI FIORI ALLA NOTA CASA DI TOLLERANZA =
LOVE AND ANARCHY, OR, THIS MORNING AT 10 IN THE VIA
DEI FIORI AT THE WELL-KNOWN HOUSE OF TOLERANCE
[Alternative title is considered part of the title proper]

CHANDRALEKHA
[No English language title translation available; archive holds
Indian release copy – title is romanized.]

1.3.2. In addition to the mandatory parallel title defined and exemplified in 1.3.1., any single
film or video item may be known by several other titles, any or all of which could be of use to
students or researchers. Archives are encouraged to make this information available where
known, although they retain discretion as to whether it is considered as part of the principal item
description and entered in this area, or relegated to a subsidiary role, e.g., citation in the Notes
area. Titles which in most instances should be placed in the Notes area include: translations of
titles into other languages which are not release titles; script, working, or pre-release titles;
copyright tiles; inventory or storage titles; abbreviated or nickname titles, etc. Titles of related
works, e.g., novels, plays, etc., should be included in notes, not as parallel titles. See 7.2.7.

22
 Examples: WHISKY GALORE! = TIGHT LITTLE ISLAND

[Note] British title released in the U.S. as, Tight little island;
archive holds U.S. release copy.

HEAVEN CAN WAIT

[Note] Based on the play, “It was like this” by Harry Segall
and the screenplay, “Here comes Mister Jordan” by Sidney
Buchman and Seton I. Miller.

La CAGE AUX FOLLES

[Note] Released in the U.S. under French language title; referred

to in English language reference sources as: Birds of a feather.

1.3.3. Parallel titles for film and video material should be entered in the following order: first,
original titles not used as title proper; second, titles on the copy held; third, titles relating to the
formal naming of the film in its country of origin; fourth, titles relating to the formal naming of
the film in the country of the cataloging agency; fifth, any other titles given. Within any one of
these groups, titles may be given in any appropriate order (as found on the copy held,
chronologically, etc.).

1.3.4. Parallel titles for international co-productions; moving image materials produced in bi- or
multilingual countries of origin

When a title is an international co-production, or is produced in a bi- or multilingual

country of origin, and is released under separate titles in the languages of the country of origin or
countries of co-production as well as in other languages, give all the parallel titles in the
languages of the countries of co-production and in the language of the copy the archive holds, if
it is in an additional language. Give the titles in the order of date of release in the countries of
co-production if this information can be determined. If the work was released simultaneously or
the release order cannot be determined, the cataloging agency should select one of the qualifying
titles in accordance with a consistent policy (for example from a list of languages in the archive’s
preferred order, or by reference to an authoritative source.)∗ Give the titles last which are in
languages other than those of the countries of origin.

∗
Such lists will normally give preference to the languages most familiar to researchers in the
country of the archive. For example, the standard list for archival moving image cataloging in
the United States is: (cont. on next page)

23
 Examples: La GUERRE DU FEU = QUEST FOR FIRE

[Title is a Canadian-French co-production first

released in France. Work was released in English
and French versions: archive holds both versions.]

Las SIETE MAGNIFICAS = DONNE ALLA FRONTIERA = FRAUEN,

DIE DURCH DIE HÖLLE GEHEN = THE TALL WOMEN

[Title is a Spanish, Italian, and Austrian co-production and was

released in those countries in the order the titles are recorded. The archive
holds the U.S. release copy which has an English title and sound track.]

Der FANGSCHUSS = COUP DE GRÂCE

[Title is a German-French co-production. The film was released in the

U.S. under the French title. The archive holds the U.S. release copy which
has the French title and English language credits and subtitles.]

El FANTASTICO MUNDO DEL DR. COPPELIUS = DR. COPPELIUS

= The MYSTERIOUS HOUSE OF DR. C.

[Note] Spanish-U.S. co-production; originally released in Spain in 1966 as, El

Fantastico mundo del Dr. Coppelius; released in the U.S. in 1968 as Dr.
Coppelius, and re-released in the U.S. in 1976 as, The Mysterious house of
Dr. C; archive holds 1976 U.S. release.
Released in Great Britain in 1966 under Spanish language title; also
known there as Coppelia.

See 3.2. for additional information on describing international co-productions.

(cont. from previous page)

1. U.S. title (if an American company is involved in the production).
2. U.K. title (if a British company is involved in the production).
3. Other English language title (if an English language speaking country is involved in the
production).
4. French title (if a French company is involved in the production).
5. German title (if a German-speaking country is involved in the production).
6. Other Romance language title (if these language companies are involved in the production).
7. Other Germanic language title (if these language companies are involved in the production).

24
1.4. Other title information

1.4.1. Other title information is defined as a word or phrase appearing in conjunction with, and
subordinate to the title proper, parallel title, or other titles and which qualifies, explains, or
completes the title to which it applies or which is indicative of the character, contents, etc., of the
item, or its production. It includes subtitles, avant-titres, etc., but does not include variant titles.
Separating titles into title proper and other title information is not required simply because such
separation is grammatically possible. Catalogers may constitute subordinate phrases as part of
the title proper when, in their judgement, such phrases form an integral part of the title proper.

Example: CLAYMATION : THREE DIMENSIONAL CLAY ANIMATION

THIS BRITAIN : HERITAGE OF THE SEA

HOUSING CONDITIONS IN LIVERPOOL : CAMERA REPORT ON∗

But: BERLIN DIE SINFONIE DER GROSSTADT

POMPEII, FROZEN IN FIRE

1.4.1.1. Transcribing other title information

Transcribe other title information following the title proper or parallel title to which it
pertains. Transcription is exact as to wording, but not necessarily as to capitalization.

Example: CBS news special. Challenge in the coal mines : men against their union

1.4.1.2. Prescribed punctuation

Separate the title proper (original release title) from other title information by a space,
colon, space ( : ). If a general material designation is used, place it after the title proper and
before the space, colon, space.

Examples: CLAYMATION [motion picture] : THREE DIMENSIONAL CLAY

ANIMATION

THIS BRITAIN [motion picture] : HERITAGE OF THE SEA

INSIDE THE HAYEK EQUATION : AN INTERVIEW WITH

FRIEDRICH VON HAYEK

∗
Title on film: Camera report on HOUSING CONDITIONS IN LIVERPOOL.

25
1.4.1.3. Capitalization

When following the rule of transcribing titles in all upper case letters, this rule may be
extended to include other title information.

When following ISBD capitalization practices, do not capitalize the word following the
colon unless it is a proper name or unless capitalization is otherwise required by the language of
the title.

1.4.2. Abridging or omitting other title information

If other title information is lengthy, either give it in a note or omit it. See 7.2.5. Abridge
other title information only if this can be done without essential loss of information. Indicate
omissions by an ellipsis enclosed in square brackets ( [ … ] ).

If other title information is clearly of very minor importance, for example a newsreel
slogan, or is an avant-titre which grammatically cannot follow the title proper, place it in a note.
See 7.2.5.

1.4.3. Additions to titles

Archives may choose to prepare lists of standardized terms to be used as additions to

titles. An appropriate qualifying addition, provided in brackets as other title information, may be
useful when the title requires explanation, or when the item is dependent upon and identified by
its relationship to another, e.g., trailers, outtakes, rushes, clips, etc. If a general material
designation is used, place it after the title proper. For edited newsreels and excerpts, see 1.5.2.2.

Examples: PSYCHO [motion picture] : [TRAILER]

HILL STREET BLUES : [TELEVISION PROMO]

CHARIOTS OF FIRE : [TRAILER—TV]

ROBIN HOOD AND THE GOLDEN ARROW : [OUTTAKES]

GETTING ACQUAINTED WITH BEES : [TRIMS]

The CECROPIA MOTH! : [EXCERPTS]

The GUN : [RUSHES]

SOME LIKE IT HOT : [STUDY FRAGMENT]

26
1.5. Items without a title

1.5.1. Items without a collective title

A collective title is a title proper for several separate works which have been brought
together into a single unit, for example, for ease of projection, storage, or marketing. Often there
is nothing permanent about such compilations, and often, also, they are untitled.

1.5.1.1. No predominant part

If in an item lacking a collective title, no one part predominates, make a separate

description for each separately titled work. Link the separate descriptions, and indicate whether
the titles on the item were released together or are simply held by the archive in this manner.

Examples: CHEAP AND GREASY

[Note] Released on cassette with: CHANGING THE CHANNEL.

EINSTEIN’S CHILDREN

[Note] Held on tape with: MADAME BUTTERFLY.

1.5.1.2. Numerous works on one item and no predominant part

When a compilation consists of numerous works and no one part predominates, supply a
descriptive title. Individual archives should develop guidelines for determining how many works
are too many to describe separately. For example, compilations may consist of many short
fragments of longer works, or may consist mainly of unidentified or untitled material (cf. 1.5.2).
In some cases, particularly with early moving image material, it may be impossible to determine
whether the separate items are complete works. Give appropriate explanatory notes, a summary
or contents note (see 7.2.16 and 7.2.17.), and appropriate added entries.

27
 Examples: [HAWAIIAN ISLANDS]

[Note] A compilation of twenty-six films, some of which were individually

copyrighted by Thomas A. Edison in 1906, and later released by George
Kleine in his series: SCENES AND INCIDENTS IN THE HAWAIIAN
ISLANDS.

[UNIDENTIFIED LACMNH. NO. 1, LUMIÈRE]

[Note] Includes 58 separate Lumière films; unable to verify completeness. For

tentative identifications and more complete descriptions of technical
problems, see papers in AFI/Los Angeles County Museum of Natural
History Collection file.

1.5.1.3. One predominant part

If one work is the predominant part of the item, treat the title of this work as the title
proper and name the other parts in a note. For the specific cataloging of commercials, see
1.5.2.6.

Example: CBS NEWS SPECIAL. A BLACK VIEW OF SOUTH AFRICA

[Note] Includes commercials for Cascade detergent, Duncan Hines cake mix,
Chanel No. 5 perfume, Salvo detergent.

1.5.2. When no title information can be established for a moving image work, supply a
descriptive title enclosed in square brackets.

If a title appears on an item but is not actually the title of the work (i.e., it may have been
incorrectly spliced on for various reasons), give the incorrect title in a note (see 7.2.4), and
supply a descriptive title. Take into account the ultimate possibility of identifying the film. Give
a cross reference from the erroneous title to the supplied title.

Formulate supplied titles in a manner that will clearly identify the nature of the item
being cataloged. Opening key words or phrases (or their equivalents in other languages) such as
the following are recommended:

28
1.5.2.1. [Unidentified]

Use this introductory word in a supplied title for an untitled work that appears to be a
complete or an incomplete edited production. Use an appropriate descriptor following the word
“unidentified” to further categorize the item. Examples of such descriptors include collection
name, production company, genre, etc. Archives should provide guidelines prescribing the types
of descriptors to be used and standardized lists of appropriate descriptors. Use numbers to
distinguish separate works when there is more than one unidentified work in a particular
descriptor category. Precede the number by a period, space (e.g., . No. 5). Further descriptive
information, such as characterizations of contents, interior titles, or possible titles which could
not be verified through research, may follow the number. Precede such additional descriptive
information by a comma, space ( , ). Give sources for possible titles or any other relevant
information in notes.

Examples: [UNIDENTIFIED KILLIAM. No. 5, The OPEN SWITCH]

[Note] Tentative main title from paperwork and can of original nitrate
material.

[UNIDENTIFIED DAWSON. NO. 69, AVENGED BY THE SEA]

[Note] Title may be an interior title or main title; title could not be verified in
any available secondary sources.

[UNIDENTIFIED EDISON. NO. 4, PARADE OF FIRE EQUIPMENT]

[UNIDENTIFIED BIOGRAPH. NO. 2, COMEDY ABOUT JACK’S

MARRIAGE]

[UNIDENTIFIED WESTERN. NO. 10, TOM MIX]

[UNIDENTIFIED COMEDY. NO. 27, TWO THIEVES ROB HOUSE,

OUTWIT POLICE AND JUDGE]

[UNIDENTIFIED TRAVELOG. NO. 43, FIJI]

1.5.2.2. [Newsclips]

1.5.2.2.1. Use this introductory word in a supplied title for edited news segments from newsreels
and/or television broadcasts. Follow the introductory word with appropriate qualifiers. Use
numbers to distinguish collections of newsclips from one another.

29
 Optionally, give a contents note listing individual segment titles, statements of
responsibility, copyright statements, length, and any other available information important to the
archive’s users.

Examples: [NEWSCLIPS FROM VARIOUS NEWSREELS. NO. 5]

Contents: “New York City: Moral Re-Armament,” PARAMOUNT

NEWS (80 ft.) – “U.S. hails world rally for Moral Re-Armament,
Hollywood, Calif.,” NEWS OF THE DAY (150 ft.) – “Moral Re-
Armament rally draws 30,000 (described by Andre Baruch),” RKO
PATHE NEWS (92 ft.) – “Sportsmen discuss a fitter nation,” GAUMONT
BRITISH NEWS (144 ft.) – “America awake,” PATHE NEWS (201 ft.).

[NEWSCLIPS FROM CBS NEWS. NO. 5]

1.5.2.2.2. Optionally, if all the edited news segments are from the same newsreel/broadcast
company, the title proper may be structured by using the name of the newsreel/telecast and the
qualifier ([excerpts] in square brackets of [excerpts no. _ ] if there is more than one collection of
segments).

Examples: KINOGRAMS. [EXCERPTS NO. 2]

ABC NEWS. [EXCERPTS NO. 5]

PATHE NEWS. [EXCERPTS NO. 6]

Contents: “Newest U.S. submarine goes into commission,” Pathe News

no. 60 [1921] (160 ft.) – “Span of new Memorial Bridge to connect N.H.
and Maine,” Pathe News no. 57 [1923] (72 ft.) – “Celebrate 330th
anniversary of settling of Portsmouth,” Pathe News no. 69 [1923] (99 ft.)
– “World’s largest sub takes first plunge,” Pathe News no. 93 [1927], (c)
21Nov27 MP4478 (134 ft.) – “New Memorial Bridge between N.H. and
Maine,” Pathe News no. 70 [1923] (105 ft.] – “Launch largest submarine
cruiser,” Pathe Sound News no. 1 [1930], (c) 29Dec29; MP1025 (80 ft.).∗

For unedited news material, see 1.5.2.4. For instructions on describing complete
newsreel issues and single segments, see 1.1.2.2.3. For instructions on describing complete news
telecasts, see 1.1.2.2.5.

∗
Pathe began copyrighting newsreels in November 1923 with issue no. 91. Issue number series
were repeated at irregular intervals.

30
1.5.2.2.3. If any or all news segments are unidentified, the same title structure may be used.

Optionally, give a contents note.

Example: [NEWSCLIPS FROM VARIOUS NEWSREELS. NO. 7]

Contents: “There’s a spice to golf,” Pathe Review. No. 134 (5 ft.) –

[Mountain lion] newsreel title unknown (41 ft.) – “Say it in Chinese in
these telephones,” Pathe News. No. ? (71 ft.) – “Teach aviation in
kindergarten,” Pathe News. No. ? (53 ft.) – “Come to talk about scrapping
navies,” Pathe News. No. ? (93 ft.) – “Biggest Pacific liner piles on rocks
in fog,” Pathe News. No. ? (98 ft.) – “U.S. Senator Robert L. Owen,”
newsreel title unknown (124 ft.).

For an untitled edited portion from a news broadcast, such as an interview, use the
introductory word newsclip to emphasize that the complete broadcast is not present. Then
supply a descriptive title and enclose the whole in square brackets. If the title of the complete
program is identified, follow it with a period, space, and supply a descriptive title enclosed in
brackets.

Examples: [NEWSCLIP. CAGNEY, JAMES—INTERVIEW CA. 1965]

WRC-TV NEWS (WASHINGTON, D.C.). 1970-09-17. EVENING.

[NEWSCLIP. LIBRARY OF CONGRESS—AN INTERVIEW WITH
PAUL BERRY]

[Note] Telecast on the NEWS-4 WASHINGTON 7:00 PM news program.

1.5.2.3. [Theme]

Use this introductory word in a supplied title for partially edited moving image materials
which probably never had official titles, were probably not intended to be complete productions,
or may or may not have been organized, but appear to be composed of footage on related topics.
Follow the introductory word with a supplied title which describes the theme. Include important
elements such as personalities, events, dates, places, subjects, etc., and enclose the entire
descriptive title in square brackets. Precede the descriptive portion of the title with a period,
space ( . ). When more than one collection of materials with the same theme exists in an
archive, add a number to distinguish between the collections (e.g., . No. _ ).

31
 Optionally, give a summary describing the content of the material (see 7.2.16.).

Examples: [THEME. EARLY BALLOON FOOTAGE]

[THEME. ORIENTAL SCENES. NO. 2]

[THEME. PEACE RALLIES AND MARCHES IN THE 1970S]

[THEME. WORLD WAR I PATRIOTIC MARCHES. NO. 3]

Alternatively, omit the introductory word, and simply use a supplied descriptive title.

Examples: [ADS AND TOURS OF SEATTLE INDUSTRY]

[PONSELLE, ROSA—SCREENTESTS]

1.5.2.4. [Unedited]

1.5.2.4.1. Use this introductory word in a supplied title for film or video materials which are
completely unedited and which do not all relate to a specific theme. Supply a descriptive term or
phrase following the introductory word and preceded by a period, space ( . ) if appropriate, e.g.,
a collection name.

Examples: [UNEDITED. KLEINE COLLECTION FOOTAGE]

[UNEDITED. MACMILLAN COLLECTION ASSORTED SCENES]

[UNEDITED. JONES COLLECTION FOOTAGE. NO. 4]

[UNEDITED. JONES COLLECTION FOOTAGE. NO. 5]

Optionally, give a summary of the contents of the film or a contents note.

Example: [UNEDITED. KLEINE COLLECTION FOOTAGE. NO. 3]

Contents: (1) A string-manipulated female puppet dances (20 ft.) – (2)

Pans of a golf course with a pond (12 ft.) (3) People view a scenic
waterfall (8 ft.) – (4) Scenes from a fictional film, identified as Orphanage
on original can, possibly a 1905 production; man inserts shot

32
 card, as in other Edison films; plot includes mistreated children (71 ft.).

1.5.2.4.2. Alternatively, use the introductory word [Record] for unedited moving image material
that appears to be coverage of events not specifically staged for the purposes of filming.

Example: [RECORD. JOHNSON COLLECTION. No. 7]

1.5.2.5. [Personal Record]/[Domestic Record]

Use one of these introductory phrases for moving image material, the subjects of which
are personal or family events, i.e., “home movies,” usually produced by an amateur. Prefer the
phrase “[Domestic record]” when family events are emphasized and “[Personal record]” when
they are not. It is of the utmost importance to the integrity of home movie collections to
maintain their original intended organization. Supply the name of the person or family who is
the subject of the material or is its focal point. Precede the name with a period, space ( . ).
Personal names may be recorded either directly or in inverted form, depending upon the
requirements of the archive. If an additional title appears on the film, container, or
accompanying documentation, include it following the square brackets with the period, space
punctuation ( . ). Supply additional numerical or descriptive titles if there are several separate
home movie works that need to be uniquely identified. Enclose the entire supplied title in square
brackets.

Examples: [PERSONAL RECORD. RALPH BARTON]. CAMILLE, OR, The FATE

OF A COQUETTE. 1

[PERSONAL RECORD. RALPH BARTON. NEW YORK SCENES,

PARIS SCENES, EUROPEAN SCENES]2

[DOMESTIC RECORD. ROBERT A. TAFT FAMILY]

[DOMESTIC RECORD. ICKES, HAROLD]. HEADWATERS FARM3

[DOMESTIC RECORD. EUGENE MEYER FAMILY. FAMILY

CAMPING TRIP IN THE CANADIAN ROCKIES]

1
“CAMILLE, OR, The FATE OF A COQUETTE” appears on the item and on accompanying
material.
2
Cataloger has supplied titles for separate segments assembled by Barton.
3
Title, HEADWATERS FARM, appears on container.

33
1.5.2.6. [Commercials], [Public service announcements], etc.

When describing commercials, public service announcements, etc. separately, supply a

title for the commercial, announcement, etc., consisting of the words Commercial, Public service
announcement, or other appropriate descriptor, a period, space, the name of the product, service,
or other interest advertised or promoted. Enclose the descriptor and product, service, etc. in
square brackets. Using the period, space punctuation, include the title of the commercial if there
is one. If there are not unique titles to distinguish different commercials for the same product,
supply a descriptive title and include the entire title in square brackets.

Examples: [COMMERCIAL. AJAX CLEANSER]

[PUBLIC SERVICE ANNOUNCEMENT. ANTI-LITTERING CAMPAIGN]

[COMMERICAL. COCA-COLA CO.]. MEAN JOE GREENE∗

[COMMERCIAL. MILLER BEER]. BILLY MARTIN*

[COMMERCIAL. MILLER BEER]. PIT CREW*

[COMMERCIAL. CHAS. PFIZER & CO. NAPOLEON, KING, SECRETARY]

[COMMERCIAL. CHAS. PFIZER & CO. FARMER’S DAUGHTER]

Structuring the title in this manner provides ready access by format and product or
service. However, based upon the number of commercials to be cataloged by an archive, user
requirements, and cataloging resources available, other elements such as sponsor or title of
commercial may be used to create the descriptive supplied title.

For commercials that appear as parts of television programs, treat the television program
as the predominant work and refer to the commercials in a note. See also 1.5.1.3.

Examples: [Note] Includes commercials.

[Note] Includes commercials for Scott tissues, Comet cleanser,

and Ivory soap.

Optionally, catalog the commercials that appear as parts of television programs

separately.

Theatrical trailers, television trailers, and television promotions for television programs
are described as qualifiers for the work they are promoting or advertising. See 1.4.3.

∗
Titles of individual commercials appear on the item or accompanying materials. Titles in the
other examples were supplied by the cataloger.

34
1.6. Statements of responsibility

Introduction. A statement of responsibility is a statement, transcribed from the material

being described, from accompanying material, or from secondary sources, which relates to those
persons credited with participation in the original production of a moving image work and who
are considered to be of major importance to the work. Credits and their functions are
synonymous with the concept of statement of responsibility.

For recording the names of corporate bodies, including informally constituted groups
such as collectives, communes, etc., credited with participation in the production or distribution
of a moving image work, see Area 4, “Production, distribution, etc.”

For choice of the form of personal name, see standards set by national or international
library agencies, e.g., the Anglo-American Cataloging Rules, 2nd ed., Chapter 22. Record names
as transcribed from accepted authoritative sources. Standardization of names is accomplished
through the use of added entries, i.e., index access points.

1.6.1. Record statements of responsibility relating to those persons credited with participation in
the original production of a moving image work who are considered to be of major importance,
and who have some degree of overall responsibility for the work. Examples of important
functions that indicate some degree of overall responsibility for the work include but are not
limited to: director, producer, screenwriter, cinematographer, and animator. For instructions for
recording statements of responsibility relating to versions/variations of a work, see 2.3 and 2.6.

Because responsibility for moving image materials is most often complex and highly
diverse, archives—particularly those with special interests—should determine the types of
functions they wish to include in this area. These functions may vary from institution to
institution according to he types of moving image material held. For example, an archive
holding television material would probably consider the function of producer more important
than that of director. The opposite would be the case for archives whose collections are
composed of motion picture material. Give persons in the statement of responsibility when they
have made an important contribution to the particular work, even when the type of responsibility
(credit function) is one that may not be considered major in other works or types of work.

Statements of responsibility should be recorded whether or not they appear on the item in
hand. Sources for statements of responsibility which do not appear on the item in hand should be
recorded in the notes area (see 7.2.6). Additional statements of responsibility not recorded in the
statement of responsibility area, e.g., associates,

35
assistants, art directors, commercial sponsors for television programs, should be included in
notes. Cast members should normally be recorded in a separate note. See 7.2.6.1. and 7.2.6.2.
for structuring credit and cast notes.

Examples: The CONTEST KID STRIKES AGAIN / director, Harvey S.

Laidman ; producer, Robert Chenault ; writers, Jim Carson,
Terrence McDonnell ; editor, Peter Parasheles

[Notes] Credits: Music, John Cacavas.

Cast: Patrick Petersen, Alan Napier, Ronnie Scribner.

MUTINY IN THE BIG HOUSE / director, William Nigh ; cast,

Charles Bickford

[Note] Cast: Barton MacLane, Pat Moriarity.

The ETERNAL MOTHER / director, D.W. Griffith ; cast, Mabel

Normand

[Notes] Director from Biograph bulletins 1908-1912.

Cast: Ed August, Blanche Sweet.

1.6.2. Wherever possible, identify the credit function or type of responsibility which the named
persons hold with respect to he moving image work, particularly when that relationship is
unclear. For personal records or domestic records, omit the statement of responsibility area
unless someone other than the person named in the title is responsible for the work, or if the
person named in the title is credited with some function other than that of camera or
photography.

Record the statements of responsibility in the terms and language in which they appear in
the principal source, or elsewhere in the item, its container or accompanying textual matter, in
secondary sources appropriate to the original release, or in the language of the archive. The
order of the statements of responsibility should be determined by the requirements of individual
archives. Give the functions (credits), as they are present, followed by a comma, space, and the
name ( , name). Separate different functions using the space, semicolon, space ( ; )
punctuation. Precede the first statement of responsibility with a space, diagonal slash, space ( / ).

36
 Examples: The PATSY / director, King Vidor ; continuity, Agnes Christine Johnston

M*A*S*H. GUERILLA MY DREAMS / director, Alan Alda ; producers,

John Rappaport and Jim Mulligan ; writer, Bob Colleary

NBC REPORTS. TROUBLE IN COAL COUNTRY / producer-director,

Fred Flamenhaft ; writer, Douglas Kiker ; filmed by Henry Kokojan,
Gregory Andrake ; editors, George Johnson, Donald Macoun

La PATROUILLE ANDERSON = The ANDERSON PLATOON /

director and writer, Pierre Schoendoerffer ;

CREATION / by Stan Brakhage

[PERSONAL RECORD. EUGENE AND AGNES MEYER. FAMILY

CAMPING TRIP IN THE CANADIAN ROCKIES]

1.6.3. Choose the credit function/type of responsibility terms as found on the item unless
secondary research proves them to be inaccurate with relation to the original production, or
unless such transcription would result in lack of clarity. The language of the terms depends upon
the language of the original, of the item in hand, and upon the availability of secondary reference
sources in the language of the original. When there is uncertainty as to the translation of credit
functions, use the terminology as it appears on the item or other sources.

Alternatively, record credit functions in the language of the archive.

Example: Les ENFANTS DU PARADIS / réalisation, Marcel Carné ; scenario et

dialogue, Jacques Prevert ; musique, Maurice Thiriet

or Les ENFANTS DU PARADIS / director, Marcel Carné ; script and

dialogue, Jacques Prevert ; music, Maurice Thiriet

1.6.4. Names of persons appearing in a statement of responsibility may be expanded when this is
considered necessary for full comprehension. Give the expanded form of name in square
brackets immediately following the name as transcribed from the item.

Example: IT’S TRAD DAD! / director, Dick [Richard] Lester ; producer, Milton
Subotsky

37
1.6.5. When transcribing information from the item, treat nouns and noun phrases occurring in
conjunction with statements of responsibility as other title information.

Example: SKYSCRAPER = SKYSKRAPA : A FILM / by Shirley Clarke, Willard

van Dyke, Irving Jacoby [directors]

But, treat nouns or noun phrases indicative of the role of an individual rather than of the
nature of the work as part of the statement of responsibility.

Example: The FLYING MAN / animated by George Dunning ; from a story by Stan
Hayward

1.6.6. When two or more persons perform the same function, the statement of responsibility is
considered to be a single statement. The number of persons (other than the first) recorded in
such a statement is at the discretion of the cataloging agency or archive. Omissions are indicated
by the use of the abbreviation [et al.] enclosed in square brackets. When a single person
performs more than one function, the different functions may also be combined into one
statement of responsibility.

Examples: CITY OF ANGELS. The CASTLE OF DREAMS / director, Robert

Douglas ; executive producer, Jo Swerling, Jr. ; producers, Philip
DeGuere, Jr., William F. Phillips ; teleplay, Stephen J. Cannell, Philip
DeGuere, Jr.

CLAYMATION : THREE DIMENSIONAL CLAY ANIMATION /

director and animator, Will Vinton ; producer and writer, Susan
Shadburne ; animators, Barry Bruce, Don Merkt ; music and effects,
Billy Scream, Paul Jameson.

DANCE IN AMERICA. MARTHA GRAHAM DANCE COMPANY /

director-series producer, Merrill Brockway ; producer, Emile Ardolino ;
choreographed and reconceived for TV by Martha Graham

38
MEN OF BRONZE / producer-director-researcher, William Miles ;
executive producer, Paul Killiam ; photography and editing, Richard W.
Adams ; narration writer, Nancy K. Robinson ; archival film restoration,
Karl Malkames

SKYSCRAPER = SKYSKRAPA : A FILM / by Shirley Clarke [et al.

directors]

L’AMOUR A VINGT ANS / directors, François Truffaut, Renze

Rossellini, Marcel Ophuls, Shintaro Ishihara, and Andrzej Wajda ;
screenplays by François Truffaut, Renze Rossellini, Shintaro Ishihara,
Marcel Ophuls and Jerzy Stawinski ; camera, Raoul Coutard, Mario
Montouri, Shigeo Hayashida, Wolfgang Wirth, and Jerzy Lipman ;
editor, Claudine Bouche ; music, Georges Delerue

39
2. Edition/version/variation area

Contents of Edition/version/variation area

I. Terminology

Introduction
1.1. Edition/version statement for a work with major changes
1.2. Edition/variation statement for a work with minor changes
1.3. Incomplete work
1.4. Reissue/Rerelease
1.5. Remake
1.6. Version
1.7. Variation

II. Rules

Introduction
2.1. Preliminary rule
2.2. Edition/version statement for a work with major changes
2.3. Statements of responsibility relating to a work with major changes
2.4. Production, distribution, etc. information relating to a work with major changes
2.5. Edition/variation statement for a work with minor changes
2.6. Statements of responsibility relating to a work with minor changes
2.7. Production, distribution, etc. information relating to a work with minor changes
2.8. Additional edition/version/variation statements
2.9. Describing multiple variations with minor changes

I. Terminology

Introduction

The term “edition,” used in the traditional manner for monographs, rarely applies to the
description of archival moving image material. The concepts most analogous to edition are
“version” and “variation.” Such “versions” and “variations” may be issued subsequent to or
simultaneously with the original release. The following terminology serves as the framework for
describing and distinguishing moving image works based on major and minor changes in
content.

40
1.1. Edition/version statement for a work with major changes

A version with major changes is a deliberate issue of a moving image production, with
significant changes in content, staffing, etc., such as deletions or additions from a previously or
concurrently issued original production. Such changes are made either during the shooting
and/or production process, or by a distributor at some later date, e.g., when a film is reissued or
rereleased. Reasons for the creation of separate versions with major changes include differing
production or exhibition circumstances, different educational level or age of intended audience,
control by a studio or individual, e.g. changing the ending from a sad to a happy one in order to
enhance the commercial value of a work, time constraints (including commercial breaks), the
simultaneous shooting of a work in different languages, and with differing casts and/or credits
(e.g., Die DREIGROSCHENOPER and L’OPERA DE QUAT’ SOUS), and censorship
restrictions. Separate versions with major changes of moving image works often, but not
exclusively, occur in educational material. The determination that the work is a separate version
with major changes may be difficult to make; in some cases there may be no indication on the
work itself. In cases of doubt, the item should be compared to he original work, if this is
possible. For sound versions of silent material, see Edition/variation statement for a work with
minor changes. When determining whether a change is major, good judgement must be
exercised. A decision that an item being cataloged is a major change version dictates that a
separate cataloging record from that for the original be made to describe it.

The description of a separate version with major changes includes the title for the
separate version, relevant statements of responsibility for the original work, an edition/version
statement (from the item itself, accompanying material, secondary sources, or cataloger-
supplied), statements of responsibility relating to the version (if this information is available),
and production/distribution statements relating to both the original and the version being
cataloged. All places, corporate names, functions, and dates which refer to the version should be
recorded following those relating to the Production, distribution, etc. area (cf. 3. Production,
distribution, etc. statement). If the production information does not differ from the original to the
version, there is no need to repeat the production statement for the version. Record distribution
information for the original related version in the Notes area (see 7.2.7).

Schematic illustrations of descriptions for:

(1) an original work
(2) a version of that work with major changes

1) Original work:

TITLE / statements of responsibility. – Country of original production : original producer

[statement of function], date of original production ; country of original distribution :
original distributor [statement of function], date of original distribution.

41
 2) Separate version with major changes:

TITLE / statements of responsibility for original work. – Edition/version statement for

work with major changes / statements of responsibility relating to version with
major changes. – Country of original production : original producer [statement of
function], date of original production ; country of production of version : producer
of version, [statement of function], date of production of version ; country of
distribution of version : distributor of version [statement of function], date of
distribution of version.

[Note] Distribution information for the original related version.

Examples:

A) Original SPACE SCIENCE : AN INTRODUCTION / director, John Dorf. – US :

work: Coronet Instructional Films [producer, distributor], 1964.

Version with SPACE SCIENCE : AN INTRODUCTION / director, John Dorf. –

major changes: Revised version. – US : Coronet Instructional Films [producer], 1964 ;
US : Coronet Instructional Films [distributor], 1977.

[Note] The original version of this film was released in 1964 by Coronet.

B) Original HEAVEN’S GATE / director-writer, Michael Cimino ; producer, Joan

work: Carelli. – US : Partisan Productions, Ltd. [producer], 1980 ; US :
United Artists [distributor], 1980.

Version with
major changes: HEAVEN’S GATE / director-writer, Michael Cimino ; producer, Joan
Carelli.—[Short version] / re-edited by Michael Cimino and William
Reynolds. – US : Partisan productions, Ltd. [producer, 1980?] ; US :
Johnson County War Company [producer of version], 1981 ; US :
United Artists [rereleaser], 1981.

[Note] A longer version was released by United Artists in 1980 and then
pulled for reediting following negative reviews.

42
1.2. Edition/variation statement for a work with minor changes

An item with minor changes may be described as a deliberate issue of a work in which
the change in content is not significant. Indications of minor changes may be found in
accompanying documentation, publicity material, secondary sources, as well as on the item
itself. Examples of minor changes are changes in sound, such as music, dialogue, sound effects,
language, the addition of a sound track, minute censorship changes, or the addition of a prologue
and/or epilogue. The determination of whether changes are major or minor may be made by a
comparison of the related work with the original work, if both works are available. Individual
archives should develop guidelines for distinguishing major and minor changes.

A decision that the item being cataloged is a variation with minor changes dictates that
the item be included in the cataloging record for the original, i.e., minor changes/variations are
treated as variant copies of the original. Minor changes are described by using: the original title,
a parallel title for the minor change variation if different from the original, statements of
responsibility relating to the original, an edition/variation statement (from the item itself,
accompanying material, secondary sources, or cataloger supplied), statements of responsibility
relating to the variation (if this information is available), and production/distribution, etc.
statements relating to both the original and the version being cataloged.

All corporate names, functions, places, and dates which refer to the variation should be
recorded following the information relating to the original and in the order listed in the
introductory note to the production, distribution, etc. area (cf. Production, distribution, etc. area,
p. 57). If the production information does not differ from the original to the variation, there is no
need to repeat the production statement for the variation. The relationship of individual copies
held by the archive to the information in areas 1-4 may be clarified in the notes area. Such
clarification is particularly important when an archive holds more than one minor change
version.

Schematic illustration of descriptions for:

1) an original work
2) a variation with minor changes

1) Original work:

TITLE / statements of responsibility. – Country of producer : producer name [function],

date of production ; country of distribution : distributor name [function], date of
distribution.

2) Variation with minor changes:

ORIGINAL TITLE = VARIATION TITLE / statements of responsibility for original. –

Edition/variation statement / statements of responsibility for variation. – Country of
original production : original producer name [function], date of original production ;

43
 country of original distribution : original distributor name [function], date of original
distribution ; country of production of variation : name of variation producer
[function], date of production of variation ; country of distribution of variation : name
of distributor of variation [function], date of variation distribution.

Examples:

A) Original WILD, WILD WORLD OF ANIMALS. The OCTOPUS / writer,

work: Seymour Simon. – US : Time-Life Television [producer, 1975?] ; US :
ABC [broadcaster], 1975-05-16.

Work with WILD, WILD WORLD OF ANIMALS. The OCTOPUS / writer,

minor Seymour Simon. – Re-edited for educational distribution. – US : Time-
changes: Life Television [producer, 1975?] ; US : ABC [broadcaster], 1975-05-
16 ; US : Time-Life Multimedia [reissuer], 1976.

B) Original TUMBLEWEEDS / director, King Baggot ; adapted for the screen by C.

work: Gardner Sullivan ; story, Hal G. Evarts. – US : William S. Hart Co.
[producer], 1925 ; US : United Artists [distributor], 1925.

Work with TUMBLEWEEDS / director, King Baggot ; adapted for the screen by C.
minor Gardner Sullivan ; story, Hal G. Evarts. – [Sound version with new
changes: prologue]. – US : William S. Hart Co. [producer], 1925 ; US : United
Artists [distributor], 1925. US : Astor Pictures [reissuer], 1939.

44
(cont.)

1.3. Incomplete work

A distinction must be made between a work that is incomplete and a shortened version of
an original work. A work that is missing reels or parts of reels is considered an incomplete work.
It is not described as a shortened version of an original work. For instructions on how to
describe a work that is incomplete and the relationship of the copy the archive holds to the
original work, e.g., (4 reels of 5 reels, reel 3 is missing), see Chapter 5, Physical description. For
an explanation of a shortened version, i.e., a major change, see Edition/Version statement for a
work with major changes listed previously in this terminology list and 2.2. An exception to this
provision occurs when a work is so incomplete as to consist only of bits and pieces. In this case,
an archive may choose to catalog the item separately, adding the term “EXCERPTS,” or its
equivalent in another language, as other title information, cf. 1.4.3, Additions to titles.

1.4. Reissue/Rerelease

A reissue/rerelease is the releasing of a work, subsequent to the original release, by either

the same distributor or by a distributor other than the original distributor.

A reissue/rerelease can be: a) a version with major changes; b) a variation with minor
changes; or, c) a subsequent issue/release of a work with no changes. In the case of a), follow
the instructions in 2.2, Edition/version statement for a work with major changes. In the case of
b), follow the instructions in 2.3, Edition/variation statement for a work with minor changes. In
the case of c), follow the instructions provided in Chapter 3, Production, distribution, etc. area.

1.5. Remake

A remake is “the later production of a story with different credits, scripts, and/or casts.”∗
Do not confuse remakes with versions. A remake is not a version, but a separate work.
Remakes are related to previous works in notes, if information is available. See 7.2.7.

∗
Gartenberg, Jon. FIAF Glossary of Filmographic Terms. (Brussels: FIAF, 1985), p. 48.

45
1.6. Version

A version is a deliberate “issue of a film [or other moving image work], either later or
contemporaneous, with significant [i.e., major] changes, such as large deletions or additions,
children’s versions, etc.”∗ The term “version” is often understood in this way, but usage has not
been consistent, and “version” has been applied nonspecifically to indicate some change either
major or minor. In this manual, “version” will always be used to describe a work with major
changes. See also Edition/version statement for a work with major changes, Edition/Variation
statement for a work with minor changes, and Variation, defined elsewhere in this terminology
list.

1.7. Variation

A variation is a deliberate issue of a moving image work with minor changes. See also
Edition/version statement for a work with major changes, Edition/variation statement for a work
with minor changes, and Version, defined elsewhere in this terminology list.

∗
Gartenberg, John. FIAF Glossary of Filmographic Terms. (Brussels: FIAF, 1985), p. 42.

46
 Introduction

The edition/version/variation statement is the area where information describing

deliberate major or minor changes in a work will be placed. The distinction between major or
significant changes and minor changes is not simple, and normally requires combinations of
research and viewing. The inclusion of terms on the item itself such as “revised version”, “long
version”, “re-edited”, “revised”, etc. are, with the exception of educational materials and some
television rebroadcasts, relatively unusual. Even when they are present, these terms do not
always signal the existence of significant change. Individual archives, taking into account
cataloging resources and organizational priorities, must define the factors that determine whether
significant change has occurred. Criteria that should be considered are length and continuity.

Major Changes

When an archive determines that there are significant changes in the content of the item
in hand when compared to the original work, the item should be described (cataloged) separately
from its related work.

Schematic illustration of a description for a work with

Major Changes:

TITLE / statements of responsibility for original work. – Edition/version statement for

work with major changes / statements of responsibility relating to version with major
changes. – Country of original production : original producer [function], date of
original production ; country of original distribution : original distributor [function],
date of original distribution ; country of production of version : producer of version
[function], date of production of version ; country of distribution of version:
distributor of version [function], date of distribution of version.

[Note] Title of original related version, if different from title proper, and original distribution
information.

Minor Changes

When the archive determines that the changes in a work are minor, the minor change
variation should be described on one record with the original, i.e., as a variant copy of that
original. If the archive holds both the original and the variant copy, notes can be used to
distinguish variant copies from the original.

47
 Schematic Illustration of a description for a work
with Minor Changes:

ORIGINAL TITLE = VARIATION TITLE / statements of responsibility for original.

Edition/variation statement / statements of responsibility for variation. – Country of
original production : original producer name [function], date of original production ;
country of original distribution : original distributor name [function],. Date of original
distribution ; country of production of variation : name of variation producer [function],
date of production of variation ; country of distribution of variation : name of distributor
of variation [function], date of distribution of variation.

2.1 Preliminary rule

2.1.1. Punctuation

For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 0.3.

Precede this area by a period, space, dash, space ( . -- ).

If there is more than one edition statement which relates to a single

edition/version/variation, precede the additional edition statement with a comma, space ( , ).

Precede the first statement of responsibility following an edition/version/variation

statement for major or minor changes by a space, diagonal slash, space ( / ).

If the catalog record requires a description of more than one edition/version/variation,

precede each new (i.e., parallel) edition statement / statement of responsibility with a space,
equals sign, space ( = ).

2.1.2. Sources of information

Take information recorded in this area from the item, accompanying material, or from
secondary research sources. If the information is from accompanying material or secondary
research sources, cite the source or sources in a note. See 7.2.7.

48
2.2. Edition/version statement for a work with major changes

Schematic illustration through edition/version statement for a

work with major changes:

Title / statements of responsibility. – Edition/version statement.

2.2.1. Transcribe a statement relating to a version of a moving image work as found on the item
or in secondary sources.

Example SNOWBOUND / director, Andrew Young ; producer, Linda Gottlieb ;

writers, E. Pomerantz and Kurt Villadsen. -- Classroom version

2.2.2. In case of doubt about whether a statement is an edition/version statement indicating

major change, research should be performed. Factors such as the differences in length or
running time, or the time span from the original release to the subsequent release of a work, may
help in determining the issue, but are not in all cases indicative of the presence or absence of
major change. For example, if the work was originally released in 16 mm. and issued as a
videorecording the following year, the change may be simply that of format rather than of
content and hence, a minor change. Also, time lost by censorship cuts may be balanced by
longer intertitles, etc.

The presence of such words as edition, version, re-edited, revised, or their equivalents in
other languages, may, but does not always, indicate significant change.

Examples of DISCOVERING COLOR / executive producers, Paul Burnford and Jack

Significant Stoops. -- Revised
Change

HEIDI / director, Allan Dwan ; producer, Raymond Griffith ; screenplay

by Walter Ferris and Julien Josephson. -- School edition

NEVER WEAKEN / director, Fred Newmeyer. -- Re-edited.

49
2.2.3. If the item or accompanying documentation lacks an edition/version statement as such,
but it is known to contain significant changes from the original work or previous works, supply a
suitable brief statement and enclose it in square brackets.

Examples HEAVEN’S GATE / director-writer, Michael Cimino ; producer, Joan

Carelli. -- [Short version]

A CLOCKWORK ORANGE / producer-writer-scenarist, Stanley Kubrick.

-- [Re-edited R-rated version]

HE LOVED AN ACTRESS / director, Melville Brown ; producer,

William Rowland ; story, John Harding. -- [Re-edited for American
release]

2.3. Statements of responsibility relating to a work with major changes

Record a statement of responsibility relating to a particular version with major changes

following the edition/version statement if such statement of responsibility information is
available. If a statement of responsibility is not on the item, but appears on accompanying
documentation or is available elsewhere, include it and cite the source in a note. See 7.2.6.

Examples ODYSSEY. The SAKUDDEI / director-producer, John Sheppard ; made

by anthropologist Reimar Schefold. -- [Re-edited and new narration] /
editor, Alexander Anthony ; producer, Sam Low

HEAVEN’S GATE / director-writer, Michael Cimino ; producer, Joan

Carelli. -- [Short version] / re-edited by Michael Cimino and Raymond
William

[Note] Re-editing information from Los Angeles Times, May 13, 1981, pp. 2
& 6.

50
2.4. Production, distribution, etc. information relating to a work with major changes

Record corporate names, together with their functions, places, and dates, which refer to a
work with major changes in Area 3. Production, distribution, etc. following the corporate name
information for the original and according to the punctuation prescribed for use in that area, cf.
Chapter 3, p. 55. If the production information does not differ from the original to the version,
there is no need to repeat the production information for the version. Record distribution
information for the original related version in the Notes area (see 7.2.7).

Examples SPACE SCIENCE : An INTRODUCTION / Director, John Dorf. --

Revised version. -- US : Coronet Instructional Films [producer], 1964 ;
US : Coronet Instructional Films [rereleaser], 1977.

[Note] The original version of this film was released in 1964 by Coronet.

HEAVEN’S GATE / director-writer, Michael Cimino ; producer, Joan

Carelli. -- [Short version] / re-edited by Michael Cimino and William
Reynolds. -- US : Partisan Productions, Ltd. [producer, 1980?] ; US :
Johnson County War Company [short version producer and soundtrack
alterations], 1981 ; US : United Artists [short version distribution],
1981.

[Note] A longer version was released by United Artists in 1980 and then
pulled for re-editing following negative reviews.

2.5. Edition/variation statement for a work with minor changes

Schematic illustration through edition/variation statement for a

work with minor changes:

TITLE / statements of responsibility. -- Edition/variation statement

2.5.1. Transcribe a statement relating to a variation edition of a moving image work as found on
the item or in secondary sources. Cite secondary sources in notes.

Examples The CONTEST KID AND THE BIG PRIZE / producer, Tom
Armistead ; director, Harvey S. Laidman ; teleplay by Jim
Carlson & Terrence McDonnell. -- Classroom version

51
 Examples (cont.) SPEEDY / director, Ted Wilde ; story and screenplay, John Grey,
Lex Neal, Howard Emmett Rogers, and Joy Howe. -- Re-edited
with musical sound track.

NOSFERATU, PHANTOM DER NACHT = NOSFERATU,

FANTÔME DE LA NUIT = NOSFERATU, THE VAMPYRE /
producer-director-scenarist, Werner Herzog ; executive
producer, Walter Saxer. -- English language dubbed version

2.5.2. An edition/variation statement describing minor changes should be given when: 1) a work
is a deliberate issue, and 2) the change in content from the original is not significant. Research is
most often required to determine whether changes are significant or not. This is particularly true
when an edition statement appears on the work being cataloged. As indicated previously, the
presence of such words as edition, version, re-edited, revised (or their equivalents in other
languages) may, but does not always, indicate significant change.

Example The CONTEST KID AND THE BIG PRIZE / producer, Tom
Armistead ; director, Harvey S. Laidman ; teleplay by Jim
Carlson & Terrence McDonnell. -- Classroom version

2.5.3. If the item or accompanying documentation lacks an edition/variation statement as such,

but is known to contain minor changes from the original or previous works, supply a suitable
brief statement and enclose it in square brackets.

Examples: TUMBLEWEEDS / director, King Baggot ; adapted for the screen

by C. Gardner Sullivan ; story, Hal G. Evarts. -- [Sound version
with new prologue]

MÄDCHEN IN UNIFORM = GIRLS IN UNIFORM / director

Leontine Sagan ; adaptation and screenplay, Christian Winsloe.
-- [New English subtitles]

KITAKITSUNE MONOGATARI = The GLACIER FOX IN

SEARCH OF THE NORTHERN SUN / director-writer,
Koreyoshi Kurahara ; producer, Hiromu Tsugawa ; co-
producer, Atsuchi Tomioka. -- [English narration]

52
 Optionally, if no edition statement appears on the work, accompanying documentation, or
in secondary sources and the changes are minor, do not include a formal edition/variation
statement. A brief, informal statement in the notes area (cf. Chapter 7) may be included to
describe such changes, or, if the minor changes are indicated elsewhere in the record, the note
may also be judged to be unnecessary.

2.6. Statements of responsibility relating to a work with minor changes

Record a statement of responsibility relating to a particular variation with minor changes

following the edition/variation statement if such statement of responsibility information is
available. If a statement of responsibility is not on the item or accompanying documentation, but
is available elsewhere, include it and cite the source in a note. See 7.2.6.

Examples MÄDCHEN IN UNIFORM = GIRLS IN UNIFORM / director,

Leontine Sagan ; adaptation and screenplay, Christa Winsloe. --
[New English subtitles] / Angela K. Krimsky

KITAKITSUNE MONOGATARI = The GLACIER FOX IN

SEARCH OF THE NORTHERN SUN / director-writer,
Koreyoshi Kurahara ; producer, Hiromu Tsugawa ; co-
producer, Atsuchi Tomioka. -- [English narration] / writer,
Walter Bloch ; co-producer, Mark L. Rosen

2.7. Production, distribution, etc. information relating to a work with minor changes

Record corporate names, together with their functions, places, and dates which refer to a
work with minor changes in Area 3. Production, distribution, etc. following the corporate name
information for the original and according to the punctuation prescribed for use in that area (cf.
Chapter 3). If the production information does not differ from the original to the variation, there
is no need to repeat the production information for the variation.

Examples SPEEDY / director, Ted Wilde ; story and screenplay, John Grey
[et al.]. -- Re-edited with musical sound track. -- US : Hal
Roach Studios [producer, 1928?] ; US : Paramount Famous
Lasky Corp. [distributor], 1928 ; US : [Paragon Films] for
Time-Life Films [re-editing and sound track, 1974?] ; US :
Time-Life Films [reissuer], 1974.

53
 Examples (cont.) TUMBLEWEEDS / director, King Baggot ; adapted for the screen
by C. Gardner Sullivan ; story, Hal G. Evarts. -- [Sound version
with new prologue]. -- US : William S. Hart Co. [producer,
1925?] ; US : United Artists [distributor], 1925 ; US : Astor
Pictures [reissuer], 1939.

THE CONTEST KID AND THE BIG PRIZE / producer, Tom

Armistead ; director, Harvey S. Laidman ; teleplay by Jim
Carlson & Terrence McDonnell. -- Classroom version. -- US :
ABC Television Network [producer], 1978 ; US : ABC
[broadcaster], 1978-09-16 ; US : ABC Media Concepts
[reissuer], 1979.

KITAKITSUNE MONOGATARI = The GLACIER FOX IN

SEARCH OF THE NORTHERN SUN / director/writer,
Koreyoshi Kurahara ; producer, Hiromu Tsugawa ; Co-
producer, Atsuchi Tomioka. -- [English narration] / writer,
Walter Bloch ; co-producer, Mark L. Rosen. -- JP : Sanrio
Company Ltd. [producer, distributor], 1978 ; US : Sanrio
Communications [US distributor], 1979.

2.8. Additional edition/version/variation statements

When an item carries two or more edition statements relating to a single

edition/version/variation, precede such subsequent edition statements with a comma, space ( , ).

Examples 2nd ed., revised issue

Italian version, reissued

2nd ed., reissued

2.9. Describing multiple variations with minor changes

When a description of more than one edition/variation is required for a single cataloging
record, provide subsequent edition statements for these variations, if possible in the order of
release date, or in any other order

54
appropriate to the cataloging agency or archive. Precede each subsequent edition statement with
the space, equals sign, space punctuation ( = ). Statements of responsibility referring to the
subsequent (i.e., parallel) edition statements may be included following the edition statement to
which they refer, using the space, diagonal slash, space punctuation ( / ). Parallel edition
statements are given only when the archive holds copies of the editions/variations to which they
refer.

Example NOSFERATU, PHANTOM DER NACHT = NOSFERATU,

FANTÔME DE LA NUIT = NOSFERATU, THE VAMPYRE /
director-producer-screenplay, Werner Herzog ; executive
producer, Walter Saxer. -- [English language subtitled version]
= [English language dubbed version] / English dialogue, Tom
Schachtman, Martje Grohmann. -- DE : Werner Herzog
Filmproduction [co-producer, distributor], 1979 ; FR :
Gaumont, S.A. [co-producer, distributor], 1979 ; US :
Twentieth Century-Fox Film Corp. [distributor], 1979.

55
3. Production, distribution, etc. area

Contents of Production, distribution, etc. area

Introduction
3.1. Preliminary rule
3.2. Place
3.3. Corporate name
3.4. Statements of function
3.5. Date(s)
3.6. Trade names
3.7. Commercial sponsors for television

Introduction

All corporate names, with the exception of the copyright owner, may be recorded in this
area, regardless of function. Since the ways in which corporate names may relate to moving
image materials are complex and highly diverse, archives -- particularly those with special
interests -- should determine the types of functions they wish to include in this area, and these
functions may vary from institution to institution. At a minimum, include the functions of
production and release/distribution. Functions not chosen for inclusion in this area, other than
copyright, may be included in notes (cf. 7.2.8.3). Distributor names should be included in this
area whether they are personal or corporate.

When chosen for inclusion, functions should be listed in the following order: production,
cooperation/in association with, sponsor (other than commercial sponsors for television),
presenter, studio, laboratory, distribution/release, network or station on which aired. Accompany
each name which represents a different function with a place name and a date.

Examples CARING FOR CATS / director, Fred Jones ; research William

Brown, Arthur Hensley & Robert Snade. -- US : produced by
Encyclopaedia Britannica, 1978 ; US : in association with
Palomar Productions, 1978 ; US : released by Encyclopaedia
Britannica, 1979.

THE PRISONER OF ZENDA / director, Richard Quine ;

producer, Walter Mirisch ; screenplay, Dick Clement and Ian
La Frenals. -- US : The Mirisch Corporation [producer], 1979 ;
US : Universal [releaser], 1979.

56
 When more than one corporate name is associated with a particular function, as in the
case of international co-productions, list the places, names, and dates of production first,
followed by those for cooperation, sponsorship, presentation, studios, laboratories, and
distribution/release, as appropriate. Within functions, list places, names, and dates in an
appropriate order (as found on the copy held, chronologically, etc.). Archives will normally
choose a method of ordering multiple names within functions, and should try to coordinate this
choice with that for choice of order for parallel titles (cf. 1.3.3).

Example Der FANGSCHUSS = COUP DE GRÂCE / director, Volker

Schlöndorff ; producer, Eberhard Junkersdorf ; screenplay,
Geneviève Dorman, Margarethe von Trotta and Jutta Brückner.
-- DE : Bioskop Film [producer], 1976 ; FR : Argos Films
[producer], 1976 ; DE : Filmverlag der Autoren [distributor],
1976 ; FR : Argos Films [distributor], 1976.

As noted earlier, a film can often be rereleased/reissued at a later date by the same
company or by a different company which has purchased the distribution rights from the
originator. Record all corporate names, functions, places, and dates which refer to such later
releases/reissues following the information relating to the first release, and in the same order.
Indications as to which of the archive’s holdings correspond to any rerelease/reissue may be
included in the Notes area (cf. 7.2.8.2 and 7.2.10.7).

Example GRANDMA’S BOY / director, Fred Newmeyer ; story Sam

Taylor, Jean Havez, & Hal Roach. -- [Re-edited with an added
sound track]. -- US : Pathe [producer, distributor], 1922 ; US :
Time-Life Films [producer, distributor of reissue], 1974 ; US :
by arrangement with the Harold Lloyd Foundation, 1974.

For instructions on whether or not to catalog the item in hand separately from the
original, see Chapter 2, Edition/version/variation statement.

Data to be included in this area may be taken from the item in hand, or from any relevant
secondary source. Record sources for production, distribution, etc. information which do not
appear on the item in hand in the Notes area (cf. 7.2.8).

57
3.1. Preliminary rule

3.1.1. Punctuation pattern

Precede the production, distribution, etc. area by a period, space, dash, space ( . -- ).

Precede each corporate name listed within the same publication, distribution, etc.
statement and referring to the same function by a space, colon, space ( : ).

Enclose a supplied statement of function in square brackets; precede the first bracket by a
space and follow the second bracket by a space ( [ ] ).

Precede each date by a comma, space ( , ).

Precede each subsequent publication, distribution, etc. statement by a space, semi-colon,

space ( ; ).

Examples

. -- Place : corporate name [function], date.

. -- Place : corporate name [function A], date ; place : corporate name [function
B], date

3.1.2. Sources of information

Take information recorded in this area from the item, accompanying material, or from
secondary research sources. If the information is from accompanying material or secondary
research sources, cite the source or sources in a note. See 7.2.8.

3.2. Place

3.2.1. Record the name of the country which relates to the function of the corporate body to
follow. The ISBD Alpha 2 codes are recommended for recording the names of states currently
in existence.✱ Exclude information about city or other geographic subdivision, unless it is
considered particularly relevant to the cataloging agency. Remember that all production,
distribution, etc. statements which refer to the original release should be listed before those
relating to subsequent releases.

Example Il LEONE DI SAN MARCO / script, Arrigo Frusta. -- IT :

Ambrosio [producer], 1914 ; IT : Ambrosio [distributor], 1914.

✱
IFLA International Office for UBC. Names of States: an Authority List of Language Forms for
Catalogue Entries. London: IFLA International Office for UBC, 1981.

58
 Optionally, include names of cities, when this information is considered of importance to
the archive.

Example ART IN AMERICA : FOLK ART / producer, director, and writer,

Irene Zmerkevych. -- West Hollywood, Calif., US : Handel
Film Corp. [producer, distributor], 1979.

3.2.2. When place is uncertain, include the name of the probable country and a question mark,
all enclosed in square brackets. When no country can be found, supply the abbreviation “s.l.”
enclosed in square brackets.

Examples [AR?]
[s.l.]

3.2.3. When more than one place is associated with a particular corporate name and function,
either choose the place which has primary importance, or include all the named places. Separate
place names with the space, semi-colon, space punctuation ( ; ). Additional places not chosen
for inclusion in the Production, distribution, etc. area may be given in the Notes area.

Examples AR ; CL
CH ; FR ; DE

3.2.4. Record places relating to corporate names associated with reissues/rereleases following
those related to the original.

Example I DUE MECHANISTI = The RIVAL ENGINEERS / [personal

credit names unknown]. -- IT : Cines [producer, distributor],
1913 ; US : George Kleine [distributor], 1913.

59
3.2.5. When no corporate name is associated with a moving image work, give the country of the
main residence/nationality of the person(s) responsible for the work.

Examples CREATION / by Stan Brakhage. -- US : Stan Brakhage [producer,

distributor], 1979.

[PERSONAL RECORD. RALPH BARTON]. CAMILLE, OR,

THE FATE OF A COQUETTE / photographed and edited by
Ralph Barton. -- US, [1926?].

3.3. Corporate name

3.3.1. Record corporate names and personal names credited with production or distribution
functions following the places with which they are associated. Precede such names with the
space, colon, space punctuation ( : ). Record names as transcribed from the item itself or from
secondary sources. Standardization of names is accomplished through the use of added entries,
i.e., index access points.

Examples CBS NEWS SPECIAL : MR. ROONEY GOES TO

WASHINGTON / director, producer, writer, Andrew A.
Rooney. -- US : CBS News [producer], 1975 ; US : CBS
[broadcaster], 1975-01-26.

The LEGEND OF THE WILLOW PLATE / director, George A.

Lessey ; adapter, Hettie Gray Baker. -- US : Thomas A. Edison,
Inc. [producer, distributor], 1914.

3.3.2. When no corporate name can be found for either the production or distribution functions,
but it can be assumed that such names are associated with the work, supply the abbreviation
“s.n.” enclosed in square brackets.

Example [VAUDEVILLE ACTS] / [personal credit names unknown]. --

[S.l. : s.n., 191-?].

60
3.3.3. When cataloging individually created works which were not intended for distribution, and
where no corporate body is associated with the work, do not supply the abbreviation “s.n.” as
part of the production, distribution, etc. area, i.e., omit this portion of the production,
distribution, etc. statement.

Examples [PERSONAL RECORD. HAROLD ICKES]. HEADWATERS

FARM. -- US, 1943.

[THEME. PAPUA NEW GUINEA. IATMUL PEOPLE] /

anthropologists, Margaret Mead and Gregory Bateson ;
photography, Gregory Bateson. -- US, 1938.

3.3.4. Record the names of corporate bodies relating to reissues or rereleases in subsequent
statements of production, distribution, etc. Such subsequent statements must follow those
relating to the original release and should occur in the same order recommended for original
release information.

Example DUE SUPERPIEDI QUASI PIATTI = CRIMEBUSTERS /

director and writer, E. B. Clucher. -- IT : [s.n., producer,
distributor], 1976 ; US : United Artists Corporation
[distributor], 1979.

3.3.5. Optionally, if two or more companies perform the same function, and the place names and
dates are identical for each, they may be listed together, separated by a space, colon, space ( : ).
Depending upon local requirements, archives may also omit additional names for corporate
bodies performing the same function. Such omissions are indicated by the word “[etc.],” or its
equivalent, enclosed in square brackets.

Examples L’OIE = The GOOSE / director, Gilbert Gratton. -- CA : Les Films

Gilbert Gratton-Télé Métropole, Inc. [producer], 1978 ; CA :
Bouchard & Associés : Thomas Howe Associates [distributors],
1978.

GANDHI / produced and directed by Richard Attenborough ;

written by John Briley. -- IN ; GB : Indo-British Films, Ltd.
[producer], 1982 ; in association with International Film
Investors [etc.], 1982 ; IN : in association with the National
Film Development Corporation of India, 1982 ; GB :
Columbia-E.M.I.-Warner Distributors, 1982.

61
3.4. Statements of function

3.4.1. Statements of function should be added to corporate names in order to clarify functions.
If desired, statements may be transcribed in full from the item, or a supplied statement may be
added in square brackets immediately following the name, space. For the order in which
functions should appear, see 3. Introduction, p. 57.

Examples US : produced by Disney Studios, 1938-1939 ; US : released by

RKO Radio Pictures, 1939.

AU : Film corporation of Western Australia [producer], 1982 ; AU

: GUO Film Distributors, 1982.

3.4.2. When the function performed by a particular corporate entity is unclear or cannot be
determined, supply the phrase “[function undetermined]” enclosed in square brackets. When the
function is probable but not certain, provide the function name followed by a question mark,
both enclosed in square brackets.

Examples [function undetermined]

[producer?]
[producer, distributor?]

3.4.3. Optionally, if the same company performs several functions, and the place name and date
are identical for each, the statements of function can be combined within one set of square
brackets. Separate functions with a comma, space ( , ).

Examples US : Pathe [producer, distributor], 1922.

IT : Cines [producer, distributor], 1913 ; US : George Kleine

[distributor], 1914.

but US : CBS News [producer], 1975 ; US : CBS [broadcaster], 1975-

01-26.

US : Thomas A. Edison, Inc. [producer, 1914?] ; US : Thomas A

Edison, Inc. [distributor], 1914.

62
3.5. Date(s)

3.5.1. Record dates relating to corporate names and functions following the corporate
name/indication of function to which they refer, i.e., production dates should be given for
producers, release dates for distributor, etc. Normally, year dates are completely adequate for all
dates except release dates. Production dates may include a span of years.

Release dates for films are defined as “the year, and if known the day and month, on
which the film was first offered for distribution.”1 In certain circumstances, it may be more
appropriate to use the date of first public screening in the form finally offered for distribution.
Explain release dates based on first public screening dates and any other special problems
relating to dates in the Notes area (cf. 7.2.8.4). Release dates for television are interpreted to be
the date of first broadcast, and should include the month and day, as well as the year. Optionally
for television, add the time of the broadcast in parentheses following the date. Indicate times
utilizing the 24 hour clock, adding information about time zone, if appropriate.

Record dates in Arabic numerals in the following sequence: year-month-day. Use four
digits to represent the year, two digits to represent the month, and two digits to represent the day.
Separate the digit sequences with a hyphen.2 Sources for dates which are not on the item are
given in the Notes area (cf. 7.2.8.4.).

Examples 1975

1981-04-25

1974-08-17 (20:00 EST)

1922 [not MCMXXII]

1
Gartenberg, Jon. FIAF Glossary of Filmographic Terms. (Brussels: FIAF, 1985), p. 40.
2
These instructions follow the ISO standard for recording dates ISO 2014-1976(E).

63
3.5.2. When dates given on the item are known to be incorrect, supply the correct date as taken
from secondary sources and cite the incorrect date in a note.

Example 1976

[Note] Library of Congress copy gives date as “1796.”

3.5.3. Record dates related to corporate names connected with subsequent issues or releases
immediately following such names and functions.

Example THE RIVAL BROTHERS’ PATRIOTISM = SUBLIME

SACRIFICE / [personal credit names unknown]. -- US : Pathe
[producer, distributor], 1911 ; US : American Kin [rereleaser,
191-?]

3.5.4. If no date can be found relating to a particular corporate name/function, either on the item
or through secondary research, supply an approximate date in square brackets.

Examples [1971 or 1972] One year or the other

[1969?] Probable date

[between 1906 and 1912] Use for date spans, the outside limits
of which can be precisely determined

[ca. 1960] Approximate date

[191-] Decade certain

[191-?] Probable decade

3.5.5. For non-commercial footage, personal or domestic records, outtakes, unedited footage,
etc., give the year the footage was shot. If the year is unknown, give an approximate date as
instructed in 3.5.4. In most instances, a note should be given which further explains the date.

64
 Example [PERSONAL RECORD. EUGENE MEYER FAMILY. FAMILY
CAMPING TRIP THROUGH THE CANADIAN ROCKIES].
-- US, 1926.

[Note] Date from notes accompanying film, attached to inventory, and

from Merlo Pusey’s Eugene Meyer, (New York: Knopf, 1974), p.
195.

3.6. Trade names

A trade name is an arbitrarily adopted name given by producers and/or distributors of

moving image works to all, or to particular groups, of their works to distinguish them as being
exclusively identified with such producers and/or distributors. Trade names may often be
confused with production/distribution functions because they typically include part or all of the
names of the companies with which they are associated. Because trade names are typically
assigned to groups of moving image works, they may also often be confused with series titles.

Research must typically be performed to determine the precise nature of a trade name.
Record names determined to be actual trade names in the Notes area (cf. 7.2.8.5). If, after
performing research, doubt remains as to whether or not a name is a trade name, treat the name
as a series title, and include it in the Series area (cf. 6.2).

Examples [Note] The trade name “A Triangle Comedy”

appears on title frame.

[Note] The trade name “A Universal Jewel”

appears within the credit sequence.

3.7. Commercial sponsors for television

Television programs may have commercial sponsors whose only relationship to the
program is financial, i.e., the sponsors do not have any production or editorial control over the
work. In such cases, include the names of sponsors in the Notes area (cf. 7.2.8.6). Alternatively,
they may be omitted entirely.

65
 Examples CBS NEWS SPECIAL. A BLACK VIEW OF SOUTH AFRICA

[Note] Includes commercials for Cascade detergent, Duncan Hines cake

mix, Chanel No. 5 perfume, and Salvo detergent.

ALL AMERICA WANTS TO KNOW. MURDER BY MAIL

ORDER

[Note] Includes commercials.

N.B. Do not confuse such tangential sponsors with sponsors who do exercise editorial and/or
production control over entire films or television programs. Include the names for these types of
sponsors in the Production, distribution, etc. area, as prescribed in 3. Introduction, p. 57.

Example LEVI’S FOR FEET

US : Compix [producer], 1975 ; US : Levi’s for Feet Division,

Brown Shoe Company [sponsor, distributor], 1975.

66
4. Copyright statement area

Contents of Copyright statement area

Introduction
4.1. Preliminary rule
4.2. Copyright and country
4.3. Registration notice
4.4. Copyright owner (claimant)
4.5. Unprotected materials
4.6. Copyright status unknown
4.7. Subsequent ownership

Introduction

Record information about copyright status, owners, dates, and registrations, if this
information is considered of importance to the archive. Such information is useful for a
researcher in beginning a search for rights, but does not absolve him/her from satisfying all legal
requirements for obtaining rights to copy or use an archive’s materials. For instructions about
providing information concerning restrictions other than copyright, see Notes area, 7.2.22 and
7.2.23. Some archives may prefer to maintain separate files for information about copyright and
other restrictions.

4.1. Preliminary rule

4.1.1. Punctuation pattern

Precede the copyright statement area by a period, space, dash, space ( . -- ).

Precede the indication of country by a colon, space ( : ).

Precede the name of copyright owner by a space, colon, space ( : ).

67
 The remaining punctuation should follow the order and format of copyright
documentation for countries which have registration systems.

For countries that do not have registration systems, precede the date by a space, semi-
colon, space ( ; ).

Precede statements of subsequent ownership by a period, space, dash, space ( . -- ).

4.1.2. Sources of information

Take information recorded in this area from the item, accompanying material, from
secondary sources issued by the official copyright agency of the country for which copyright
information is recorded, or from other secondary research sources.

4.2. Copyright and country

Ordinarily the first element of the copyright statement is the world “Copyright” followed
by a colon.

Example Copyright:

Optionally, use a “c” enclosed in parentheses, (c), or the copyright symbol, “©” (if it is
available in the character set being used) as the first element of the copyright statement. Follow
the (c) or © by a colon.

Record the country to which the copyright statement refers as the second element of the
copyright statement area. The ISBD Alpha 2 codes are recommended for recording the names of
countries currently in existence.∗ Follow the code or name of the country by a space, colon,
space ( : ).

∗
IFLA International Office for UBC. Names of States: an Authority List of Language Forms for
Catalogue Entries. London: IFLA International Office for UBC, 1981.

68
 Examples Copyright: US : Twentieth Century-Fox Film Corporation

(c): US : Encyclopaedia Britannica Films, Inc.

©: US : Yale University

4.3. Registration notice

For countries which have registration systems, record the copyright registration
information in the same order and format as it appears in the copyright documentation or
catalogs. Record inaccuracies or misspelled words as they appear in the copyright
documentation or catalogs. Follow such inaccuracies either by [sic] or by the abbreviation i.e.
and the correction in square brackets. Supply a missing letter or letters in square brackets. If
further clarification is needed, give information about inaccuracies or other additional
information in a note. See 7.2.9.

Examples Copyright: US : Monogram Pictures Corp.; 2Oct39; LP9166.

©: US : Twentieth Century-Fox F[i]lm Corporation. DCR 1979;

PUB 18Sep79; REG 25Nov80; PA 89-0508.

Copyright: US : Blazed Trial [i.e. Trail] Productinos [sic];

23Sep21; LP16984.

Optionally, the archive may choose to omit portions of lengthy copyright statements.
Such omissions do not require ellipses.

Record names as transcribed from the item itself or from secondary sources.
Standardization of names is accomplished through the use of added entries, i.e., index access
points.

69
4.4. Copyright owner (claimant)

For countries which do not have registration systems, or in cases where no registration
information can be found, but the word “copyright” or the copyright symbol (©) does appear on
the item, record the copyright owner’s name and date as found in the notice. Convert dates given
in roman numerals to arabic numerals. Separate the name of the owner from the date by a space,
semi-colon, space ( ; ), indicating in the introductory phrase where the notice was found and
omitting any reference to a country. Record first the claimant’s name followed by the date. If
the notice omits either the owner’s name or the date, these may be omitted without further
indication.

Examples Copyright notice on film: Metropolitan Life Insurance Company ;

1941.

© notice on film: Omni-Zoetrope ; 1981.

Copyright notice on film: Trans Artists Productions, Inc.

(c) notice on film: 1972.

4.5. Unprotected materials

If research has satisfied the archive that the item is in the public domain, or, in countries
where registration systems exist, that the item was not registered for copyright, indicate that
information in this area. Citations of sources for this information may be given in a note, cf.
7.2.9.

Examples Copyright: US : public domain.

©: US : no registration.

70
4.6. Copyright status unknown

If there is a question that the item may or may not be protected by copyright, do not enter
data in this area, or, record “Copyright: unknown.” Alternatively, for countries which have
registration systems, record the code for the country, followed by “registration status unknown.”

Examples Copyright: unknown.

(c): US : registration status known.

4.7. Subsequent ownership

Optionally and when available, include information about present copyright owners in
subsequent statements. Always give copyright information for the original work first, if it is
available. Separate subsequent statements by a period, space, dash, space ( . -- ), and make
appropriate distinctions.

Examples PANDORA AND THE FLYING DUTCHMAN / ...

Copyright: US : Dorkay Productions, Inc.; 5Apr51;

LP1121. -- Present US copyright owner, Raymond
Rohauer.

The BANK / ...

(c): US : Essanay Film Mfg. Col.; 14Aug15; LP6086. --

(c): US : Black, Inc., A.G. Prev. reg. 1915, LP6086. NM:
“New sound track.” DCR 1973; PUB 3Mar73; REG
18Jul80; PA 117-542.

71
5. Physical description

Contents of Physical description area

Introduction
5.1. Preliminary rule
5.1.1. Punctuation pattern
5.1.2. Sources of information
5.2. Specific material designation
5.2.1. Copy status (generation)
5.2.2. Order of physical descriptions
5.2.3. Playback mode or projection format
5.3. Extent of item
5.3.1. Reels
5.3.2. Completeness
5.3.2.1. Incomplete items
5.3.2.2. Unit numbering uncertain or unknown
5.3.2.3. Original release length unknown
5.3.2.4. Incomplete reels
5.3.3. Copies in formats other than the original format of the work
5.3.3.1. Personal records, stock footage, outtakes, etc.
5.3.4. Length and/or duration
5.3.4.1. Length
5.3.4.2. Duration
5.3.4.3. Separate works on a single item
5.4. Dimensions
5.5. Other physical details
5.5.1. Film base
5.5.2. Color characteristics
5.5.3. Sound characteristics
5.6. Inventory or location number
5.6.1. Copy number

72
 Introduction

The purpose of the physical description area is to record the physical characteristics of
each item pertaining to a particular work existing within the collections of the archive and to
relate these -- in a logical, clear, and precise fashion -- to the physical characteristics of an
“ideal” or “perfect” copy. Archives need to know exactly what holdings of variant copies or
pieces of copies they have on a single title. They also need to know the physical characteristics
and conditions of these copies or pieces in order to preserve them and to provide responsibly for
their usage. Such information will also be of value to other archives when exchanging
information about film preservation plans.

Moving image archives have special problems in describing their holdings accurately.
An archive or specialized film library can easily have a large number of physically separate
items, e.g., picture, track, music and effects, all of which are essentially parts of a single film.
archives regularly use these parts of a single work in copying and reconstruction, a process
which is totally dependent on the existence of clear, logical records of all the film parts.
Consequently, it is necessary that all elements be described accurately and carefully, with a
terminology which draws together component parts of negatives, mastervideo, masterpositives,
tracks, prints, etc., indicating generational relationships and providing a quick method for
comparing each set with the next. This is done by providing multiple lines of physical
description, each arranged in a standardized manner. Archives may wish to maintain separate
files for recoding highly technical information.∗

To compound archives’ problems with physical description further, the materials entering
the archive are generally not new. They may or may not be complete, and they may or may not
have suffered extensive damage from use prior to their receipt by the archive. If such materials
are unique (and with film materials, they often are), they are extremely important -- despite their
possibly poor physical condition -- to the archive’s mission of preserving the world’s heritage of
moving image works. Most typically, archival moving image materials must be copied to be
preserved. Thus, the information recorded in the physical description area is changeable. New
physical description statements must be added as additional copes are received or are generated
by the archive’s preservation process. Existing physical description statements must be amended
or deleted as pieces or whole copies are damaged or discarded.

If the work being described exists in more than one copy -- in which the physical
characteristics differ in one way or another, e.g., copy status (generation), length, gauge, base,
sound, color, etc. -- archives should provide a separate physical description for each variant
copy. It is especially advisable to link the physical description of each unit to the storage
location number in order to provide for access and retrieval.

∗
See Karnstädt, Hans and Schulz, Günter. Guidelines for the Description of Technical Data on
Film and Video Material in Filmarchives. (Brussels: FIAF, 1990).

73
 For the purposes of creating the most logical, clear, and concise physical descriptions of
archival holdings for moving image materials, these rules arrange their characteristics into
groups. The most important characteristics are listed first, followed by other characteristics in a
descending order of importance. Specific or unusual details concerning physical characteristics
which are not incorporated into the physical description area may be given in the Notes area (cf.
7.2.10.10).

The physical description area consists of five subareas. They are:

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Specific material designation: extent of item ; dimensions : other physical details / location.

Four of the five subareas are further divided into more specific elements which are
included as they apply.

Subarea Elements

Specific material designation: Copy status (generation)

Playback mode or projection format

Extent of item: Number of units and completeness

(if known)
Length and/or duration

Dimensions: Gauge or width

Other physical details: Film base

Color characteristics
Sound characteristics
∗
Location: Archive symbol/location number(s)
Copy number(s)

Examples

Duplicate negative: 8 reels of 8 (7557 ft.) ; 35mm. : N., col., sd. / USW FPA 5705-5712, copy 2.

Video viewing copy (VHS): 2 cassettes of 3 (c2-3) (90 min.) ; 1/2 in. : col., sd. / GBI xxxnnn.

∗
Archive symbols from “FIAF member code list.” Brussels: FIAF, 1990. See Appendix F.

74
5.1. Preliminary rule

5.1.1. Punctuation pattern

Start a new paragraph or precede each physical description statement by a period, space,
dash, space ( . -- ). If each physical description begins a new paragraph, follow it with a period.
(The examples in this chapter begin new paragraphs.)

Enclose the format of playback modes, projection formats, or other indications of a

particular technical system in parentheses when the use of the item is conditional upon this
information, or when it is otherwise considered of importance to the archive, e.g. (VHS), (CED).

Precede the extent of item subarea by a colon, space ( : ).

Enclose the length and/or duration in parentheses, e.g., (3745 m.), (8990 ft.), (90 min.).

If both length and duration are given, separate length from duration by a comma, space,
e.g., (1080 ft., 58 min.).

Precede the dimensions subarea by a space, semi-colon, space ( ; ).

Separate the numeric part of the dimensions from the abbreviation indicating scale by a
space, e.g., 35 mm., 1/2 in.

Place a period after the abbreviation describing dimensions, e.g., mm., in.

Precede the other physical details subarea by a space, colon, space ( : ).

Separate elements within the other physical details subarea with commas.

Enclose specific color or sound characteristics in parentheses, e.g., (tinted), (optical).

Precede the location subarea by a space, slash, space ( / ).

Precede a copy number by a comma, space ( , ).

75
5.1.2. Sources of information

Measure or otherwise take information recorded in this area regarding actual holdings
from the items being cataloged; take information recorded in this area regarding the “ideal” or
“perfect” copy from the item being cataloged or from any secondary source.

5.2. Specific material designation

The first element of the specific material designation subarea names the unit or units
constituting the item. Most typically, this name is related to the copy status (generation) of the
unit. The second element of the subarea indicates playback mode, projection format, or other
technical specifications.

5.2.1. Copy status (generation)

Archives should develop standard lists of terms describing the copy status (generation) of
their holdings for use in this subarea.∗ English language examples include, but are not limited to:

Film Video

archival original negative video master

material reversal original positive
masterpositive
duplicate negative
negative track
magnetic track
positive track
reversal print

viewing viewing print/reference print video viewing copy

material distribution print

∗
For additional terms, see Karnstädt and Schulz. Guidelines for the Description of Technical
Data...

76
 Examples∗

Viewing print: 1 cartridge of 1 (160 ft., 8 min.) ; super 8 mm. : S., col., sd. /

Reference print: 2 reels of 2 (2160 ft., 60 min.) ; 16 mm. : S., col., sd. /

Video viewing copy (Beta): 1 cassette of 1 (60 min.) ; 1/2 in. : col., sd. /

Original negative: 4 reels of 4 (1167 m.) ; 35 mm: N., b&w, si. /

Negative track: 4 reels of 4 (1167 m.) ; 35 mm : N., sd. /

Video master: 1 reel of 1 (30 min.) ; 2 in. : col., sd. /

Masterpositive: 3 reels of 3 (2760 feet.) ; 35 mm. : P., b&w, sd. /

Video viewing copy (CED): 1 disc of 1 (120 min.) ; 12 in. : col., sd. /

5.2.2. Order of physical descriptions

Archives should develop a preferred order of physical descriptions. For example, some
archives may elect to list the oldest or earliest generation items first, while others will prefer to
list the most expendable of their viewing copies first. Determinants to be considered in
providing an order for physical descriptions include: specific material designation, base, and
dimension.

Whatever system archives use to determine their preferred order, it is essential that
important integral relationships between linked copies are maintained by placing them together
in the listing: for example, a sound track unit should be placed immediately after the picture unit
to which it corresponds; color separation masters should be listed together, etc.

∗
For the sake of clarity, examples are given in full; explanations for each component section of
the Physical description area appear on the following pages.

77
 Examples

Masterpositive: 10 reels of 10 (2987 min.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, si. / USW FBP 2345-2354.
Double edge positive track: 10 reels of 10 (2987 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., sd. / USW FPB 2355-2350.

Duplicate negative: 6 reels of 7 (r1-5, 7) (2066 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., col., si. / USW FRA 4632-4637.
Negative track: 7 reels of 7 (2418 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., sd. / USW FRA 4638-4644.

Duplicate negative: 2 reels of 2 (1580 ft.) ; 35 mm. : N., b&w, si. / USW WP 1010773.
Negative track: 2 reels of 2 (1580 ft.) ; 35 mm. : N., sd. / USW WP1010774.

Alternatively, and especially in languages where other more specific terms can take the
place of the English language word, “reel(s),” archives may choose to provide a description of a
picture and its separate but accompanying track using only one line of physical description.

Examples

Original-Neg.: 2B/2T von je 2 (je 508 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., col., Ton / DDS CSN00170.

Original-Neg.: 11B/12T von je 12 (R1-10, 12B) (2810B/3074T m.) ; 35 mm. : N., sw, Ton /
DDS
50006.

5.2.3. Playback mode or projection format

Add a trade name or other indication of a technical system if the use of the item is
conditional upon this information. Enclose the playback mode, trade name of the technical
system, etc. in parentheses. Follow the specific material designation subarea with a colon, space
( : ).

Examples Viewing print (Anamorphic)

Video viewing copy (VHS):
Video master (CED):

Record additional information about specific material designation or playback mode, projection
format, etc., not considered essential for the use of the item, e.g., videodisc trademarks, film
stock manufacturers, etc., in the Notes area (cf. 7.2.10.1).

78
5.3. Extent of item

Record the number of physical units of each complete or partial copy of a motion picture
or videorecording by giving the number of parts in arabic numerals and one of the following
English language format terms (or its equivalent in other languages) as appropriate.

reel
roll
cassette
cartridge
loop
disc

Examples

Reference print: 1 reel (223 ft.) ; 35 mm. : N., b&w, si. /

Masterpositive: 10 reels of 10 (3724 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., col., sd. /

Reversal positive: 2 rolls (175 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., col., si. /

Video viewing copy: 2 cassettes of 2 (90 min.) ; 3/4 in. : col., sd. /

Video master (CED): 1 disc of 1 (120 min.) ; 12 in. : col., sd. /

Reference print: 3 cartridges of 3 (200 ft.) ; standard 8 mm. : S., col., si. /

Video master: 1 reel of 1 (45 min.) ; 1 in. : col., sd. /

79
5.3.1. Reels

35 mm.

Historically, a 35 mm. reel has meant the amount of 35 mm. film which is wound on one
standard reel or is stored in one standard film can designed to accommodate up to 300 m. (1000
ft.) of film. With regular 35 mm. film projection speed at 30 m. per minute, projecting 1 reel
takes about 10 minutes. So, for example, a “2 reeler” would be a short film on two 300-meter
reels running about 20 minutes. The use of “reel” as a unit of measure for 35 mm. film is a
universally applied and easily understood standard industry term and does not necessarily reflect
the actual number of physical items held.

Example Duplicate negative: 10 reels of 10 (8676 ft.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, si.

Although the majority of 35 mm. films made to date use the 300-meter standard reel
units, modern 35 mm. projectors can accommodate 600-meter and 900-meter reels. To maintain
the 300-meter unit concept, 35 mm. film stored on reels holding up to 600 meters of film are
sometimes referred to as “double reels.” Some languages have specific single word terms for
this concept, e.g., “akt” in German and Swedish. For archives, it is imperative that the physical
description relate the original length of a work in 300-meter reels to the number of physical units
(reels) on which it is currently stored. The following example tells the user that the film was
originally released on 12 300-meter 35 mm. reels, but is now being stored on 6 large (600-meter)
35 mm. reels (double reels).

Example Duplicate negative: 12 reels of 12 on 6 (3578 m.) ; 35 mm. : N., b&w, sd. /

The fact that the film is being stored on double reels is obvious from the physical description. If
further clarification is required, a note should also be included indicating that the film is stored
on double or triple reels. See 7.2.10.4.

80
 Other formats

For all other gauges, with the exception of 16 mm. reductions of 35 mm. materials (cf.
5.3.3), the 35 mm. concept of a “reel” does not apply. For these, there is no single standardized
reel size which corresponds to the 1000-ft. size standard in 35 mm. Nevertheless, the concept of
completeness may still be conveyed in the Physical description area by referring to the actual
physical number of units required to make the item complete (cf. 5.3.2.).

Examples

Masterpositive: 2 reels of 2 (2132 ft., 59 min.) ; 16 mm. : S., col., sd.

Distribution print: 11 reels of 11 (11925 ft., 106 min.) ; 70 mm. : S., col., sd.
Archival positive: 1 reel of 1 (160 m.) ; 28 mm. : D., b&w, si.

5.3.2. Completeness

Indicate the completeness of a motion picture or videorecording, if this is considered

appropriate by the archive. Because archives often hold fragments and incomplete copies of
items, as well as complete copies, it is necessary to indicate the completeness of the item in hand.
This should be done in one brief statement which specifies both the number of units in hand and
the number of units in the complete copy (if this information is known). If the number of units
comprising a complete copy is known, or can be reasonably assumed, include this information in
arabic numerals following the number of units in hand and the term describing the item in hand.

Examples

Reference print: 13 reels of 13 (3668 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, s.i.

Duplicate negative: 2 reels of 2 (652 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., col., sd.
Video viewing copy (CED): 1 disc of 1 (96 min.) ; 12 in. : col., sd.
Video master: 2 cassettes of 2 (110 min.) ; 3/4 inc. : col., sd.

81
5.3.2.1. Incomplete items

If the complete number of units comprising a motion picture or videorecording is known,

and the copy in hand lacks one or more, indicate which reel (or other unit) numbers you have in
hand. Specify the identifying numbers of the items in hand and place this information in
parentheses. The following English language abbreviations (or their equivalents in other
languages) may be used.∗

reel (r)
cassette (c)
cartridge (c)
disc (d)

Examples

Reference print: 7 reels of 12 (r1-3, 5-7, 10) (6190 ft.) ; 35 mm. : S., col., sd. /
Duplicate negative: 3 reels of 4 (r1, 3-4) (456 m., 38 min.) ; 16 mm. : S., b&2 sd. /
Video viewing copy (Beta): 2 cassettes of 3 (c2-3) (100 min.) : 1/2 inc. : col., sd. /

5.3.2.2. Unit numbering uncertain or unknown

If a reel (or other unit) number is possible but not certain, use rn? (n=reel number) in
parentheses following the unit count.

Examples

Masterpositive: 1 reel of 3 (r2?) (300 m.) ; 35 mm. : N., b&w, si. /

Viewing print: 2 reels of 5 (r3?, 5) (1550 ft.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, sd. /
Video viewing copy: 1 cassette of 4 (c3?) (40 min.) ; 3/4 inc. : col., sd. /

If the reel (or other unit) number is completely unknown, use r? (or other appropriate
designation) in parentheses following the unit count.

Examples

Duplicate negative: 1 reel of 8 (r?) (650 ft.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, si. /
Reference print: 6 reels of 10 (r1-5, r?) (1300 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, sd. /

∗
Abbreviations should be used only to express incompleteness. This is permissible because the
format term that immediately precedes the abbreviation precisely identifies and distinguishes
the item.

82
5.3.2.3. Original release length unknown

If an item’s original release length (in units such as reels, discs, cassettes, etc.) is not
known, but the items in hand appear to be part of a complete production, regardless of whether it
was released or broadcast (i.e., it is not stock footage, unedited film, etc.), state the number of
units in hand and substitute a question mark for the total number of units. (For treatment of
stock footage, unedited film, etc., see 5.3.3.1.)

Examples

Reference print: 2 reels of ? (r2-3) (1450 ft.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, si. /
Video viewing copy: 1 cassette of ? (40 min.) ; 3/4 in. : col., sd. /

If the total unit count is possible but not certain, indicate that.

Example: Duplicate negative: 3 reels of 5? (r1-3) (861 m.) ; 35 mm. : N., b&w, si. /

Include a note stating the source of the possible or probable unit count.

Example: [Note] Possible reel count from leader.

5.3.2.4. Incomplete reels

If part of a reel or reels is incomplete, place the abbreviation “inc.” for incomplete (or its
equivalent in other languages) in parentheses after the reel count. Give a note describing the
extent of the incompleteness if this information can be determined.

Example: Reference print: 1 reel of 1 (inc.) (125 m.) ; 16 mm. : S., b&w, si. /

[Note] Small parts lacking.

83
 Optionally, when the cataloging description is lengthy, and there are many notes, include
an asterisk, e.g., (inc.*), to relate the particular physical descriptions to a specific note.

Example

Reference print: 3 reels of 3 on 1 (883 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., b&w, sd. /

Reference print: 3 reels of 3 (inc.*) (1686 ft.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, sd. /
Duplicate negative: 3 reels of 3 on 1 (883 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., b&w, di. /
Negative track: 3 reels of 3 on 1 (883 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., sd. /
Duplicate negative: 3 reels of 3 on 1 (inc.*) (675 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., b&w, sd. / copy 2
Duplicate negative: 3 reels of 3 (inc.*) (1686 ft.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, sd. /

[Note] *Main title and part of picture lacking. Two musical numbers, “Poppin’
the cork” and “Here’s looking at you,” included in original release and in
complete material, do not appear in 35 mm. reference print, 16 mm.
duplicate negative (copy 2) and 35 mm. duplicate negative. Original 35
mm. footage: 2206 ft. per copyright descriptive material and Film Daily
Yearbook, 1934, p. 345.

5.3.3. Copies in formats other than the original format of the work

For many archives and film libraries, a common form of material for viewing and often
for storage purposes has been 16 mm. film reductions of original 35 mm. works. With the
increasing use of video for copying material, 16 mm. reduction copies may become less
common.

16 mm. Reduction copies

For a complete 16 mm. film which is known to be a reduction copy (a 16 mm.

duplication of a 35 mm. film), indicate completeness using the 300 m. 35 mm. reel count for the
item in hand in relation to the reel count of the original complete 35 mm. work, along with the
actual number of 16 mm. reels in hand, regardless of the size.

Example: Reference print: 10 reels of 10 on 3 (958 m.) ; 16 mm. : S., col., sd.

(Example describes a complete film, originally ten 35 mm. reels, now on three 16 mm.
reels.)

84
 For an incomplete 16 mm. film known to be a reduction print, specify in parentheses as
accurately as possible what reels -- in 35 mm. terms -- are in hand, and then give the number of
actual 16 mm. reels in hand.

Examples

Reference print: 4 reels of 6 (r1, 4-6) on 2 (1800 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., col., sd. /
Duplicate negative: 2 reels of 10 (r1, 8) on 1 (267 m.) ; 16 mm. : S., b&w, sd. /

When original 35 mm. reel numbers are uncertain, or completely unknown, use rn? (n =
reel number) or r? to indicate this as instructed in 5.3.2.2.

Examples

Reference print: 3 reels of 5 (r1, 3?, 5) on 1 (300 m.) ; 16 mm. : S., b&w, si. /
Duplicate negative: 1 reel of 4 (r?) on 1 (125 m.) ; 16 mm. : S., b&w, si. /

Other formats

When 35 mm. works have been copied on non-film formats, i.e., videocassettes,
videodiscs, etc., the relationship of the original 35 mm. reel count to the extent or number of
items (videocassettes, videodiscs, etc.) may be difficult to determine and/or describe precisely.
Video cassettes and videodiscs have their own physical identity and are not readily compared to
35 mm. reels. Electronic editing further complicates the ability of a viewer to make a precise
comparison between reels and cassettes or discs. Present archival practice for non-film formats
is to describe the extent of the item in terms of the format on which it is recorded.

Examples

Video viewing copy: 3 cassettes of 3 (125 min.) ; 3/4 in. : col., sd. /
Video viewing copy (CED): 2 discs of 3 (d2-3) (85 min.) ; 12 in. : col., sd. /

Optionally, archives may wish to indicate completeness using the 300 m. 35 mm. reel
count for the original item -- along with the actual number of units of the format on which the
work has been copied -- if this information can be determined.

Examples

Video viewing copy: 10 reels of 10 on 3 cassettes (125 min.) ; 3/4 inc. : col., sd. /
Video viewing copy (CED) : 7 reels(?) of 10 on 2 discs of 3 (d2-3) (85 min.) : 12 in. ; col., sd.

85
5.3.3.1. Personal records, domestic records, stock footage, outtakes, etc.

For material which is known or judged not to have been released in the form which the
archive now holds (e.g., a reel consisting of 40 different commercials), or where the item is
known or judged not to have been released or ever intended to be released (e.g., personal records,
domestic records, stock footage, outtakes, etc.), simply use arabic numbers with the unit term
describing the item in hand. Do not abbreviate the unit term used.

Examples

Viewing print: 2 reels (560 m.) ; 16 mm. : S., b&w, si. /

Archival positive: 12 rolls (1800 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., col., sd. /
Video viewing copy: 3 cassettes (180 min.) ; 3/4 inc. : col., sd. /
Video viewing copy (optical): 1 disc (60 min.) ; 12 in. : col., sd. /

Alternatively, archives may prefer not to include indications of completeness in the

physical description area. In this case, eliminate the phrase “of n” (n = number), and use only
the actual number of items held, followed by the format or unit term.

Examples

Distribution print: 12 reels on 6 (11723 ft., 130 min.) ; 35 mm. : S., col., sd. / USW FGC 2134-
2139.
Video viewing copy (PAL): 2 cassettes (118 min.) ; 3/4 in. : col., sd. /

5.3.4. Length and/or duration

5.3.4.1. Length

For films: Record the item’s total length in arabic numerals, using the meter or footage
scale -- as appropriate -- following the statement of number of items and the unit count. This
figure is normally rounded off to the nearest whole number. Do not include punctuation marks
within the numbers. Enclose the number in parentheses, and include an abbreviation for the unit
of measure, e.g., (8970 ft.) or (3257 m.). Follow the indication of length/duration with the space,
semi-colon, space punctuation ( ; ). See Appendix D for feet/meters/minutes conversion charts.

Examples

Viewing print: 10 reels of 10 (3246 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., col., sd. /

Reference print: 2 reels of 5 (r1-2) (547 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, si./

86
 If the item is not viewed, and if no indication of meters or footage appears on the item, its
container, or on accompanying material, give an approximate count, if one can readily be
established. Precede the numerals by the appreviation “ca.” (circa).

Examples

Duplicate negative: 3 reels of 3 (ca. 850 m.) ; 35 mm. : N., b&w, si. /
Reference print: 4 rolls (ca. 214 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., b&w, sd. /

Give an explanation for estimated footage or meter count in a note, if such information
applies.

Example [Note] Footage estimate is from donor’s list: film is too brittle
for viewing.

Optionally and if known, record information about the original length of the item in the
Notes area. See 7.2.10.4. Alternatively, record such information following the length of the
item in hand.

Example

Reference print: 3 reels of 3 (836 m.) ; 35 mm. : N., b&w, si. /

[Note] Original length of film was 842 m.

or

Reference print: 3 reels of 3 (836 m. of 842 m.) ; 35 mm. : N., b&w, si. /

Optionally, use notes to record statements of length for individual reels, if this
information is desired by the archive. (Some archives prefer to record information about the
length of individual reels in separate technical files.)

87
5.3.4.2. Duration

For videorecordings: Record in arabic numerals the item’s total playing time (duration) in
minutes, normally rounded off to the nearest minute. Optionally, and particularly for short items,
include minutes and seconds. Use the abbreviations “min.” or “sec.” or their equivalents in
other languages, and enclose the duration statement in parentheses, e.g. (52 min.). Do not
include punctuation marks within the numbers. Follow the indication of length/duration with the
space, semi-colon, space punctuation ( ; ). Running times for individual reels or cassettes, etc.
may be included in the Notes area, if this is desired by the archive. When the exact running time
is not available, it may be approximated. Precede the numerals by the abbreviation “ca.” (circa).

Examples

Video viewing copy: 2 cassettes of 2 (120 min.) ; 3/4 inc. : col., sd. /
Video master (optical): 1 disc of 1 (52 min.) ; 12 in. : col., sd. /
Video viewing copy: 1 cassette of 1 (1 min. 30 sec.) ; 3/4 in. : col., sd. /
Video viewing copy (Beta): 1 cassette of 1 (ca. 90 min.) ; 1/2 in. : col., sd. /

Optionally, include both the length and running time for film materials, enclosed in one
set of parentheses and separated by a comma, e.g., (75 ft., 6 min.).

Example: Distribution print: 10 reels of 10 (3082 m., 102 min.) ; 35 mm. : S., col., sd. /

N.B. When recording duration for silent films -- where the rate of frames per second varied over
the years and between items -- measure duration at the correct running speed for the item.
Indicate conditions such as stretch printing and time compression in notes. See 7.2.10.2 &
7.2.10.4.

5.3.4.3. Separate works on a single item

When separately titled works contained together on a single reel, cassette, disc, etc. have
been cataloged separately, provide the total length/duration for the individual work, and link
these separate descriptions with notes, optionally explaining the extent of each work. See 7.2.1.

Example: Viewing print: 1 reel of 1 (416 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., col., sd. /

[Note] On reel with: The TRUMAN STORY (417 ft. - 875 ft.) ; total footage: 875
ft.

88
5.4. Dimensions

Give the dimensions of a motion picture film in millimeters, using the abbreviation
“mm.” Insert a space between the numeric and the millimeter abbreviation, e.g., 35 mm. When
describing 8 mm. material, state whether the item is standard 89 mm. or super 8 mm.

Examples

Viewing print: 2 reels of 2 (762 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., col.,sd. /

Duplicate negative: 1 reel (738 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., b&w, sd. /
Reference print: 1 reel of 1 (516 ft.) ; standard 8 mm. : S., col., si. /
Reference print: 1 cartridge of 1 (ca. 60 m.) ; super 8 mm. : S., col., sd. /

Give the width of the videotape in inches using the abbreviation “in.”

Examples: Video master: 1 cassette of 1 (57 min.) ; 3/4 in. : col., sd. /
Video master: 2 reels of 2 (ca. 90 min.) ; 2 in. : col., sd. /

Give the diameter of a videodisc in inches using the abbreviation “in.”

Example: Video viewing copy (CED): 3 discs of 3 (119 min.) ; 12 in. : col., sd. /

Follow the indication of dimensions with the space, colon, space punctuation ( : ).

89
5.5. Other physical details

Give the following details, as applicable, in the following order. Separate elements
within this subarea with the comma, space punctuation ( , ).

film base
color characteristics
sound characteristics

5.5.1. Film base

Give the film base (i.e., nitrate, safety-triacetate, safety-diacetate [“old safety”], polyester
[estar], etc.). The following abbreviations, or their equivalents in other languages, may be
substituted for the terms.

Examples

Term Abbreviation

Nitrate N.
Safety-triacetate S.
Safety-diacetate D.
Polyester [estar] P.

Examples

Duplicate negative: 1 reel of 1 (292 m.) ; 35 mm. : P., b&w, si. /

Masterpositive: 10 reels of 10 (9431 ft.) ; 35 mm. : N., b&w, sd. /
Viewing print: 7 reels of 7 on 2 (2743 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., col., sd. /

Optionally, include the film base only for nitrate, diacetate, and polyester. The
assumption may then be made that, unless noted, the film base is always safety-triacetate.
Archives following this convention must be careful to enter “base unknown” when such is the
case, rather than omitting the base pending further research, as such omission could lead to
potentially dangerous misunderstandings.

90
5.5.2. Color characteristics

Indicate whether an item is in color or black and white, using the abbreviation “col.”
(including the period) for color and the abbreviation “b&w” for black and white. More specific
terms related to color status may be recorded in notes (cf. 7.2.10.5) or optionally in parentheses
following the abbreviation. If desired, also give color system trade names or other indications of
particular color technical systems or color recording systems for video in a note or in parentheses
following the abbreviation. (Archives may prefer to record such information in separate
technical files.)

Examples

Reference print: 1 reel of 1 (329 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, si. /

Video viewing copy (Beta): 1 cassette of 1 (89 min.) ; 1/2 in. : col., sd. /
Reference print: 1 reel of 1 (327 m.) ; 35 mm. : N., b&w (tinted and toned), si. /
Viewing print: 1 reel of 1 (324 ft. ) ; 35 mm. : N., col. (hand-colored), sd. /
Reversal original positive: 1 reel of 1 (208 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., col. (Kodachrome), si. /

If an item is a combination of color and black and white, indicate this combination.

Examples

Masterpositive: 3 reels of 3 (2870 ft.) ; 35 mm. ; S., col. & b&w, sd. /
Viewing print: 2 reels of 10 (r1, 5) (612 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w with col. sequences, sd. /

Indicate color separation negatives with separate lines of description, one for each color.

Example

Duplicate negative: 2 reels of 2 (608 m.) ; 35 mm. : N., cyan, si. /

Duplicate negative: 1 reel of 2 (r2) (104 m.) ; 35 mm. : N. magenta, si. /
Duplicate negative: 2 reels of 2 (608 m.) ; 35 mm. : N., yellow, si. /

If an item consists solely of a sound element of a motion picture or a video recording,

omit any color characteristics.

Example: Negative track: 2 reels of 2 (1832 ft. ) ; 35 mm. : N., sd. /

91
5.5.3. Sound characteristics

Indicate the presence or absence of sound by the abbreviations sd. (sound) or si. (silent).
If the item being described consists solely of a sound element, describe it as sound (sd.), and
eliminate any reference to a color characteristic. Information about more specific sound
characteristics may be recorded in notes (cf. 7.2.10.6) or optionally in parentheses following the
abbreviation, if this information is desired by the archive. (Archives may prefer to record such
information in separate technical files.)

Examples

Viewing print: 3 reels of 3 (2870 ft.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, si. /

Video viewing copy: 1 cassette of 1 (59 min.) ; 3/4 in. : col., sd. /
Negative track: 5 reels of 5 (513 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., sd. /
Reference print: 6 reels of 6 (5213 ft.) ; 35 mm. : N., b&w, sd. (variable density track) /

If the material being described contains images without sound but filmed on stock of
which the geometry is capable of accommodating a sound track in a later generation, describe the
item as silent (si.). Follow the description statement for such silent (picture only) elements with
the description statement for the separate sound-only elements designed to accompany them, if
any. See 5.2.2. Distinguish between film for which there never was an accompanying sound
element and film for which there was such an element but the archive does not hold any copy of
it by supplying an appropriate note. See 7.2.10 .6.

Examples

Duplicate negative: 4 reels of 4 (1277 m.) ; 35 mm. : N., b&w, si. /

Negative track: 4 reels of 4 (1277 m.) ; 35 mm. : N., sd. /

Original negative: 1 reel of 1 (90 ft.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, si. /

[Note] Record footage on sound stock for which no sound was recorded.

Duplicate negative: 7 reels of 8 (r2-8) (6527 ft.) : 35 mm. : N., b&w, si. /
[Note] Archive duplicate negative copy lacks separate accompanying sound.

Optionally, treat separately film intended to be silent and film whose geometry reflects
the expectation that a sound track will be added, designating the latter as mute (mu.).

Example

Duplicate negative: 7 reels of 8 (r2-8) (6527 ft.) : 35 mm. : N., b&w, mu. /
[Note] Archive duplicate negative copy lacks separate accompanying sound.

92
5.5.3. Sound characteristics (cont.):

Note: Some archives consider language characteristics to be a part of the sound characteristics
subarea and wish to indicate language as a part of physical descriptions, as well as in the
Edition/version/variation statement and Notes area. This may be accomplished by placing the
language condition in parentheses following the abbreviations “sd.” or “si.” If both special
sound characteristics (or systems) and language conditions are incorporated into the physical
description area, record each in a separate set of parentheses, giving special sound characteristics
first.

Example: Viewing print: 5 reels of 5 (513 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., col., sd. (Dolby) (Spanish) /

5.6. Inventory or Location Number

Record archival inventory or location numbers for the materials being described as the
last subarea of each physical description statement. Precede this subarea by the space, slash,
space punctuation ( / ).

N.B. Inventory or location numbering systems vary widely from institution to institution.
Institutions contributing to bibliographic networks should prefix their location numbers with an
abbreviation or code for their institution. See Appendix F for a list of FIAF archive codes.

Examples

Video viewing copy: 2 cassettes of 2 (98 min.) ; 3/4 inc. : b&w, si. / USW VBC 3476-3477.
Viewing print: 9 reels of 9 (8827 ft.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, si. / USW FEC 7426-7434.
Masterpositive: 9 reels of 9 (8827 ft.) ; 35 mm. : N., b&w, si. / USW WP 73701198.

5.6.1. Copy number

Give the copy number, other than 1, of an item which is a duplicate of an item in every
physical characteristic or which varies only in duration and the variation is minor. Give the copy
number as the last element of the location subarea, preceded by the comma, space punctuation
( , ). Optionally, use the abbreviations “cy., cys.” or their equivalents in other languages for
copy, copies.

Examples

Video viewing copy: 1 cassette of 1 (30 min.) ; 3/4 in. : col., sd. / USW VBB 6432.
Video viewing copy: 1 cassette of 1 (30 min.) ; 3/4 in. : col., sd. / USW VGG 6433, copy 2.

Viewing print: 4 reels of 4 (3690 ft.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, si. / USW FEA 6589-6592.
Viewing print: 4 reels of 4 (3690 ft.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, si. / USW FEA 6593-6596, copy 2.

93
 Give the copy number, other than 2, of an item which duplicates a portion of an item of
the same designation and gauge.

Examples

Duplicate negative: 3 reels of 3 (2645 ft.) ; 35 mm. : N., b&w, si. / USW WP 7875502.
Duplicate negative: 1 reel of 3 (r2) (875 ft.) ; 35 mm. : N., b&w, si. / USW WP 7875503, copy 2.

When there are important distinctions between the multiple copies of an item, and these
distinctions cannot be made in the Physical description area, make them in a note. See 7.2.10.7.

Example

Viewing print: 4 reels of 4 (3690 ft.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, si. / USW FEB 3541-3544.
Viewing print: 4 reels of 4 (3688 ft.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, si. / USW FEB 3545-3548, copy 2.
[Note] Copy 1 is original release copy; copy 2 is rerelease copy.

94
6. Series area

Contents of Series area

Introduction
6.1. Preliminary rule
6.1.1. Punctuation pattern
6.1.2. Sources of information
6.2. Title proper of series
6.3. Parallel titles of the series
6.4. Other title information of series
6.5. Statements of responsibility relating to series
6.6. ISSN of series
6.7. Numbering within series
6.8. Sub-series statements
6.9. More than one series statement

Introduction

A series title is defined as a group of separate items related to one another by the fact that
each item bears, in addition to its own title proper, a collective title applying to the group as a
whole. When describing archival film and videorecordings, series titles most often constitute
parts of the title proper and are therefore cataloged according to the rules found in 1.1.2.2. The
use of the Series area is thus limited to cases when individually complete items are released as
parts of an arbitrarily designated series. Only in such instances will catalogers make use of the
rules found in this chapter.

Series titles which are candidates for inclusion in this area normally serve as broad
umbrella-like identifiers, and are not linked directly to specific episode or part titles, or to the
viewing of individual titles in sequential order. The individual works within these broad or
arbitrarily designated series may or may not be numbered, but each work can stand on its own
and is basically independent from the other works within the series. In these situations archives
do permit the separation of series titles from the title of each of their parts and therefore allow for
their inclusion in this portion/area of a bibliographic record.

95
6.1. Preliminary rule

6.1.1. Punctuation pattern

Precede the Series area by a period, space, dash, space ( . -- ) unless it begins a new
paragraph. (The examples in this chapter begin new paragraphs.)

Enclose each separate series statement within its own set of parentheses. Separate each
set of parentheses with a space, e.g., (GODS AND HEROES) (The ADVENTURE OF MAN).

Precede parallel titles of a series or sub-series by a space, equals sign, space ( = ).

Precede other title information relating to a series or sub-series by a space, colon, space
( : ).

Precede the first statement of responsibility relating to a series by a space, diagonal slash,
space ( / ).

Precede subsequent statements of responsibility for distinct functions relating to a series

by a space, semicolon, space ( ; ) unless the statements are considered to form a single phrase.

Precede the International Standard Serial Number of a series or sub-series by a comma,

space ( , ). (N.B.: No such numbers exist as yet for moving image materials.)

Precede the numbering within series or sub-series by a space, semicolon, space ( ; ).

Precede the title of a sub-series by a period, space ( . ).

6.1.2. Sources of information

Take information recorded in this area from the item, accompanying material, or from
secondary research sources. If the information is taken from accompanying material or
secondary research sources, cite the source or sources in a note. See 7.2.12.

96
6.2. Title proper of series

Give the title proper of series as found on the item, accompanying material, or from any
secondary source. If variant forms of the titles of the series (other than parallel titles) appear,
choose the title associated with original release as the title proper of the series. Give the variant
form(s) in a note. See 7.2.12.

Examples WHILE AMERICA SLEEPS / director, Fred Zinnemann ; original

story and screenplay, Karl Lamb. -- US : Metro-Goldwyn-
Mayer [producer, distributor], 1939.

Viewing print: 2 reels of 2 (631 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, sd.

[Series title] (CRIME DOES NOT PAY)

DIVE TO THE EDGE OF CREATION / producer, director &

writer, James Lipscomb ; co-director, Alfred Giddings. -- US :
National Geographic Society [producer], 1980 ; US : WQED,
Pittsburgh [producer], 1980 ; US : PBS [network], 1980-08-01.

Viewing print: 2 reels of 2 (2160 ft., 60 min.) ; 16 mm. : S.,

col., sd.
[Series title] (NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY SPECIAL)

[Note] Variant series title: NGS SPECIALS.

97
6.3. Parallel titles of series

For archival moving image cataloging, a parallel series title is defined as the title of a
series in another language or script, any series title qualifying as an original series title but which
is not chosen for inclusion as the first named title (other than variant forms of the same title), and
reissue/rerelease series titles appearing on the item described (see also 1.3). Enclose both the
title proper of the series and the parallel series titles in one set of parentheses, separating the first
parallel series title from the title proper and from any subsequent parallel series titles by the
space, equals sign, space punctuation ( = ). When the relationships of a parallel series title to
the work being cataloged is unclear, provide an appropriate explanation in the Notes area (see
7.2.12).

Examples The MONK’S PARASOL = Le PARASOL DU MOINE / director,

Paul Saltzman ; script, Deepa Saltzman. -- CA : Sunrise Films,
Ltd. [producer], 1979 ; CA : CBC [co-producer], 1979 ; CA :
Viking Films, Ltd. [distributor], 1979.

Reference print: 1 reel of 1 (300 m., 25 min. ) ; 16 mm. : S.,

col., sd.
(SPREAD YOUR WINGS = Les HÉRITIERS)

L’OIE = The GOOSE / director, Gilbert Gratton. -- CA : Les Films

Gilbert Gratton-Télé-Métropole, Inc. [producer], 1978 ; CA :
Bouchard & Associés : Thomas Howe Associates [distributor],
1978.

Viewing print: 1 reel of 1 (540 ft., 15 min.) ; 16 mm. : S., col.,

sd.
(MERCI MONSIEUR NOÉ = THANK YOU, MR. NOAH)

SPRUCIN’ UP / director, Gus Meins ; producer, Hal Roach. -- US

: Metro-Goldwyn-Mayer [producer, distributor], 1935 ; US :
Monogram Pictures Corp. [distributor for television reissue,
195-].

Masterpositive: 2 reels of 2 (501 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, sd.

(OUR GANG = The LITTLE RASCALS)

[Note] Series title for television reissue: The LITTLE RASCALS.

98
6.4. Other title information of series

Other title information of series is defined as a word or phrase appearing in conjunction

with, and subordinate to the title proper or parallel title of a series, and which qualifies, explains,
or completes the series title to which it applies, or which is indicative of the character, contents,
etc., of the item or its production. It includes subtitles, avant-titres, etc., but does not include
variant titles (see 6.2). Separating series titles into title proper and other title information is not
required simply because such separation is grammatically possible. Catalogers may constitute
subordinate phrases as part of the title proper when, in their judgement, such phrases form an
integral part of the title proper (see also 1.4).

Transcribe other title information following the series title proper or parallel series title to
which it pertains. Separate the series title proper or parallel series title from other title
information by a space, colon, space ( : ). Alternatively, archives may choose to omit lengthy
other title information of series.

Examples BIP HUNTS BUTTERFLIES / Marcel Marceau. -- US : Marcel

Marceau [producer] , 1975 ; US : Encyclopaedia Britannica
Educational Corp [distributor], 1975.

Viewing print: 1 reel of 1 (360 ft., 10 min.) ; 16 mm. : S., col.,

sd.
(ART OF SILENCE : PANTOMIMES WITH MARCEL
MARCEAU)

HOUSING ALTERNATIVES. -- US : Chrome Yellow Film, Inc.

[producer], 1980 ; US : Butterick Publishing [sponsor,
distributor], 1980.

Video viewing copy (Beta): 1 cassette of 1 (15 min.) ; 3/4 in. :

col., sd.
(CONCEPTS IN FOCUS : HOUSING & HOME
FURNISHINGS)

99
6.5. Statements of responsibility relating to series

Give statements of responsibility relating to a series following the space, diagonal slash,
space punctuation ( / ).

Alternatively, give such statements of responsibility in a note (see 7.2.12).

Example: DANCE IN AMERICA. The FELD BALLET / producer, Judy

Kinberg ; director, Emile Ardolino ; choreographed and
reconceived for television by Eliot Feld. -- US : WNET/13,
New York [producer], 1979 ; US : PBS [network], 1979-05-16.

Video viewing copy: 1 cassette of 1 (60 min.) ; 3/4 in. : col., sd.
(GREAT PERFORMANCES / series producer, Merrill
Brockway)

or

(GREAT PERFORMANCES)

[Note] Credits: series producer for GREAT PERFORMANCES,

Merrill Brockway.

6.6. ISSN of series

Record the International Standard Serial Number (ISSN) of a series if it appears in the
item being described. Record the ISSN in the standard manner, i.e., ISSN followed by a space
and two groups of four digits separated by a hyphen.

Note: This rule is not currently applicable because producers and distributors do not
utilize the ISSN in connection with moving image materials. It is nonetheless
included here in the event that the practice of assigning ISSNs to these materials
comes into use.

100
6.7 Numbering within series

Note: See 1.1.2.2 for series which are both numbered and designed to be viewed
consecutively. It should be observed that not all series which are numbered are thereby
necessarily designed to be viewed consecutively. The following are examples of programs that
have been judged to stand alone, i.e., they may be viewed independently, even though they
include numbering or some type of sequential designation.

6.7.1. Record the numbering of the item within the series in the terms given in sources relating
to the original release. Use standard abbreviations, and substitute arabic numerals for other
numerals or for spelled out names.

Retain roman numerals if the substitution of arabic numerals makes the statement less
clear, as, for example, when roman and arabic numerals are used in conjunction to distinguish a
series, episode, or group from the number, part, or other division of that group. When roman
numerals are retained, record them in capitals.

Example ART IN AMERICA : FOLK ART / producer, director & writer,

Irene Zmurkevych. -- US : Handel Film Corp. [producer,
distributor], 1979.

Viewing print: 1 reel of 1 (336 m., 28 min.) ; 16 mm. : S., col.,

sd.
(AMERICANA SERIES ; NO. 27)

6.7.2. If the item has a designation other than a number, give the designation as found.

Example The GREEK AND ROMAN WORLD / writer and consultant,

Joseph Chada. -- US : Society for Visual Education [producer,
distributor], 1977.

Video viewing copy: 1 cassette of 1 (30 min.) ; 3/4 in. : col., sd.
(SVE ANCIENT HISTORY PROGRAM ; SERIES B)

101
6.8 Sub-series statements

If an item is one of a sub-series (a series within a series, whether or not it has a dependent
title), give the details of the main series first, and follow them with the name of the sub-series
and the details of that sub-series. Precede the title of a sub-series by the period, space
punctuation. ( . ).

Example GEOPOLITICS : The SHAPE OF THINGS TO COME. -- CA :

National Film Board of Canada [producer, distributor], 1972.

Reference print: 1 reel of 1 (792 ft., 22 min.) ; 16 mm. : S., col.,

sd.
(HERE COME THE 70S. SENIOR HIGH LEVEL)

Note: The determination of whether to include series and sub-series titles in this area
rests on the provisions of 1.1.2.2. If those rules apply, the sub-series title will become part of the
title proper, and only the broader series title will remain in the series area. In some cases, both
the series and sub-series titles may become part of the title proper.

Examples COLUMBO. FORGOTTEN LADY / producer, Everett Chambers

; director, Harvey Hart ; writer, Bill Driskill. -- US : Universal
City Studios [producer], 1975 ; US : NBC-TV [network], 1975-
08-11.

Viewing print: 2 reels of 2 (1193 m.) ; 16 mm. : S., col., sd.

(NBC SUNDAY MYSTERY MOVIE)

∗
The BOLD ONES. The DOCTORS. IS THIS OPERATION
NECESSARY?. -- US : Hartour U T V [producer], 1972 ; US :
NBC-TV [network], 1972-11-13.

Reference print: 1 reel of 1 (1908 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., col., sd.

∗
Example of series and sub-series titles treated as part of the title proper as instructed in 1.1.2.2.

102
6.8.1. If the sub-series has an alphabetic or numeric designation and no title, give the
designation. If such a sub-series has a title as well as a designation, give the title after the
designation. If the sub-series also has numbering, add the numbering, preceded by the space,
semicolon, space punctuation ( ; ).

Example The STORY OF MODERN EGYPT. -- US : Bonnard Film Corp.

[producer], 1970 ; US : Time-Life Multimedia [distributor],
1970.

Video viewing copy: 1 reel of 1 (20 min.) ; 3/4 in. : col., sd.
(WORLD HISTORY FROM 1917 TO THE PRESENT. UNIT
5, NEW NATIONS)

6.8.2. Add parallel titles, other title information, and statements of responsibility relating to sub-
series in the same manner as they are added to series.

6.8.3. Add the ISSN of a sub-series if it appears in the item being described; in such a case, omit
the ISSN of the main series.

Note: This rule is not currently applicable, but is included in the event that distributors
or producers begin to use ISSNs for moving image materials (see also 6.6).

103
6.9. More than one series statement

The information relating to one series, or series and sub-series, constitutes collectively
one series statement. If an item belongs to two or more separate series and/or series and sub-
series, make separate series statements and enclose each statement in its own set of parentheses.
Do not confuse separate series statements with parallel series titles, described in 6.3. If the
criterion applies, give the more specific series first.

Example The TALE OF THESEUS, THE ATHENIAN HERO / C.E.W.

Peckett. -- US : Visual Publications [producer], 1976 ; US :
McIntyre Visual Publications [distributor], 1977.

Video viewing copy: 1 cassette of 1 (45 min.) ; 3/4 in. : col., sd.
(GODS AND HEROES) (The ADVENTURE OF MAN)

If parts of an item belong to different series and this relationship cannot be stated clearly
in the Series area, give details of the series in a note. See 7.2.12.

104
7. Notes area
Contents of Notes area
Introduction
7.1. Preliminary rule
7.1.1. Punctuation pattern
7.1.2. Sources of information
7.1.3. Form of notes
7.2. Notes
7.2.1. Nature, scope, or artistic form of the item
7.2.2. Language
7.2.3. Title proper
7.2.4. Variations in titles
7.2.5. Parallel titles and other title information
7.2.6. Statements of responsibility
7.2.6.1. Credits
7.2.6.2. Cast
7.2.7. History of edition/version/variation
7.2.8. Production, distribution, etc.
7.2.8.1. Places
7.2.8.2. Names and functions
7.2.8.3. Dates
7.2.8.4. Trade names
7.2.8.5. Television sponsors
7.2.9. Copyright
7.2.10. Physical description
7.2.10.1. Specific material designation
7.2.10.2. Special projection requirements or playback/recording mode
7.2.10.3. Incompleteness
7.2.10.4. Length and/or duration
7.2.10.5. Color characteristics
7.2.10.6. Sound characteristics
7.2.10.7. Variant copies
7.2.10.8. Illustrations
7.2.10.9. Location and type of credit sequences
7.2.10.10. Other physical details important for use or storage
7.2.10.11. Research notes for physical description
7.2.11. Accompanying material
7.2.12. Series
7.2.13. Dissertations
7.2.14. Users/intended audience
7.2.15. References to published reviews or descriptions
7.2.16. Contents
7.2.17. Summary
7.2.18. Numbers borne by the item
7.2.19. With notes
7.2.20. Censorship and other rating designations
7.2.21. Awards
7.2.22. Restrictions on access
7.2.23. Terms governing use
7.2.24. Source of acquisition
7.2.25. Location of related materials
7.2.26. Publications
7.2.27. Cataloger opinion

105
 Introduction

Record information in this area that does not readily fit into the other areas of the
description. The extent and specificity of notes will depend upon the resources (staff, viewing
facilities, documentation, etc.) available in an individual archive, or other organization. The
Notes area should not include complex, lengthy, and highly detailed information. Preferably,
this type of data should be maintained separately in files (manual or automated) that may be
linked to the filmographic description of individual titles.

7.1. Preliminary rule

7.1.1. Punctuation pattern

Precede the notes area, and separate each note from the next by a period, space, dash,
space ( . -- ), or start a new paragraph for each separate note. (The examples in this chapter
begin new paragraphs.)

Separate introductory wording from the main content of a note by a colon, space ( : ).

Within notes, utilize the punctuation prescribed for areas 1-6 where appropriate; for
example, separate a title from a statement of responsibility by a space, diagonal slash, space ( / ).

Give quotations from the item or from other sources in quotation marks. Follow the
quotation by an indication of its source, unless that source is the item itself. Use square brackets
only for interpolations within quoted material.

7.1.2. Sources of information

Take data recorded in notes from the item itself or from any suitable source, e.g.,
censorship records, filmographies, copyright records, trade journals, etc.∗

∗
For a list of national filmographies and other sources useful for film cataloging, see Gebauer,
Dorothea. FIAF Bibliography of National Filmographies. (Brussels: FIAF, 1985).

106
7.1.3. Form of notes

Order of information. When recording notes which further describe data elements
already found in the catalog record, follow that sequence wherever possible, e.g., title, statement
of responsibility, edition/version/variation, production, distribution, etc., copyright statement,
physical description, series.

When appropriate, combine two or more notes to make one note.

Also when appropriate, list the information given within notes in the order in which it
would appear within each data element area.

Formal notes. Use formal notes when employing an invariable introductory word or
phrase or a standard form of words -- when uniformity of presentation assists in the recognition
of the type of information being presented or when their use gives economy of space without loss
of clarity.

Example Intended audience: secondary school students.

Informal notes. When making informal notes, use statements that present the information
as briefly as clarity, understandability, and good grammar permit.

Example Based on a short story by Colette.

7.2. Notes

The following instructions for notes should be considered neither all-inclusive nor
mandatory. The number and type of notes included in a description must be dictated by the
material being described and the needs of the individual archive.

7.2.1. Nature, scope, or artistic form of the item

Make notes on the nature, form, genre, or other intellectual category to which an item
belongs, unless it is apparent from the rest of the description, or, include such information as part
of the summary. See 7.2.16.

Examples Television series pilot

Documentary
Amateur footage
Comedy
Western
Cel animation

107
7.2.2. Language

Give the language or languages of the spoken, sung, or written content of the film or
videorecording, or each copy of it, unless they are apparent from the rest of the description.

Examples In Arabic with English subtitles.

English language credits and narration.

Main title, credits, and preface in French; dialogue in special

languages created by Anthony Burgess.

Sound track dubbed in English.

English translation voice-over.

7.2.3. Title proper

Make notes on the source of the title proper (original release title), if it does not appear on
the item.

Examples Title from Moving picture world 3:122.

Original release title, production company, country of

production, original release date, and US release date per phone
call to production company, 1980-08-01.

Title supplied by donor, Mrs. Pare Lorentz (Elizabeth Meyer).

Tentative title taken from label on nitrate can.

108
 Make notes on the title proper data that cannot be given in the title proper area.

Examples The word “LOVE” in the title is represented by the drawing of

a heart.

Mathematical equations appear as part of the title.

Episode production number: 87802.

Brook inventory no. 24.

“HSP 80” appears on synopsis accompanying cassette.

7.2.4. Variations in titles

Provide notes which give titles other than those chosen to appear in the Title/Statement of
responsibility area. If the original release title is not in the roman alphabet, give a romanization
of the title. Added entries (access points) may be made from any title included in the Notes area,
if desired by the archive.

Examples Incorrect title spliced on film: DAYS OF GLORY.

Working title: HEAVEN AND HELL.

Inventory list title: TALK WITH JIMMY.

Title on can: MONEY.

7.2.5. Parallel titles and other title information

Give the source or function of parallel titles unless they are apparent from the rest of the
description. Give lengthy other title (subtitle) information.

Examples Parallel title, MAD ABOUT MONEY, is American release title.

Subtitle: A VISUALIZATION OF AN EXPERIENCE

WITHIN MUSIC -- THE PRELUDE AND LIEBESTOD FROM
TRISTAN UND ISOLDE, BY RICHARD WAGNER.

109
7.2.6. Statements of responsibility

Give further information about statements of responsibility appearing in the body of the
entry basically in the same order in which they are found there. Notes should be used to
elucidate complex relationships, to give the sources of information found in the statement of
responsibility not taken from the item in hand, and to add additional statements of responsibility
not previously included.

Examples Director’s name varies in different sources; film, Variety, v. 89,

p. 75, and New York Times Film Reviews list director as Eugene
Smallwood; Film Daily Yearbook 1943 lists director as John
Belldorfer.

Editors for short version from Los Angeles Times, May 31,
1981, pp. 2 & 6.

Writer for English narration from accompanying teacher’s

guide.

Based on William Shakespeare’s play, Othello.

Two specific types of statement of responsibility notes are credits and cast notes.

110
7.2.6.1. Credits

List persons who have contributed to the off-screen artistic, intellectual, and technical
production of a film or videorecording, whose functions are considered of importance to the
archive, and who are not previously listed in that capacity in the statement of responsibility or in
other areas of the catalog description.

Begin the credits note with the word “Credits” (or its equivalent in other languages)
followed by a colon, space ( : ). Preface each name or group of names with a statement of
function. Follow the function name by a question mark and enclose both in brackets when the
attribute is questionable, e.g., [associate producer?]. Names listed as unspecified credits on the
item and for which no precise credit function can be found may be preceded by the phrase
“function undetermined.” Separate a function from its associated names by a comma, space
punctuation ( , ). Separate each function, together with its associated names, from other
functions/names with the space, semicolon, space punctuation ( ; ).

Added entries may be created for any name listed in the credits note. Archives should
provide guidelines for the types and numbers of credits they wish to trace. Appropriate national
or international rules should be used for standardizing names to be used as access points.

Examples Credits: Associate producers, Ronald L. Weaver, Julie Martin ;

cinematographer, Michael Livesay ; supervising film editor, Nick
Masci ; music supervisor, Ethel Huber ; still photographer, Stephen
Paley ; executive producer, George Dessart ; [researcher?], Mary
Gay Heckman ; [function undetermined], Wilfred White.

Credits: Editors, Robert C. Jones, Don Zimmerman.

111
7.2.6.2. Cast

List persons or performing groups (and, if desired, animals) who have contributed to the
on-screen artistic or intellectual production of a film or videorecording, whose functions are
considered of importance to the archive, and who are not previously listed in that capacity in the
cataloging record. Separate individual names from one another by the comma, space
punctuation ( , ). Introduce the cast note with the word “Cast” or other appropriate term (or their
equivalents in other languages) followed by the colon, space punctuation ( : ). Optionally,
include character names in parentheses, following the cast member name to which they refer.
Questionable player/performer information may be indicated by the inclusion of a question mark
following the name or role, whichever is appropriate, and bracketing them, e.g., [Bill Jones?],
[Aunt Fanny?].

Prepare separate notes for narrators, moderators, reporters, interviewers, etc. who appear
or are heard on screen, but whose function is not that of a player/performer. Also, prepare
separate notes for players/performers whose voices are heard but who do not appear on screen,
e.g., actors who read dialogue for animated characters.

Added entries may be created for any name listed in cast notes. Archives should provide
guidelines for the types and numbers of cast members, performers, etc., they wish to trace.
Appropriate national or international rules should be used for standardizing names to be used as
access points.

Examples Narrator: Orson Welles.

Anchor: Walter Cronkite.

Cast: Anne Baxter (Louise), Maria Perschy (Angela), Gustavo

Rojo (Bill), Reginald Gilliam (Mr. Johnson), [Catherine Elliot?]
(Aunt Sallie), Ben Tatar (waiter).

Cast: Marion Shilling, Gaylord Pendleton, Reb Russell, Eddie

Phillips, Ted Stroback, Bruce Mitchell, Lloyd Ingraham, Henry
Hall, “Captain” (a dog).

Voices: Peter Ustinov, Cloris Leachman, Sally Kellerman,

Andy Devine, John Carradine, Alan Barzman.

Performers: Gaby Casadesus and the Juilliard String Quartet.

112
7.2.7. History of edition/version/variation

Make notes relating to the history of the film or videorecording and its
editions/versions/variations. If an edition/version/variation statement has been included, give
additional information as it applies. If changes are judged to be minor and no formal indication
of version has been included, give additional information as it applies.

Examples Short version of work of the same title originally released in

1965.

Version information (re-editing and new narration) from

copyright descriptive material.

Censored version.

Remake of the 1941 motion picture, HERE COMES MR.

JORDAN.

Originally developed for ABC-TV.

Teaching version includes questions for discussion about the

novel’s theme and philosophy presented in a classroom setting at
the end of the film; discussion is 10 min. in length.

Title of work is clearly, TEN NIGHTS IN A BAR ROOM;

however, several versions of this film were produced between
1910-1931. It is probable that this work is the 1921 version, but
due to vagueness of available plot summaries and disappearance of
copyright descriptive material for the 1921 version, date cannot be
verified at this time.

Music and effects track added in 1930 for theaters equipped for
sound.

Rerelease includes new narration and sound track.

113
7.2.8. Production, distribution, etc.

Give additional information concerning the production, sponsorship, laboratory, studios,

distribution, broadcast, and release, etc. of the item, if such information has not already been
given in the Production, distribution, etc. area. Also, cite the source of any information stated in
the Production, distribution, etc. area which was not taken from the item.

Examples Sources conflict on the attribution of production company

function to Universal; some list only Groverton Productions in that
capacity.

Production company from copyright description; verified in

Moving Picture World 10: 781.

Reissue distributor and date taken from New York Times

Reviews 4: 2316.

Series telecast: CBS, Nov. 22, 1953 - July 5, 1955.

Date from notes accompanying film and from Merlo Pusey’s

Eugene Meyer. -- New York : Knopf, 1974, p. 195.

Country of original release taken from Hammond’s Marvellous

Méliès, p. 107.

Filmed on location in India.

Original Pathe marking printed through on edge of film.

7.2.8.1. Places

If the countries of production, distribution, etc. are not apparent from the item, cite the
source of that information in a note.

Examples Country of original production taken from Winquist &

Jungstedt’s Svenskt filmskådespelarlexikon, p. 31.

“Released in Italy” in copyright statement may refer to Locarno

Film Festival per Variety review in archive’s descriptive file.

Original version released in the United Kingdom in 1932 under

title: STARDUST.

114
 For international co-productions, cite the source(s) used to determine the order of release,
i.e., the order in which the countries of production are recorded.

Example Opened in Madrid in Sept. 1966, released later in Italy in 1966,

and in Austria in 1967, cf. AFI Catalog F6, 1961-1970, p. 1064.

Any countries which appear on the film, but are not included in the Production,
distribution, etc. area may be given in a note.

Examples Pinewood Studios, England was used for animation sequences

only, cf. Kubrick on Kubrick, p. 11.

Filmed on location in Hong Kong and Singapore.

7.2.8.2. Names and Functions

Cite the source of information concerning names and functions for production,
distribution, etc., not taken from the work being cataloged, in a note. Provide additional
information concerning names and functions, not already given in the Production, distribution,
etc. area, in notes.

Provide indications as to which of the archive’s holdings correspond to any

rerelease/reissue, if such indication is not already clarified in the Production, distribution, etc.
area or elsewhere in the catalog record.

Added entries (access points) may be created for any corporate names associated with
production, distribution, etc. Archives should determine the number and types of corporate
names they wish to trace. Use IFLA Working Group on Corporate Headings, Form and
Structure of Corporate Headings (London: IFLA International Office for UBC, 1980), or other
appropriate national or international rules for standardizing names to be used as access points.

Examples NEA grant no. T80-34-183N.

Supported in part by a grant from the Ford Foundation.

Reissue distributor and date taken from New York Times Film
Reviews 4: 2316.

115
 Examples (cont.) British release company from Monthly Film Bulletin, vol. 21, p.
75.

Original work released in 1935 by Metro-Goldwyn-Mayer.

Title reissued by Warner Brothers in 1978; archive holds

original release copy only.

Archive holds copies of both 1953 original release (copy 1) and

1982 rerelease (copy 2).

Parallel title, the ALL-AMERICAN, is reissue title; archive

holds copies of both original 1928 release (copy 1) and 1929
reissue (copy 2).

Archive holds copies of both original German 1931 release

(copy 1) and 1978 reissue with new English language subtitles
(copy 2).

7.2.8.3. Dates

Cite the sources of information concerning production, distribution, etc. dates, not taken
from the work being cataloged, in a note. Provide additional information concerning dates not
already given in the Production, distribution, etc. area in notes.

Examples First released in Los Angeles 1979-12-28 and in New York

1980-01-03.

Date from notes accompanying film and from Merlo Pusey’s

Eugene Mayer. -- New York: Knopf, 1974, p. 195.

Tentative year of release from nitrate edge code date.

Footage probably taken by Agnes Meyer, according to notes

accompanying film; date from apparent ages of children.

Production was begun in 1935 and then abandoned in 1937.

Work was resumed and completed in 1942.

Archive copy lists date as “1697.”

116
7.2.8.4. Trade names

Trade names, which are further identifications of films, appear on the title frames, often
without the same prominence as series titles. Trade names may simply appear as a logo or
trademark. When such a trade name or trademark appears (and it has been determined not to be
a series title) give it in a note.

Examples The trade name “A Triangle Comedy” appears on title frame.

The Cosmopolitan Productions logo appears on title frame.

7.2.8.5. Television sponsors

For television programs which have commercials or public service announcements

included within the program, and where such sponsors have been determined not to have any
production or editorial control over the work, give the sponsor, product, service, or message
being promoted in a note.

Examples Program includes commercials for IBM and All detergent.

Program includes American Cancer Society message.

Program includes a Red Cross appeal for blood donations.

7.2.9. Copyright

Provide notes to clarify information found in copyright notices or to indicate the sources
of information, other than the item itself or the published records of the copyright agency.

Examples Copyright registration information gives claimant as

Armbrewster, Inc., but notice on film lists claimant as Cornflower
Productions.

Information on current (1982-09-04) copyright owner is from

the files of the US Copyright Office.

117
7.2.10. Physical description

Give notes that apply to the entire physical description.

Examples Videocassette not viewed; physical description from data sheet

supplied by the distributor.

Viewed for credit sequences only.

Make the following notes on the physical description when appropriate and if the level of
detail is desired.

7.2.10.1. Specific material designation

Give details about the designation of a film or videorecording which were not or could
not be described by copy status/generation or specific material designation terminology or by
additions to the title proper, e.g., [trailer], [outtakes], etc.

Examples Viewing print is fine grain masterpositive rejected for pre-print

use.

Track is music and effects track.

Reel 8 is completely interior titles; r1-7 have no interior titles,

but do include slugs for interior titles.

If there is more than one element in the physical description, specify the element to which
the note refers.

Example Masterpositive reel 4 lacks color sequence at ft. 57-95.

118
7.2.10.2. Special projection requirements or playback/recording mode

Give special requirements for projection or playback/recording mode which are not
already apparent in the physical description area.

Examples Anamorphic lens required.

Silent with sound aperture.

Silent aperture.

Quadruplex.

EIAJ.

MCA DiscoVision.

Secam color system.

“Filmed in SchizophrenoScope.”

Viewing copy should be projected at 18 frames per second.

7.2.10.3. Incompleteness

Note the nature and extent of incompleteness -- to the extent of precision known.

Examples Main title, credits, and some footage at head of reel lacking.

Sound track lacking in reel 1: ft. 278-353.

Jumps in continuity and original length indicate part of picture

lacking.

Possible reel count from leader.

Original nitrate reel 3 discarded owing to extensive

deterioration.

Main title and part of picture lacking. Two musical numbers,

“Poppin the cork” and “Here’s looking at you,” included in
original release and in complete material, do not appear in 35 mm.
viewing print, 16 mm. duplicate negative (copy 2) and 35 mm.
duplicate negative. Original 35 mm. footage: 2206 ft. per
copyright descriptive material and Film Daily Yearbook 1934, p.
345.

119
7.2.10.4. Length and/or duration

Note any additional information relating to the length or duration of the item.

Examples Length estimated; film too brittle to be viewed.

Copy 2 is on double reels.

Projection copy is stretch-printed.

Cassette label incorrectly lists duration as 60 min.; commercials

have probably been erased.

Total footage includes introduction, commercials (Ford, RCA,

RCA Victor), station break, and an appearance by guest producer,
Max Gordon, at end.

Length of individual reels: r1 = 310 m. ; r2 = 292 m. ; r3 = 301

m. ; r4 = 273 m. ; r5 = 293 m. ; r6 = 289 m. ; r7 = 232 m. ; r8 =
256 m.

Original release length: 7629 ft., 85 min.

Originally released in 8 reels (2246 m.).

Alternatively, individual reel lengths may be incorporated into the summary (see 7.2.16),
and total original release length may be incorporated into the Physical description area (see
5.3.4.1).

7.2.10.5. Color characteristics

Give any special color characteristics or indications of special color systems of a film or
videorecording, which are desired by the archive but are not already indicated in the Physical
description area. See 5.5.2.

Examples Hand-colored original copied on color stock.

Technicolor print.

Color sequence in reel 10: 200-275 ft.

Color very faded.

120
7.2.10.6. Sound characteristics

Give any special characteristics of the sound component of a film or videorecording not
covered by the sound characteristics or the specific material designation in the Physical
description area. See also 5.5.3.

Examples Sound track lacking.

Magnetic track.

Optical track in English; simultaneous magnetic stripe track in

French.

Dolby sound.

Stereo magnetic print with optical control track for Sensurround

effects.

7.2.10.7. Variant copies

If there are two or more variant copies of a single title, any distinctions between the
copies should be made clear in a note.

Examples Viewing print (copy 2) is a rerelease copy.

Reference print (copy 2) is television print.

Copy 1 is original Italian release; copy 2 is US release with

English subtitles.

7.2.10.8. Illustrations

Indicate the number and type of still illustrations, such as charts, diagrams, and stills.

Examples Includes 7 diagrams and 2 charts.

Film is entirely composed of still photographs; the illusion of

movement is created via the use of camera movement and editing.

121
7.2.10.9. Location and type of credit sequences

Give information about the form and placement of credit sequences.

Examples Full credit sequence appears at beginning of reel 1; no

additional credits at end of film.

Credit sequences appear at both the beginning and end of the

videocassette.

Credit sequences appear at the beginning of each episode.

Credit sequence on moving background appears following 5

min. of story action.

Animated credit sequence appears at beginning of reel 1.

Credit sequence provided by narration on sound track.

7.2.10.10. Other physical details important for use or storage

Give other physical details that are important to the use of the film or videorecording.

Examples Reference print (copy 1) too brittle to be viewed.

Film is warped and brittle and telescopes on takeup; handle

with care.

Distorted image results from original cinemascope production

dubbed on 3/4 in. videocassette.

Workprint contains many splices.

Copy 3 is out-of-sync.

7.2.10.11. Research notes for physical description

Indicate the source of information for elements recorded in the Physical description area.

Example Original reel count from Moving Picture World, vol. 21, p. 435.

122
7.2.11. Accompanying material

Make notes on the existence and type of accompanying material, and, optionally, on other
related documentation materials.

Examples With teacher’s guide in German and English.

With “Odorama” cards.

With computer disc for interactive use.

With student workbook.

Archive holds continuity list.

Archive holds lobby cards, pressbook, posters, and other

publicity material.

Archive holds stills.

Documentation library holds synopsis and script.

7.2.12. Series

Provide additional information on series titles, numbering, and statements of

responsibility, not provided in the Series area. Cite the source of any information stated in the
Series area which was not taken from the item.

Examples Series title from Educational Film Locator, 2d ed. (1980),p.1127.

Reissued in 1974 as part of series: NEW VERSIONS OF

COMEDY CLASSICS / by arrangement with the Harold Lloyd
Estate and Foundation.

Variant series title: NGS SPECIALS.

Parallel series title, The LITTLE RASCALS, is for television

reissue.

Credits: series producer for GREAT PERFORMANCES,

Merrill Brockway.

If it is known that parts of an item belong to different series, give details of the series.

Example Parts 1-3 (ca. 45 min.) are also included in: OIL SPILL
CONTINGENCY PLANNING SERIES.

123
7.2.13. Dissertations

If a film or videorecording is a dissertation or thesis presented in partial fulfillment of the

requirements for an academic degree, give the designation, “Thesis,” or its equivalent in other
languages, followed by a brief statement of the degree enclosed in parentheses (e.g., M.A.,
Ph.D., etc.), the name of the institution or faculty to which the thesis was presented, and the year
in which the degree was granted. Separate the type of degree from the name of the institution by
a dash ( -- ). Separate the name of the institution from the year of the degree by the comma,
space punctuation ( , ).

Example Thesis (M.A.)--New York University, 1981.

7.2.14. Users/intended audience

Make a brief note of the intended audience for a motion picture or videorecording if one
is stated on the item, its container, or accompanying material. (This is not the same as
censorship certification; see also 7.2.20.)

Examples Intended audience: Adults (age 18 and over).

Intended audience: Pre-school children.

For children aged 8-12.

7.2.15. References to published reviews or descriptions

Provide citations to published reviews or descriptions.

Examples Reviewed in: Variety, 10/29/78, p. 2.

Reviewed in: Motion Picture Herald, 10/5/35, p. 35, but this

review appears to be of British release version.

124
7.2.16. Contents

A contents note lists the individual parts, segments, etc. of a moving image work.
Contents notes may be given for newsreels or newsreel segments, newsfilm, magazine-type
programs, compilation works, and any other works that consist of several parts. Include data
such as title, footage, copyright, and any other appropriate information. A contents note may
appear in conjunction with a summary or may substitute for a summary. See also 7.2.17.

Examples Title: PATHE NEWS [EXCERPTS NO. 6]

Contents: “Newest U.S. Submarine Goes into Commission,”

PATHE NEWS NO. 60 [1921] (160 ft.) -- “Span of New Memorial
Bridge to Connect N.H. and Maine,” PATHE NEWS NO. 57
[1923] (72 ft.) -- “Celebrate 300th Anniversary of Settling of
Portsmouth,” PATHE NEWS NO. 69 [1923] (99 ft.) -- “World’s
Largest Sub Takes First Plunge,” PATHE NEWS NO. 93 [1927],
(c) 21Nov27; MP4478 (134 ft.) -- “New Memorial Bridge between
N.H. and Maine!” PATHE NEWS NO. 70 [1923] (105 ft.) --
“Launch Largest Submarine Cruiser,” PATHE SOUND NEWS
NO. 1 [1930], (c) 29Dec29; MP1025 (80 ft.).

Title: MAGAZINE. EDITION 2

Contents: 1) Sex after Sixty -- 2) Ten Ways to Kill Your

Husband -- 3) Coffee, Tea or Radiation?

Title: FLICKER FLASHBACKS. SERIES 2, NO. 4

Contents: The BANKERS DAUGHTER, OR, A BRAVE GIRL

SAVES THE DAY. -- US : Biograph, 1910 (308 ft.) -- PATHE
NEWS 1906. -- US : Pathe, 1906 (110 ft.) -- TWO PATHS, A
SYMBOLIC TRAGEDY. -- US : Biograph, 1911 (327 ft.).

Added entries (access points) may be provided for titles of previously existing works
included in contents notes.

125
7.2.17. Summary

Give a brief summary of the content of the item. The summary should be an accurate and
objective description of the film’s actual content, based on a viewing of the item. It should
indicate the work’s bias, but should not reflect the cataloger’s own moral, political, or aesthetic
opinions. (Such opinions may, at the discretion of the archive, be listed in a separate, clearly
identified, cataloger opinion note, within the guidelines suggested in 7.2.27.)

The summary is designed to assist the user in pre-selecting moving image materials for
viewing, thus helping him/her to eliminate unwanted materials and to concentrate upon those
items most useful for his/her purposes. This avoids potential damage to materials, and likewise
cuts the costs and efforts incurred by the unnecessary movement of materials to and from storage
locations.

The summary should be written in a style that is easy to read. It should not include
technical terms, abbreviations, or allusions significant to the specialist only; it must be
remembered that the user’s native language may differ from that in which the summary is
written. Avoid slang expressions and colloquialisms fashionable at the time of writing, and,
where several catalogers are viewing independently, they should, ideally, try to achieve a
common written style. If acceptable summaries are already available in secondary sources,
catalogers may use these, instead of taking the time to prepare summaries of their own. In such
cases, the secondary sources should be cited at the end of the summary.

Subject to the nature of the material, the summary should consist of two parts:

1. An introduction outlining the plot, subject, or nature of the moving image, preferably
including genre(s), time period(s), and location(s) of the events depicted, if appropriate. This
introduction, able to stand alone, is a guide to what follows and can be used in printed catalogs or
other contexts when space is at a premium. Such an approach may be necessitated by certain
types of computer systems.

2. An expansion of the introduction. The expansion may be either short or long -- a condition
which will be determined by (1) the staff and space (either computer or manual files) available to
the archive for creating and storing long summaries, and (2) the complexity of the content of the
work being cataloged. The beginning and ending of each reel, together with an indication of reel
length, may or may not be provided; the nature of the shots used (e.g., close up, long shot, etc.)
may or may not be given. If known, indicate the contents of missing sections in parentheses.
Also if known, indicate the presence and nature of stock footage or excerpts from other moving
image materials which are used. If the film is a compilation of several separately titled,
previously released works, the cataloger may prefer to use the more formal contents note for this
purpose. See 7.2.16.

126
 Formally structured access points for the contents of films may be provided by either the
use of classification numbers (e.g., UDC, Dewey, etc.), or by the use of terms from standardized
subject and/or genre thesauri. Certain computer systems will be able to generate access points
from keywords embedded in the summary.

Examples Summary: An historical drama set in 16th century England in

which King Henry VIII divorces his wife, Catherine of Aragon,
and marries Anne Boleyn, a former lady-in-waiting, who is in love
with Sir Thomas Wyatt. After several years, Henry becomes
infatuated with Lady Jane Seymour and arranges to have the
innocent Anne found in a compromising situation with Sir
Thomas. Anne is tried for infidelity, found guilty, and executed.

Summary: A detective thriller which tells the story of murder

and subsequent blackmail. R1. Scotland Yard’s flying squad arrest
a criminal; after he has been subjected to an interrogation,
identification parade, charged, fingerprinted, and put in the cells,
the men in charge of the case, including Detective Frank Webber,
prepare to leave (787 ft.). R2. Alice White, Frank’s girl friend, is
peeved at being kept waiting; he takes her to a Lyon’s Corner
House; they quarrel and Frank leaves her, but subsequently
observes Alice leaving the cafe in the company of another man
with whom she has made an assignation (1468 ft.). R3. The man,
an artist, invites Alice into his studio; they are observed by Tracy,
a furtive character not unknown to the artist (2272 ft.). R4. The
artist offers to paint Alice; whilst she is changing . . .

Summary: A drama in which a young man in a French village

is wrongly arrested for stealing. He escapes and is recaptured;
with a gun held to his back, he leads the capturer to a tree where
the real thief is burying the money. He is then reunited with his
sweetheart.

Summary: A documentary which tells the story of the North

Sea herring fisheries, filmed at Lerwick in the Shetlands,
Lowestoft and Yarmouth, and in the North Sea. R1. Fishermen at
Lerwick; fishing fleet at Lewstoft; leaving for the North Sea; the
herring shoals are reached (89-357 ft.). R2. Life on board a trawler;
casting the nets (1803 ft.). R3. Hauling commences; a storm rises;
the trawlers commence their race to harbour on completion of the
hauling (2674 ft.). R4. En route to Yarmouth; entering the harbour;
fish auction and busy quayside scenes; fish girls gutting herring;
taking fish to city markets by train. The End (3631 ft.).

127
Examples (cont.)
Summary: A comedy set in contemporary France in which a
man resolves to cure his wife’s malaise by inviting another man
into their lives. The two men become great pals. “Their ostensible
pursuit of the wife’s happiness launches the two...on a series of
adventures that make them seem ever more boyish, until they
encounter an adolescent who is infinitely wiser and manlier than
they.” New York Times, Dec. 18, 1978, p. C 15.

Summary: A biology film which traces the life cycle of a

common housefly from egg to maggot, then pupa, and finally
maturity. Utilizes close-up magnified photography.

Summary: Newsfilm which shows scenes and incidents of

Winston Churchill’s visit to Belfast. A shot of mounted troops
wearing capes (ft. 6-9); a contingent of the Irish Guards form fours
and march off (ft. 41); policemen at a street corner search and
check the identity of passers-by (ft. 50); a queue of people waiting
to gain admittance to the hall (ft. 57). Arrival of Lord Pirrie and
Mr. and Mrs. Winston Churchill. Lord and Lady Pirrie in close
shot leaving their car (ft. 61-68); a similar shot of Mr. Churchill
who is immediately followed by Mrs. Churchill (ft. 81).

Summary: Factual footage which includes panoramic views of

Buckingham palace, the Queen Victoria Memorial, and crowds
lining the Mall. A military band marches toward the palace gates.
A group of automobiles and a single carriage proceed down the
Mall toward the gate.

Summary: A theme film composed of footage relating to the

early years of the Panama Canal. Film has ca. 2 ft. of views of Dr.
William Crawford Gorgas, chief sanitation officer of the Panama
Canal (1904-1913) and member of the Isthmian Canal
Commission, standing in front of a building; location of this
sequence is undetermined. Remainder of film shows Dr. Gorgas
and an unidentified man riding on a Panama Canal Company train.
The two men are silhouetted against passing scenery of the Canal
Zone as Dr. Gorgas shows the other man points of interest. The
train passes a body of water -- which is probably a part of the canal
-- countryside, and buildings -- probably on Front Street, Colon --
including a YMCA club. The final scene is of people walking
across tracks after the train passes.

128
Examples (cont.)
Summary: An abstract film in which the camera, mounted on a
swing, moves “in an arc, in and out of the space which it
observes.... The camera also has a secondary shutter mounted
before the lens, rotating at various speeds and interacting with the
shutter of the camera as it also explores different running speeds,”
achieving shapes and spatial relationships similar to those in
Cubist painting. Le Grice, Malcolm. Abstract Film and Beyond
(Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1977, p. 129).

Summary: A compilation film consisting of a satire made up of

topical pictures taken between 1896 and 1928. R1. Various stills
from a family photograph album (ft. 37-56) are followed by shots
of two women in costumes of 1905 playing tennis (ft. 83-97) and
cycling (ft. 98-115); flashback shots of the Woodford cycle meet
(1897) (ft. 120-176) and a congestion of traffic at the Mansion
House (ca. 1897) (ft. 189-262) are followed by shots of an early
car driven by a man with a woman passenger, which breaks down
but moves off after assistance from a cyclist (ft. 312-396); further
flashbacks follow of Queen Alexandra in a car (ca. 1909) (ft. 405-
419) and King Edward VII on horseback and shooting at
Sandringham (December 1909) (ft. 420-648); a flashback of the
1896 Derby (June 3, 1896) (ft. 668-686) precedes another of
Queen Victoria’s Diamond Jubilee procession (June 22, 1897) (ft.
700-733). R2. Further shots of the procession (ft. 734-803)
precede shots of two men wearing top hats and frock coats (ft. 804-
811) and four men drinking beer at 2d. a pint outside a country pub
(ft. 813-849); a long shot of three cyclists (ft. 857-864) precedes a
close shot of a man in an early cycling costume posing with his
bicycle (ft. 887). Excerpts of D.W. Griffith’s FEUD IN THE
KENTUCKY HILLS are then shown under the title “The Only
Child, or, Twins Are Worse” (ft. 1107). The film concludes with
the following actual shots of early fashions: afternoon dresses (ft.
1115-1193), hats (ft. 1126), and underwear (ft. 1417). The End (ft.
1420).

129
7.2.18. Numbers borne by the item

Give important numbers borne by the item.

Examples (Physical description)

Viewing print: 1 reel of 9 (r5?, inc.) (241 m.) ; 35 mm. : b&w,
si.

[Note] At head of reel: “Part 5,” which could mean either reel 5 or reel
9; if it is reel 9, it is incomplete and lacks end title; if reel 5, part of
picture may be lacking.

Donor’s inventory number: RMA 301-4.

Accession number: 82-05-30-1.

7.2.19. With notes

When two or more separate works are contained on a single reel, or other single physical
element, give the titles of the other separate works in a note. Indicate whether the titles on the
reel were released together or are simply held by the archive in this manner.

Examples Held on one reel with reel 1 of: the FABLE OF THE
HONEYMOON THAT TRIED TO COME BACK.

Released on one reel with WHEN LITTLE LINDY SANG.

Optionally, give the location of the additional separate works on the item, the length in
meters or feet, and/or minutes, and the total length or duration.

Examples Second film held on one reel with: LIFE OF AN AMERICAN

FIREMAN and [UNIDENTIFIED BOULDIN NOS. 2, 4-6].

Released on cassette with: The LITTLE ENGINE THAT

COULD (25 min., min. 30-55); total time 55 min.

Held on reel with: The TRUMAN STORY (ft. 1-416); total

footage 875 ft.

130
7.2.20. Censorship and other rating designations

Indicate whether the work has been viewed by a censorship board or other similar official
agency. This note may explain why portions of the film have been cut from the copy in the
archive’s collection. Cite any other rating designation considered of importance to the archive,
such as industry boards or panels. Indicate both the rating and the body that gave the rating.
Optionally, add an explanation of the meaning of the rating.

Examples Approved by the New York State Board of Censors.

Rated 18 by the British Board of Film Censors

Passed by the National Board of Review.

Rated X by the Motion Picture Association of America.

Rated PG (parental guidance suggested) by MPAA.

Rated Grön (Green) permitted for persons 11 years or older by

Statens Biografbyrå (the Swedish Board of Censors).

7.2.21. Awards

List any awards which the work has received in notes.

Examples Received best documentary award at the Cannes Film Festival

in 1982.

Received Academy Award for best director in 1957.

7.2.22. Restrictions on access

Give any donor imposed restrictions on viewing or projecting the work in a note. If
restrictions are lengthy, indicate that the item has restrictions, and refer the user to appropriate
paperwork or person.

Examples Cannot be viewed until 1995.

Cannot be viewed without permission of the donor; see letter in

acquisitions file.

Restricted viewing; see reference librarian.

May be shown in archive’s theater a maximum of twice a year.

131
7.2.23. Terms governing use

Give information regarding rights to use (copy) the materials (or any portion thereof) if
not apparent from copyright restrictions. If copying restrictions are complicated, indicate that
the item has copying restrictions and refer the user to the appropriate paperwork or person.

Examples Copying is allowed only with permission of donor.

Copying is allowed for noncommercial purposes only.

Restricted copying; see Smith, John Collection file.

No transfer to video is allowed.

No copying of this material is allowed.

Archive owns full rights.

7.2.24. Source of acquisition

Give the provenance or method of acquisition of the item in a note. (Some archives may
choose to maintain such information in separate internal files.) Cite date of receipt, method of
acquisition (gift, purchase, deposit, loan, etc.) and source of the material.

Examples Received: 1972-11-25 as copyright deposit.

Received: 1982-05-15 as gift from the estate of John Smith; for

paperwork, see Smith, John Collection file.

Received: 1981-06-06; negative copies from nitrate loaned by

the Museum of Modern Art; viewing print and video viewing
copy received: 1981-08-03 from archive laboratory.

Received: 1968-09-09; purchased from Janus Films; purchase

order no. 68-398.

Received: 1977-02-15; transferred from university manuscript

archives.

Received: 1948-03-12 as gift from the XYZ Corp.;

masterpositive copied from nitrate original at Bono Labs: 1974-02-
27.

132
7.2.25. Location of related materials

When the location of related materials not held by the archive is known, give the location
of such related materials, e.g., scripts, posters, stills, pressbooks, outtakes, etc. (For related
documents held by the archive, see 7.2.11.)

Examples The Museum Modern Art, New York, holds stills.

Brigham Young University, Harold B. Lee Library holds

original script.

Academy of Motion Picture Arts and Sciences, Margaret

Herrick Library holds posters, pressbooks, and stills.

University of Pennsylvania holds field study notes.

Outtakes are preserved at the Staatliches Filmarchiv der D.D.R.

7.2.26. Publications

Give the citation or information about a publication based on the use, study, or analysis
of the material described.

Example The Granik Collection is described in: “Dedicated to Debating :

the Television and Radio Forums of Theodore Granik” / Sarah
Dashiell Rouse. Quarterly Journal of the Library of Congress, vol.
40, pp. 162-173.

133
7.2.27. Cataloger opinion

Although normal standards of librarianship and archivism place heavy emphasis on the
impartiality of the cataloger, some archives have found it useful to provide space where
catalogers may record a subjective evaluation of the film. In part, the intention may be to
provide a “safety valve” which will help insure impartiality elsewhere; more usefully, cataloger
evaluations are considered valuable by some archives when preparing screening programs.

When included, cataloger opinion notes should be brief but informative. Judgments
should be accompanied by some indication of the reasoning behind them; extremes of abuse,
praise, dogmatism, or attempted humor should be avoided. The note must also include some
form of identification of the cataloger whose opinions are recorded which will be meaningful at
least to the originating archive: the cataloger’s initials will usually suffice.

Example Cataloger opinion: With its uncritical nostalgia for an idealized

pre-war Britain, this film offers an excellent contrast to later
Ministry of Information films which acknowledged bad pre-war
conditions and turned improvement of them into a war aim, e.g.,
WALES - GREEN MOUNTAIN, BLACK MOUNTAIN. (RBNS)

Note that this is a permissive, not a prescriptive rule: archives that record cataloger opinions may
still choose to retain them as internal notes only, and to exclude them from any published or
public catalog, or from any exercise in information exchange.

134
APPENDIX A -- EXAMPLES
 List of Examples

1. An early silent film

2. A documentary short
3. A full length silent documentary
4. A sound newsreel
5. A silent newsreel
6. A theatrical serial cataloged to a minimal level only
7. A theatrical serial
8. A feature film
9. An incomplete sound feature
10. A silent feature
11. A piece of record footage
12. An animated short
13. An animated feature
14. An experimental film
15. A feature film -- German language version
16. The same feature film -- French language version
17. A remake of the feature film shown in examples 15 & 16
18. A sound feature
19. A sound feature
20. A documentary short
21. A feature film
22. A documentary short
23. An international co-production
24. A compilation of television commercials
25. A program from a television cultural anthology series
26. A theatrical trailer
27. An unidentified silent film
28. A television news broadcast
29. A home movie
30. A television discussion program
31. An educational film in a series
32. A feature film with holdings in several generations
33. Television news [1]
34. Television news [2]
35. A home movie

137
Example 1: An early silent film

MARDI GRAS PARADE. -- US : Thomas A. Edison, Inc. [producer, distributor],

[190-?].

Viewing print: 1 reel of 1 (47 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., b&w, si. / USW FLA 1644.
Dupe neg: 1 reel of 1 (47 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., b&w, si. / USW FRA 4152.
Archival positive: 1 reel of 1 (47 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., b&w, si. / USW FRA 4153.

Summary: Early actuality footage, shot from a single location on a street in New
Orleans, showing a Mardi Gras parade. Mule drawn floats, children and adults in
costumes, and brass bands march down the street, as crowds of spectators mill about the
sidewalks, sometimes spilling into the street.
Source of acquisition: All copies received ca. 1959 from USDA lab; they replace
35 mm. nitrate original material which was received 1947-03-27 as a purchase from the
George Kleine estate. Following copying, the nitrate was destroyed.

Access points:

Subjects: 1. Carnival -- Louisiana -- New Orleans. 2. Parades -- Louisiana -- New

Orleans. 3. Holidays.
Genres: 1. Actualities. 2. Shorts.
Added I. Thomas A. Edison, Inc. II. Kleine (George) Collection (Library of
Entries: Congress)

138
Example 2: A documentary short

Zeichen der Bäume / Regie, Drehbuch und Kamera, Christian Lehmann ; Musik, Ulrich
Gumpert. -- DDR : DEFA-Studio für Dokumentarfilme [Produzent], 1983 ; DDR
: Progress Film-Verleih [Verleiher], 1984.

Archivkopie: 2R von 1 Akt (508 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., col., Ton / DDS CSP00230.
Original-Neg.: 2B/2T von je 2 (je 508 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., col., Ton / DDS
CSN00170.
Verleihkopie: 1K von 1 Akt (508 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., col., Ton / DDS V0240.
Videokopie (VHS): 1 Kassette (16 min.) ; 1/2 in. : col. (SECAM), Ton / DDS
VK1120.

Dokumentarfilm.
Stab: Schnitt, Ingeborg Marszalek ; Sprecher, Rolf Liebmann, Ernst Cantzler.
Sprachfassung: Deutscher Vor- und Abspann und deutscher Kommentar.
Inhalt: Zeichen in Bäumen -- eingeritzte Namen und Häftlingsnummern -- sind
fast alles, was an den Überlebenskampf von KZ-Häftlingen während der letzten
Kriegstage am Belower Wald erinnert. Ein Film zum Thema Faschismus als Mahnung
für die nachfolgende Generation.
Technischer Hinweis: Alle Farbkopien wurden auf ORWO-Farbmaterial
hergestellt.
Auszeichnung: Prädikat “Besonders wertvoll”.
Literaturhinweis: Filmobibliografischer Jahresbericht. 1983, S. 53.
Deskriptoren: II. Weltkrieg ; Konzentrationslager.

139
Example 3: A full length silent documentary

The BATTLE OF THE SOMME / producer, William F. Jury ; editor, Charles A. Urban
[and Geoffrey H. Malins?] ; cameramen, Geoffrey A. Malins and J.B. McDowell.
-- [Reissue?]. -- GB : British Topical Committee for War Films [production
company], 1916 ; GB : War Office [sponsor], 1916. -- (c): GB : Crown Copyright.

Archival positive: 5 reels of 5 (4765 ft.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, si. / GBI IWM
191:F 1:A:35.
Duplicate negative: 5 reels of 5 (ca. 4765 ft.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, si. / GBI IWM
191:D 1:A:35.
Duplicate negative: 5 reels of 5 on 2 (1980 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., b&w, si. / GBI
IWM 191:D 1:A:16.
Viewing print: 5 reels of 5 (4760 ft.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, si. / GBI IWM 191:P
1:A:35.
Video viewing print (VHS): 5 reels of 5 on 1 cassette (ca. 80 min.) : 1/2 in. :
b&w, si. / GBI IWM 191:V 3:P:13.

Sources for credits: Credits from various contemporary sources, as summarized

in Badsey (see below).
History of version: Film was first screened on 10 August 1916. The version held
is ca. 150 ft. shorter than the original length given in War Office Cinematograph
Committee ledgers, has some discontinuities in caption numbering sequence, and ends
with a map showing events up to 8 April 1917, almost eight months after first screening;
it is therefore assumed to be a re-issue.
Physical description: Listing is representative not comprehensive, as the Museum
holds more than one duplicate negative and several viewing, loan and theatre prints in
various film and video formats -- IWM technical files have full details.
References: Badsey, Stephen, “Battle of the Somme : British War Propaganda,”
in Historical Journal of Film, Radio and Television, Volume 3 Number 2, 1983 ; Viewing
Guide: the Battle of the Somme (Imperial War Museum, 1987) ; Smither, Roger, “ ‘A
wonderful idea of the fighting’ : the question of fakes in the Battle of the Somme,” in
Imperial War Museum Review, No. 3 (Imperial War Museum, 1988).
Summary: British forces, chiefly 7th and 29th Divisions, in the opening of the
Somme offensive, 1st July 1916. The ‘big battle’ structure of the film opens with the
preparatory bombardment for the days before the attack, and the Infantry marching to
their final positions, then shows the attack itself, the casualties and prisoners, and the
consolidation of the next few days as the attacking troops are withdrawn for rest. The
bombardment, shown in the opening reels, is by a variety of guns from a giant 15-inch
howitzer down to trench mortars. The attack by 29th Division at Beaumont Hamel is
shown, including the explosion of a mine under Hawthorn Redoubt. The remainder of
the film includes the treatment

140
(cont.)

of British and German wounded at the Minden Post dressing station in the 7th Division
sector and the consolidation of captured German positions at Fricourt and Mametz, as
well as British soldiers coming out of the line and German prisoners being sent to the
rear.

141
Example 4: A sound newsreel

WELT IM FILM. No. 110. -- DE [British and American Zones] : Welt im Film
[producer], 1947-07-04.

Viewing print: 1 reel of 1 (1198 ft.) ; 35 mm. : N., b&w, sd. / GBI WIF 110:p
1:N:35.
Duplicate negative: 1 reel of 1 (1198 ft.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, sd. / GBI WIF
110:D 1:A:35.

Contents: I. International Youth Congress in Munich: delegates accommodated

in Hotel City (converted bunker); conference scenes, with notable guests including
Andre Gide (who later speaks) and Ernst Weichert; proceedings opened by Harry Wilde-
Schulze -- II. US President Truman visits Canada: met by Alexander and Mackenzie
King, makes speech in Canadian Parliament (some original sound) -- III. ‘Streiflichter
aus Deutschland’ (presumed title, story title missing): a. Testing purity of water in
various parts of Berlin. b. The bombed, burned and no longer seaworthy liner St. Louis is
restored for use as a floating hotel in Hamburg -- IV. Fashion, horse racing and British
Royal Family at Ascot -- V. ‘A historic opportunity’: meeting of bi-zonal Economic
Council in Frankfurt. Speeches from British and US representatives (Gen. Macready,
Adcock) and elected president (Koehler) -- VI. ‘Agreement in India’: explanation of the
partition scheme worked out under arbitration of Mountbatten, with film of Mountbatten,
of Nehru, of Jinnah (and of the two together), and of Gandhi; illustrative maps -- VII.
Sport: a. Motorcycle racing in Scholten. b. US/European amateur boxing tournament.
Completeness: In addition to the missing story or section title noted in the
summary, this copy has one item missing according to the contents list held by the
Imperial War Museum Department of Film; this indicates that the missing story
concerned a passion play in the Ruhr.

142
Example 5: A silent newsreel

BRITISH CANADIAN PATHE NEWS. NO. 83A / L.E. Ouimet presents. -- CA : British
Canadian Pathe News [producer], 1919 ; CA : Specialty Film Ltd. [distributor],
1919.

Viewing copy: 1 reel of 1 (844 ft.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, si. / USW FEB 8303.
Dupe negative: 1 reel of 1 (844 ft.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, si. / USW FPE 3493.

British and American footage possibly used in newsreels produced by Pathe for
Great Britain and for the United States, per Public Archives of Canada/Dawson City file
notes.
Contents: London: Ilford Municipal Market proves great success (43 ft.) --
Yarmouth, Eng.: Happy hours by the sea (46 ft.) -- Lauzon, Que.: World’s largest
drydock (84 ft.) -- Toronto: Cycle racing at Exhibition Park (218 ft.) -- Kingston: [Geo.
Vernot, Canadian swimmer, demonstrates strokes] (140 ft.) -- Fresno, Cal.: [Staged train
wreck at fair] (69 ft.) -- Gary, Ind.: [Federal troops in big steel centers as result of recent
riots] (150 ft.) -- Getting together, an animated cartoon by Bert Green (65 ft.) -- A
Review of events in Great Britain: Yarmouth: Deutschland, German Navy ship, now
tourist attraction; London: “Pussyfoot” Johnson trying to make Britain “dry;” Doncaster:
horse racing; Manchester: statue of Abraham Lincoln unveiled, gift of the U.S. to
England’s great Cotton City (123 ft.).
Source of acquisition: Both copies received 1983-05-20 from LC film lab; copied
from nitrate on loan from the Public Archives of Canada.

Access points:

Subjects: 1. Markets -- England -- London. 2. London (England) -- Description. 3.

Seaside resorts -- England. 4. Yarmouth (Isle of Wight) -- Description. 5. Dry-
docks -- Canada. 6. Saint Henri (Quebec) -- Description. 7. Bicycle racing --
Canada. 8. Swimming -- Canada. 9. Strikes and lockouts -- Steel industry --
United States. 10. Prohibition -- England. 11. Horse-racing -- England. 12.
Doncaster (South Yorkshire) -- Description. 13. Lincoln, Abraham, 1809-1865 --
Statues. 14. Manchester (Greater Manchester) -- Description.
Genre: 1. Newsreels.
Added I. Ouimet, Leo, Ernest, 1877-1972. II. British Canadian Pathe News. III.
Entries: Specialty Film Import Ltd. IV. Public Archives of Canada/Dawson City
Collection (Library of Congress)

143
Example 6: A theatrical serial cataloged to a minimum level only∗

The HOPE DIAMOND MYSTERY. EPISODE 3, The FORGED NOTE / Director,

Stuart Paton. -- US : Kosmik Films, Inc. [producer], 1921 ; US : Howells Sales
Company [distributor], 1921.

Reference print: 2 reels of 2 on 1 (668 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., b&w, si. / USW FLA
1964.

∗
Note that these rules permit great flexibility in the levels of detail required for the creation of
cataloging records. Example 7 shows the same film title cataloged to a much fuller extent.

144
Example 7: A theatrical serial

The Hope Diamond mystery. Episode 3, The Forged note / director, Stuart Paton ;
story by May Yohe ; screen adaptation by Charles Goddard and John B. Clymer ;
photography, William Thornley ; cast, Grace Darmond, May Yohe, Captain C.
Clayton, Ethel Shannon, William Marion, William Buckley, Harry Carter, Frank
Seka, George Chesebro, Harry Archer, Carmen Phillips. -- US : Kosmik Films,
Inc. [producer], 1921 ; US : Howells Sales Company [distributor], 1921. --
Copyright: US : Kosmik Films, Inc.; 19Feb21; LP16151.

Reference print: 2 reels of 2 on 1 (668 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., b&w, si. / USW FLA
1964.
Dupe neg: 2 reels of 2 on 1 (668 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., b&w, si. / USW FRA 3554.
Archival positive: 2 reels of 2 on 1 (668 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., b&w, si. / USW FRA
3601.

Distributor, production and release dates from Moving Picture World, v. 49, p.
181.
Reviewed in: Moving Picture World, v. 49, pp. 114-115 & 181 ; Motion Picture
News, v. 23.2, pp. 1748-1749.
Summary: This fifteen-part serial drama follows the story of the Hope Diamond,
beginning in the sixteenth century, and shows the tragedies it brings to those who are
involved with it until it is returned to its rightful place in the breast of a Hindu idol
representing the goddess of love. In this episode, Dakar, Marcon’s Hindu servant,
discovers that his master is not dead. The diamond, which had been dropped in a mail
box, is returned to Lord Hale. Both Atherton and Dakar send Lord Hale forged notes
which state that Marcon no longer wishes to sell the diamond, and ask that Lord Hale
give it up. John and Mary go to the Hale mansion in search of their employer, Marcon.
The diamond is taken by Dakar.
Source of acquisition: All copies received ca. 1959 from USDA lab; they replace
35 mm. nitrate original material which was received 1947-03-27 as a purchase from the
George Kleine estate. Following copying, the nitrate was destroyed.

Access points:

Subjects: 1. Hope diamond -- Drama. 2. Idols and images -- Drama. 3. Gods,

Hindu -- Drama. 4. Hypnotism and crime -- Drama. 5. Incantations -- Drama. 6.
Avarice -- Drama. 7. India -- History -- 1500-1765 -- Drama.
Genres: 1. Serials. 2. Crime drama. 3. Mysteries.
Added I. Paton, Stuart, b. 1885, direction. II. Yohe, May, 1869-1938, writing,
Entries: cast. III. Goddard, Charles, 1879-1951, writing. IV. Clymer, John B., d. 1937,
writing. V. Thornley, William H., camera. VI. Darmond, Grace, 1898-1963,
cast. VII.

145
Example 7 (cont.)

Karloff, Boris, 1887-1969, cast. VIII. Clayton, C., cast. IX. Shannon, Ethel,
1898-1957, cast. X. Marion, William, 1878-1957, cast. XI. Buckley, William R.,
cast. XII. Carter, Harry, b. 1879, cast. XIII. Seka, Frank, cast. XIV. Chesebro,
George, 1888-1959, cast. XV. Archer, Harry, 1888-1960, cast. XVI. Phillips,
Carmen, b. 1895, cast. XVII. Kosmik Films. XVIII. Howells Sales Company.
XIX. Forged note. XX. Kleine (George) Collection (Library of Congress)

146
Example 8: A feature film

Berliner Ballade / Regie, Robert Adolf Stemmle ; Drehbuch, Günter Neumann. -- BRD :
Comedia [Produzent], 1948 ; BRD : Anton E. Dietz [Verleiher], 1948. -- (c):
BRD : Dr. B. Jakob. Zu Verleih: Norddeutscher Filmverleih, Adolf Bejöhr / Neue
Filmkunst / DED; zusatzlich Bundesarchiv (Neg. + Pos.).

Archivkopie: 5 Akte von 5 (2496 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., S/W, Ton / DED 10600.
Komb.Dup-Neg.: 10 Rollen von 10 (2496 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., S/W, Ton / DED
11138.

Spielfilm.
Stab: Kamera, Georg Krause ; Musik, Werner Eisbrenner, Günter Neumann ;
Bauten, Gabriel Pellon.
Darsteller: Gert Fröbe (Otto Normalverbraucher), Aribert Wäscher (Anton
Zeithammer), Tatjana Sais (Ida Holle).
Genre: Kabarettistische Satire.
Inhalt: Leben und Wiederaufbau in Berlin nach dem II.Weltkrieg.
Dokumentationsmaterial: Drehbuch befindet sich im DED.
Literaturhinweis: Filmforum, Nr. 8/1951; P. Pleyer. Der deutsche
Nachkriegsfilm. Münster, 1965.
Auszeichnungen: Venedig 1949 Sonderpreis.
Freigabe [Zensur]: All.Mil.Z. Dez.48 ; FSK: 1.9.53/30.8.55 (2499 m.); 16 Jh; nff.
Uraufführung: West-Berlin 31.12.48.

147
Example 9: An incomplete sound feature

L’ASSEDIO DELL’ ALCAZAR / director, Augusto Genina. -- IT : [s.n., 1939?].

Viewing print: 4 reels of ? (r2-3, 7, 9) (3378 ft.) ; 35 mm. : N., b&w, sd. / GBI
COI 24:P 1:N:35.

Summary: Four reels only of the Italian feature based on the defense by Franco-
supporters of the Alcazar fortress in Toledo against besieging Republican forces in the
Spanish Civil War. The reels held show: R2. News reaches Toledo of Franco’s mutiny;
as workers demonstrate in the street, the garrison opts for Franco; the Minister of War
issues an ultimatum; women and children shelter in the fortress cellars. R 3. The attack
starts: aerial bombing and an undisciplined charge. Hard-pressed outposts hold out (one
steals the Republican battlecry ‘No pasaran’). Preparations are made for siege in the
fortress itself (boys grained in rifle use). R7. A priest is admitted to the garrison,
celebrates Mass, administers Last Rites and performs a death-bed wedding. R9. A
determined Republican assault; grave supply situation; an officer prepares in disguise to
penetrate the besiegers’ lines.

148
Example 10: A silent feature

DORNRÖSCHEN / Regie, Paul Leni ; Titel, Rudolf Presber ; Drehbuch, Paul Leni. --
Deutschland : Universum Verleiher, 1917. -- (C) : BRD : Friedrich Wilhelm
Murnau-Stiftung. zu Verleigh: DED nichtkommerziell.

Archivkopie: 4 Rollen von 4 (1328 m.) ; 35 mm. : N., viragiert, stumm / DED
20143.
Bild-Dup-Neg.: 4 Rollen von 4 (521 m.) ; 16 mm. : S., sw, stumm / DED 1168 a.
Bild-Dup-Neg.: 4 Rollen von 4 (1328 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., F., stumm / DED 1168.
Verleihkopie: 2 Rollen von 2 (1328 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., F., stumm / DED 10756.

Spielfilm.
Stab: Kamera, Paul Leni ; Bauten, Paul Leni.
Darsteller: Harry Liedtke (Prinz), Mabel Kaul (Dornröschen), Käthe Dorsch
(Königin), Paul Biensfeldt (König), Victor Janson (Hofmarschall).
Genre: Märchenfilm
Inhalt: Durch den Fluch einer bösen Hexe fällt die Prinzessin Dornröschen in
einen todesähnlichen Schlaf und mit ihr alle Bewohner des Schlosses. Ein mutiger Prinz
bricht den Bann und befreit Dornröschen.

149
Example 11: A piece of record footage

[RECORD. A700 SERIES NO. 30/2, D-DAY LANDING OF ROYAL MARINE

COMMANDOS ON ‘QUEEN RED’ BEACH AT LA BRECHE] / cameraman,
Sergeant Ian Grant. -- GB : Army Film and Photographic Unit [producer], 1944-
06-06. -- (c): GB : Crown Copyright.

Archival positive: 1 reel of 1 (90 ft.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, si. / GBI A70 30-02:F
1:A:35.
Original negative: 1 reel of 1 (90 ft.) ; 35 mm. : N., b&w, si. / GBI A70 30-02:N
1:A:35.
Duplicate negative: 1 reel of 1 (90 ft.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, si. / GBI A70 30-02:D
1:A:35.
Viewing print: 1 reel of 1 (90 ft.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&w, si. / GBI A70 30-02:P
1:A:35.

Sources for credits: Camera credit from dope sheet.

Physical description: Material of each generation is held on single reels with
other A70 30 sub-numbers.
Summary: Cameraman pans over the blackened faces of troops belonging to No.
45 (Royal Marine) Commando and two naval gunners behind their starboard Oerlikon
cannon as their Landing Craft Infantry (Small) steams towards ‘Sword’ Beach. In
compliance with Lord Lovat’s orders, all commandos wear berets rather than helmets.
An LCT explodes in a ball of flame as it and other invasion craft approach ‘Queen Red’
Beach at La Breche which is dotted with vehicles making for a beach exit. Sgt. Grant’s
own craft discharges its complement of commandos alongside a burning 22nd Dragoons
flail tank and two knocked-out 13/18th Hussars amphibious tanks. Commandos have
difficulty in getting ashore from an LCI(S), whose boarding ramps are askew, before they
make for the beach exit where a 5th Assault Regiment RE AVRE has laid its bridge over
the sea wall. From the top of the beach, the cameraman pans over commandos heading
inland through the exit marked by a windsock, seen here being erected by an engineer.
Sappers and other members of the Beach Party are seen at work. Lining the water’s edge
are several LCI(S)s slowly coming afloat as the tide rises.
Related materials: Still photographs reference BU 5700-5703 taken by Captain
Evans, AFPU, in Imperial War Museum Department of Photographs.
Cataloguer opinion: Excellent shots of wary, tense commandos. The run-in to
the beach is very spectacular and there are exceptionally clear shots of troops landing,
and of the wrecked vehicles scattered along the water’s edge. (PJB)

150
Example 12: An animated short

O skleniku víc / rezisér, Bretislav Pojar ; námet, Alois Mecera ; scénár, Jirí Brdecka a
Bretislav Pojar ; hudba, Jan Rychlík ; vytvarník, Jirí Trnka. -- CS : Studio
loutkového filmu Praha [vyrobce], 1953 ; CS : Ústrední Pujcovna filmo Praha
[distributor], 1954. -- Copyright na filmu: CS : Studio loutkového filmu Praha ;
1953.

Archivní kopie: 2 díly ze 2 (548 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., bar., zvuk / CS 1134.
Duplikacní kopie: 2 díly ze 2 (510 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., bar., zvuk / CS 6917.
Duplikátní negativ obrazu: 1 díl z 1 (548 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., bar., nemy / CS 8346.
Duplikátní negativ zvuku: 1 díl z 1 (548 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., cb. / CS 8346.

Loutkovy film.
Animace: Zdenek Hrabe, Jan Karpas, Josef Kluge, Stanislav Látal.
Obsah: Po silnici jede mlady motocyklista. Jede rychle, ale stroj kokonale
ovládá. Pri jízde dodrzuje dopravní predpisy. Zastaví pred zájezdním hostincem a porucí
si limonádu. Z vedlejsí místnosti zní hudba. Hostinsky vdává dceru. Svatebcané objeví
motocyklistu u sklenky limonády a vybízejí ho k prípitku na zdraví novomanzelu.
Motocyklista se zdráhá, ale nakonec neodolá. Znovu se zdráhá a znovu neodolá...
Novomanzelé se mezitím vytratili a svatebcané je hledají. Motocyklista osamel.
Vzpomíná na svou dívku, za níz jede a predstavuje si, jaké to bude, az budou spolu
phromade. Porucí si jeste jednu sklenicku, zaplatí a dává se znovu na cestu. Protoze má
náladu, krouzí nejdríve po silnici, pak závodí s automobilem a pozdeji s rychlíkem. Na
prejezdu je jen o zlomek vteriny dríve nez supící lokomotiva. V zatácce pred mestem
motocykl dostal smyk a ridic se rítí do jisté záhuby...
Ceny: Cena za nejlepsí loutkovy film, Cannes, 1954.

151
Example 13: An animated feataure

Sen noci svatojanské / rezisér, scénár a vytvarník, Jirí Trnka ; hudba, Václav Trojan. --
CS : Studio loutkového a kreslleného filmu Praha [vyrobce], 1959 ; CS : Ústrední
pujcovna filmu Praha [ditributor], 1959.

Archivní kopie: 5 dílu z 5ti (2 050,0 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., bar., svuk / CS 8091.
Originální negativ obrazu: 9 dílu z 9ti (2 050,0 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., bar., nemy / CS
1192.
Originálni negativ zvuku: 9 dílu z 9ti (2 050,0 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., cb. / CS 1192.
Duplikátní negativ obrazu: 5 dílu z 5ti (2 050,0 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., bar., nemy / CS
2486.
Duplikátní negativ zvuku: a5 dílu z 5ti (2 050,0 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., cb. / CS 2486.
Duplikacní kopie: 5 dílu z 5ti (2 050,0 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., bar., zvuk / CS 1638.

Loutkovy film.
Podle hry William Shakespeara Sen noci svatojanské.
Komentár: Josef Kainar.
Mluví: Rudolf Pellar.
Spolupráce na scénári: Jirí Brdecka.
Choreografie: Ladislav Fialka.
Poradce: Bretislav Hodek.
Animace: Jan Adam, Vlasta Jurajdová, Jan Karpas, Stanislav Látal, Bretislav
Pojar, Bohuslav Srámek.
Obsah: Aténské krasavici Hermii se dvorí dva mladí soci: Lysandr a Demetrius.
Hermie miluje Lysandra, ale její otec si preje za zete Demetria. Nestastná Hermie prchá
z domova s Lysandrem. V této dob e se chystá slavná svatba vévody Thesea s
amazonkou Hyppolitou. Vsichni poddaní pripravují bohaty porad radovánek. Skupina
remeslníku chce prekvapit dvur hrou o Pyramovi a Thisbé. V dílne nemají ke zkousce
klid a proto odcházejí do lesa. Je pozdní vecer, prichází kouzelná noc svatojanská. Les
je oziven tisíci tvory. Dovádivy skrítek Puk, ktery má moc se promenovat v jakéhokoliv
tvora, dnes sehraje tem, které cesta privede do lesa, prapodivné kousky. Vládce lesa
Oberon, aby si získal lásku královny víl Titanie, posle Puka pro carovny kvítek. Kdyz
jím potres oci spáce, na koho po probuzení popatrí, k tomu zahorí láskou. Do lesa
prichází Lysandr s Hermií. Za nimi se plízí Demetrius, jsa tajne sledován Helenou, která
ho marne miluje. Puk se vrací s kouzelnym kvítkem. Oberon, ktery zná strasti milencu,
chce pomoci Helene vzbudit Demetriovu lásku. Avsak nez se tak stane dojde k nekolika
omylum. Najednou Helenu miluje Lysandr i Demetrius, Hermie je obema zavrzena, az si
konecne Lysandr s Hermií a Demetrius s Helenou spocinou v nárucí. Zatím uz je Titanie
také ocarována. Prvního spatrila Klubka, malého remeslnícka, kterému Puk pricaroval
oslí

152
(cont.)

hlavu. Ta vsak Titanii nevadí. Nakonec se Oberon nad ní smiluje; dost ji mytrestal za její
chaldnost. Pretre oci Titanie kouzelnym kvítkem a ta rázem zapomene na lásku k usatci.
Pak Puk vezme na milost Klubka. Kouzelná noc svatojanská koncí, nebe se barví jitrním
úsvitem. Oberon s Titanií, provázeni Pukem, letí k blednoucí obloze. Pod rozlozitym
dubem spí dve dvojice milencu. Kdyz Hermiin otec spatrí spící stastnou dceru, svolí k
její svatbe s Lysandrem. A tak se na aténském dvore slaví trti hlucné svatby. Podívaná
strídá jedna druhou, az se panstvo zacne nudit. Ted prisla pravá chvíle pro remeslníky.
Svou hrou dojmou diváky. Je opet noc, vsichni spí. Objevuje se Puk a symbolickym
kostetem smetá vse lzivé a vencí Klubkovy skráne vavrínovym vencem. Prichází Oberon
a Titanie se svym Koncí pribeh, ktery “kusem nebyl, byl to sen.”
Ceny: Grand Prix (Supreme Technical Commission), Cannes, 1959.
Poznámka: První celovecerní loutkovy film natoceny systémem Cinemascope.

153
Example 14: An experimental film

Piquez sur la ligne brisée / réalisatrice, France Renaud ; caméra, Mario Darveau, Anne
De Guise ; son, Guy Bellavance ; montage, France Renaud, Anne De Guise. --
CA : Université du Québec à Montréal [société de production], 1976 ; CA : Les
Films du Crépuscule [distributeur], 1976.

Copie de projection: 1 bobine sur l (148 m.) ; 16 mm. : S., n&b, son / CAQ
9131/1.
Contre type négatif: 1 bobine sur 1 (148 m.) ; 16 mm. : S., n&b, son / CAQ
9131/1.

Résumé: Un film expérimental dans lequel on voit des ouvrières dans une
manufacture de textile, le travail répétitif, le rythme des gestes, l’asservissement de l’oeil
et de l’oreille à la machine. Image et son vinnent en contrepoint d’un discours du Dr.
Gendron sur le rôle sexuel de la femme généreuse et soumise.

154
Two versions (original and major change) and a remake of a theatrical feature

Example 15 - 1931 German version

Die Dreigroschenoper / Regie, G.W. Pabst ; Drehbuch, Leo Lania, Béla Balázs,
Ladislaus Vajda. -- Deutsche Version. -- DE : Tobis, Berlin [Produzent], 1930 ;
US : Warner Bros. Pictures [Co-Produzent], 1930 ; DE : National-Film Verleigh
und Vertriebs AG. [Verleiher], 1931 ; US : Warner Bros. [Verleiher], 1931.

Archivkopie: 12 Rollen von 12 (3074 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., sw, Ton / DDS SP00001.
Original-Negativ: 11B/12T von je 12 (R1-10, 12B) (2810B/3074T m.) ; 35 mm. :
N., sw, Ton / DDS 50006.
Dup.-Negativ: 12B/12T von je 12 (je 3074 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., sw, Ton / DDS
SN00020.
Verleihkopie: 12R von 12 auf 6 Akte (3074 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., sw, Ton / DDS
VL0004.
Videokopie (VHS): 1 Kassette (100 min.) ; 1/2 in. : sw, Ton / DDS VK0023.

Spielfilm.
Stab: Kamera, Fritz Arno Wagner ; Musik, Kurt Weill, Theo Mackeben ; Bauten,
Andrej Andrejew ; Ton, Adolf Jansen ; Tonmontage, Hans Oser.
Darsteller: Rudolf Forster (Mackie Messer), Carola Neher (Polly), Reinhold
Schünzel (Tiger-Brown), Fritz Rasp (Peachum), Valeska Gert (Frau Peachum), Lotte
Lenja (Jenny).
Literarische Vorlage: Gleichnamiges Theaterstück von Bertolt Brecht ; Song-
Musik, Kurt Weill.
Sprachfassung: Deutscher Vorspann und deutscher Dialog.
Genres: Literaturverfilmung ; Musikalisch-satirische Komödie.
Inhalt: Der berühmte Bandit Mackie Messer hat Polly, die Tochter des
Bettlerkönigs Peachum geheiratet. Da der Vater mit der Wahl seiner Tochter aus
Geschäftsgründen nicht einverstanden ist, fordert er vom Polizeichef Tiger-Brown, dass
Mackie wegen seiner zahllosen Verbrechen gehängt wird. Peachum droht, mit seiner
Bettlerschar den morgigen Krönungszug zu stören. Dem Polizeichef, den gemeinsam
verbrachte Kriegsjahre fest mit Mackie verbinden, bleibt nichts anderes übrig, als seinem
Freund zur Flucht zu raten. Im Freudenhaus wird Mackie durch einen von Peachums
Frau vorbereiteten Verrat der Polizei in die Hände gespielt. Aber Jenny, die ihn zunächst
ausgeliefert hat, verhilft ihm zuch zur Flucht aus dem Gefängnis. Polly hat unterdessen
mit dem Geld der weitverzweigten Mackie-Messer-Bande eine Bank errichtet und so den
Übergang zum bürgerlichen Beruf vollzogen. Alles ist nun legalisiert. Mackie, der in
Ungnade gefallene Polizeichef und Peachum vollzeihen gemeinsame Geschäfte.

155
(cont.)

Version: Der Film wurde in einer deutschen und einer französischen Version
(Titel: L’Opéra de quat’sous) hergestellt. Das Archiv besitzt beide Versionen.
Zensur: Die Filmprüfstelle hat “Die Dreigroschenoper” am 10.8.33 wieder
verboten.

Example 16 - 1931 French version

L’Opera de quat’sous / Regie, G.W. Pabst ; Drehbuch, Leo Lania, Béla Balázs,
Ladislaus Vajda. -- Französische Version. -- DE : Tobis, Berlin [Produzent], 1930
; US : Warner Bros. Pictures [Co-produzent], 1930 ; DE : National-Film Verleih
und Vertriebs AG. [Verleiher], 1931.

Archivkopie: 9 Rollen von ? (2537 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., sw, Ton / DDS SP00006.
Dup-Negativ: 9B/9T von ? (je 2544 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., sw, Ton / DDS SN00045.
Verleihkopie: 9R von ? auf 5 akte (2544 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., sw, Ton / DDS
VL0010.

Spielfilm.
Stab: Kamera, Fritz Arno Wagner ; Musik, Kurt Weill, Theo Mackeben ; Bauten,
Andrej Andrejew; Ton, Adolf Jansen.
Darsteller: Albert Préjean (Mackie Messer), Florelle (Polly), Margo Lion
(Jenny), Gaston Modot, Jacques Henley.
Literarische Vorlage: Theaterstück von Bertolt Brecht ; Song-Musik, Kurt Weill.
Sprachfassung: Französischer Vorspann und Dialog, Songs Deutsch mit
französischen Untertiteln.
Genres: Literaturverfilmung; Musikalisch-satirische Komödie.
Inhalt: s. Die Dreigroschenoper. -- Deutsche Version.
Version: Der Film wurde in einer deutschen und einer französischen Version
hergestellt. Das Archiv besitzt beide Versionen.
Zensur: Die Filmprüfstelle hat den Film am 10.8.33 wieder verboten.

156
(cont.)

Example 17 - 1963 Remake

Die Dreigroschenoper = L’Opéra de quat’sous / Regie, Wolfgang Staudte ; Drehbuch,

Wolfgang Staudte, Günther Weisenborn. -- BRD : Kurt Ulrich [Produzent], 1962 ;
FR : C.E.C. [Co-Produzent], 1962 ; BRD : Gloria [Verleiher], 1963.

Archivkopie: 6 von 6 Akten (3344 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., col., Ton / DDS CSP00019.

Spielfilm.
Stab: Kamera, Roger Fellous ; Musik, Peter Sandloff.
Darsteller: Curd Jürgens (Macheath), June Ritchie (Polly), Gert Fröbe
(Peachum), Hilde Hildebrandt (Seine Frau), Hildegard Knef (Spelunken-Jenny), Lino
Vertura (Brown), Sammy Davis, Jr. (Moritatensänger).
Literarische Vorlage: Gleichnamiges Theaterstück von Bertolt Brecht ; Song-
Musik, Kurt Weill ; Widerverfilmung der 1930 von G.W. Pabst realisierten deutschen
und französischen Versionen.
Sprachfassung: Deutscher Vorspann und Dialog.
Genres: Literaturverfilmung ; Musikalisch-satirische Komödie.
Inhalt: s. Die Dreigroschenoper 1930.
Verleih: Der Film wurde in der DDR vom Progress-Filmvertrieb übernommen
(Einsatz 21.4.1964).
Lizenz: Die Rechte für die DDR sind abgelaufen, das Filmarchiv darf eine
Archivkopie aufbewahren.
Dokumentationsmaterial: Plakat, Fotos, Werbematerialien.
Literaturhinweise: Lexicon der Filme 1962 - 1964, S. 39.

157
Example 18: A sound feature

Vesnicko má stredisková / rezisér, Jirí Menzel ; námet a scénár, Zdenek Sverák ;

kameraman, Jaromír Sofr ; hudba, Jirí Sust ; architekt, Zbynek Hloch ; strihac, Jirí
Brozek. -- CS : Filmové studio Barrandov [vyrobce], 1985 ; CS : Ústrední
pujcovna filmu Praha [distributor], 1986. -- Copyright na filmu: CS : Filmové
studio Barrandov, 1985.

Archivní kopie: 5 dílu z 5ti (2 802,0 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., bar., zvuk / CS 1668.
Originální negativ obrazu: 5 dílu z 5ti (2 802,0 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., bar., nemy / CS
4988.
Origanální negative zvuku: 5 dílu z 5ti (2 802,0 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., cb. / CS 4988.
Duplikacní kopie: 5 dílu z 5ti (2 802,0 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., bar., zvuk / CS 18 248.

Hrany film.
Hrají: János Bán (Otík Rákosník, závozník), Marián Labuda (Karel Pávek, ridic
nákladáku v zemedelském druzstvu), Rudolf Hrusínsky (lékar Dr. Skruzny), Petr Cepek
(Turek, ridic v druzstvu), Libuse Safránková (jeho zena Jana), Jan Hartl (zootechnik
Vasek Kaspar), Miloslav Stibich (predseda druzstva Kalina), Oldrich Vlach (rostlinár
Kunc), Rudolf Hrusínsky mladsí (mechanik Drápalík), Stanlislav Aubrecht (stredoskolák
Kája Pávek), Zdenek Sverák (Evzen Ryba, akademicky malír), Marie Sebestová (ucitelka
Vera Kousalová), Július Satinsky (pilot Stefan), Josef Somr (reditel Kovodreva),
Frantisek Vlácil (deda Tichácek), Milena Dvorská (Pávková), Milada Jezková
(Hrabetová, Otíkova sousedka), Ladislav Zupanic (chalupár Rumlena, námestek v
podniku Kovodrevo), Jitka Asterová (jeho zena), Jirí Lír (hostinsky Rambousek), Blanka
Lormanová (Pulpánová), Eugen Jegorov (Broz), Jirí Schmitzer (Tlamicha), Vera Vlková
(bábi Pávková), Jana Vanková (Kalinová), Bohumila Myslíková (Filaková).
Obsah: Komedie s hadhledem zobrazující zivot malé ceské vesnice.

158
Example 19: A sound feature

BELLE DE JOUR / réalisateur, Luis Buñuel ; produit par Robert et Raymond Hakim ;
adaptation et dialogue, Luis Buñuel et Jean-Claude Carriere. -- FR : Paris Film
Production, 1966 ; IT : Five Film, Rome [société de production], 1966 ; FR :
Valoria [distributeur], 1967.

Copie de projection: 11 bobines sur 11 (2853 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., coul., son / CAQ
C6069/11.

D’après le roman de Joseph Kessel.

Générique: directeur de la phtographie, Sacha Vierny ; décors, Robert Clavel ;
directeur de la production, Henri Baum ; l’assistant mise en scène, Pierre Lary ; chef
monteuse, Louisette Hautecoeur ; cameraman, Philippe Brun ; ingénieur du son, René
Longuet ; ensemblier, Maurice Barnathan. Les assistants: mise en scène, Pierre Li ;
deuxième assistant, Lionel Legros ; montage, Walter Spohr ; son, Pierre Davoust ; régie
générale, Marc Goldstaub ; script girl, Suzanne Durrenberger ; costumière, Hélène
Nourry ; chef-maquilleuse, Janine Jarreau ; coiffure, Simone Knapp ; photographe,
Raymond Voinquel ; accessoiriste, Pierre Roudeix ; secrétaire, Jacqueline Delhomme ;
administrateur, Robert Demolliere ; Catherine Deneuve est habillée par Yves Saint
Laurent.
Interprétation: Catherine Deneuve (Séverine), Jean Sorel (Pierre), Michel Piccoli
(Husson), Geneviève Page (Anaïs), Francisco Rabal (Hyppolite), Pierre Clementi
(Marcel), Françoise Fabian (Charlotte), Macha Meril (Renée), Francis Blanche, Georges
Marchal, Muni, Maria Latour, Claude Cerval, Michel Charrel, Iska Khan, Bernard
Musson, Marcel Charvey, François Maistre.
Résumé: Drame surréaliste dans lequel la très belle épouse d’un jeune médecin
mène une double vie en evenant une prostitutée durant la journée. L’intrigue est
developpée au travers d’un scénario mélant presque indistinctement réalité, rève et
fantaisie.
Prix: Le Lion d’or, Festival de Venise 1967.

159
Example 20: A documentary short

Príbeh staré reky / námet, scénár a rezie, Jirí Lehovec ; kameraman, Jirí Bronec ; strih,
Miloslav Hájek. -- CS : Filmové studio Barrandov [vyrobce], 1957 ; CS : Ústrední
pujcovna filmu Praha [distributor], 1957. -- Copyright na filmu: CS : Filmové
studio Barrandov, 1957.

Archivní kopie: 2 díly ze 2 (925 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., bar., zvuk / CS 8060.
Originální negativ obrazu: 4 díly ze 4 (925 m.) ; 35 mm. : N., bar., nemy / CS
4309.
Originální negativ zvuku: 4 díly ze 4 (925 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., cb. / CS 4309.

Documentární film.
Obsah: Poema o rece Vltave a stavbe Slapské prehrady, která pohrbila
nejnebezpecnejsí, ale i negkrásnejsí místa reky - Svatojanské proudy.

160
Example 21: A feature film

[In Cyrillic]

161
Example 22: A documentary short

[In Cyrillic]

162
Example 23: An international co-production

O Beijo da mulher aranha = Kiss of the spider woman / director, Hector Babenco ;
producer, David Weisman ; screenplay, Leonard Schrader. -- BR : HB Filmes
[producer], 1895 ; US : Sugarloaf Films [producer], 1985 ; US : Island Alive
[distributor], 1985. -- Copyright: US : Island Alive. DCR 1985; PUB 26Jul86;
REG 4Mar85; PA 293-687.

Viewing print: 14 reels of 14 on 7 (10876 ft.) ; 35 mm. : S., col., sd. / USW CGA
2157-2163.

Based on the novel, El beso de la mujer araña by Manuel Puig.

Credits: Executive producer, Francisco Ramalho, Jr. ; director of photography,
Radolfo Sanchez ; editor, Mauro Alice ; music, John Neschling in association with
Nando Carneiro ; production design, Clovis Bueno; art director, Felipe Crescente ;
costume design, Patricio Bisso ; assistant director, Amilcar Moneira ; second unit camera,
Lucio Kodato.
Cast: William Hurt (Luis Molina), Raul Julia (Valentin Arregui), Sonia Braga
(Leni Lamaison/Marta/spider woman), José Lewgoy (warden), Nuno Leal Maia
(Gabriel), Miriam Pires (mother), Antonio Petrim (clubfoot), Denise Dumont (Michelle),
Milton Gonçalves (Pedro), Fernando Torres (Americo), Patricio Bisso (Gréta), Herson
Capri (Werner), Nildo Parente (butler/resistance leader).
Reviews: Variety, 1985-05-15. New York Times, 1985-07-26.
Summary: Molina, a homosexual window-trimmer convicted on a morals charge,
shares a dreary prison cell with Valentin, a clandestinely-held politically active journalist
who has been endlessly tortured by prison authorities in a vain attempt to extract
information about his activities. Both men could not be farther apart in personal
attitudes, lifestyles, and emotional makeup: Molina is a glib raconteur, who dwells in a
fantasy world of glamorous movies from yesteryear, of romantic screen heroes and tragic
heroines. Valentin is a self-disciplined intellectual who is devoted to the cause of human
rights and his political concerns. Each night in the darkness of their cell, Molina spins a
fantastic yarn of celluloid romance and intrigue, a Nazi propaganda film he once saw,
involving the unlikely love affair between a ravishing French chanteuse caught up in the
Resistance, with the handsome chief of German counter-intelligence for Occupied
France. At first, Valentin is repelled by Molina and his tale. Their relationship is like a
constant sparring match between two radically different but equally desperate human
beings trying to maintain their identities under terribly confining and numbing conditions.
Gradually, they come to understand each other and to form a bond of friendship, fraternal
love, and self-sacrifice.

163
(cont.)

Source of acquisition: Received on 1987-04-20 as a copyright deposit.

Access points:

Subjects: 1. Prisoners -- Drama. 2. Interpersonal relations -- Drama. 3.

Homosexuality, Male -- Drama. 4. Political prisoners -- Drama. 5. Torture --
Drama.
Genres: 1. Drama. 2. Features.
Added I. Babenco, Hector, direction. II. Weisman, David, production. III.
Entries: Schrader, Leonard, writing. IV. Hurt, William, cast. V. Julia, Raul, cast. VI.
Braga, Sonia, 1951- , cast. VII. Puig, Manuel. Beso de la mujer araña. VIII. HB
Filmes. IX. Sugarloaf Films. X. Island Alive, Inc. XI. Copyright Collection
(Library of Congress). XII. Beijo da mulher aranha.

164
Example 24: A compilation of television commercials

The Classics of political television advertising / produced and written by David Beiler.
-- US : Campaigns and Elections, Inc. [producer & distributor], 1986. --
Copyright: US : Notice on film: Campaigns and Elections, Inc., 1986.

Video viewing copy: 1 cassette of 1 (ca. 60 min.) ; 3/4 in. : col. & b&w, sd. /
USW VBE 4511.
Video master: 1 reel of 1 (ca. 60 min.) ; 1 in. : col. & b&w, sd. / USW VTA
0543.

Credits: Executive producer, Elisabeth L. Strasburg ; editor, Jayne Lukas.

Host: Eugene McCarthy.
From accompanying documentation, “Campaigns and Elections, Inc., The Journal
of Political Action, presents.”
Summary: A documentary comprising a selected group of 78 political
commercials, culled from 1200 and grouped by type, representing a variety of campaigns
and 36 years of television broadcasting, from 1952 to 1985. Spots of 1 minute and less
are presented intact; spots originally longer are edited for this presentation. Includes 18
1-minute spots, 51 shorter spots, and 9 others.
Source of acquisition: Master copy received: 1987-01-02 as a gift from
Campaigns and Elections, Inc. Viewing copy made from master at LC video lab.
This compilation is more fully described in Classics of political television
advertising: a viewer’s guide / by David Beiler. -- Washington, D.C. : Campaigns and
Elections, Inc., 1987.

Access points:

Subjects: 1. Advertising, political. 2. Television in politics.

Genre: 1. Political spots.
Added I. Beiler, David, 1953- , production, writing. II. Strasburg, Elisabeth L.,
Entries: production. III. Lukas, Jayne, editing. IV. McCarthy, Eugene J., 1916- , host. V.
Campaigns and Elections, Inc. VI. Campaigns and Elections, Inc. Collection
(Library of Congress)

165
Example 25: A television cultural anthology series

Omnibus. I, vol. 2 / executive producer, Robert Saudek; producer, William Spier ;

director, Andrew McCullough. -- US : TV-Radio Workshop of the Ford
Foundation [producer], 1952 ; US : CBS Television Network [broadcaster], 1952-
11-16.

Video viewing copy: 2 cassettes of 2 (90 min.) ; 3/4 in. : b&w, sd. / USW VBD
5858-5859, copy 1.
Video viewing copy: 2 cassettes of 2 (90 min.) ; 3/4 in. : b&w, sd. / USW VBD
9562-9563, copy 2.
Video master: 1 reel of 1 (90 min.) ; 1 in. : b&w, sd. / USW VCA 0301.

Season number, volume number, production date and telecast date from
production papers.
Executive producer credit from Mary Ahern, USW staff, 1986-11.
Credits: Production associate, Paul Feigay ; production designer, Henry May.
Host: Alistair Cooke.
Contents: Mr. Lincoln, the end and the beginning / director, Norman Lloyd ;
writer, James Agee ; producer, Richard de Rochemont ; cast, Royal Dano, Richard Purdy
; narrator, Martin Gabel (27 min.) -- Dog / director, Judd Whiting (7 min.) -- Lonely
hearts / director, Jean Benoit-Levy ; performers, Denise Bourgeois, Gerard Ohn (11 min.)
-- Plastics / produced by Princeton Film Center, Inc. (7 min.) -- The Telephone / librettist
and composer, Gian Carlo Menotti ; cast, Edith Gordon, Andrew Gainey (15 min.) --
Leonardo da Vinci / produced by Leonid Kipnis and Herman Starr for Pictura Films (12
min.)
Summary: An episode of the television cultural anthology series consisting of 6
segments of varying lengths. The first, fourth, and last segments are films.
Includes commercials for Aero Willys.
Source of acquisition: viewing copy (copy 1) and master received 1985-09-20
from LC video lab; viewing copy (copy 2) received 1986-05-07 from LC video lab; gift,
copied from material on loan from Wesleyan University.

Access points:

Subjects: 1. Lincoln, Abraham, 1809-1865, in fiction, drama, poetry, etc. 2.

Leonardo, da Vinci, 1452-1519. 3. Dogs -- Training. 4. Courtship -- Drama. 5.
Plastics. 6. Marriage proposals -- Drama.
Genres: 1. Television series. 2. Compilations. 3. Anthologies. 4.
Educational/cultural works. 5. Ballets. 6. Operas.
Added I. Saudek, Robert, 1911- , host. II. Spier, William, d. 1973, production.
entries: III. McCullough, Andrew, direction. IV. Cooke, Alistair, 1908- , host. V. Lloyd,
Norman, 1914- , direction. VI. Agee, James, 1909-1955, writing. VII. De
Rochemont, Richard,

166
(cont.)

production. VIII. Dano, Royal, cast. IX. Whiting, Judd, direction. X. Benoit-
Levy, Jean, 1888-1959, direction. XI. Bourgeois, Denise, performer. XII. Ohn,
Gerard, performer. XIII. Menotti, Gian Carlo, 1911- . Telephone. XIV. Ford
Foundation. TV-Radio Workshop. XV. CBS Television Network. XVI.
Princeton Film Center. XVII. Pictura Films. XVIII. Mr. Lincoln, the end and the
beginning. XIX. The Telephone. XX. Leonardo de Vinci. XXI. Wesleyan
University Collection (Library of Congress)

167
Example 26: A theatrical trailer

WALL STREET : [TRAILER]. -- US : Twentieth Century-Fox [distributor], 1987.

Viewing print: 1 reel of 1 (96 ft.) ; 35 mm. : S., col., sd. / USW CGA 6695.

This trailer is the second of two trailers appearing at the head of reel one for the
feature film, THE PRINCESS BRIDE.
Cast: Michael Douglas, Charlie Sheen.
Summary: A trailer for the feature film WALL STREET, which includes a short
sequence featuring Michael Douglas and Charlie Sheen.
Source of acquisition: Received: 1988-04-52 as a copyright deposit.

Access points:

Genre: 1. Trailers and promos.

Added I. Douglas, Michael, 1945- , cast. II. Sheen, Charlie, cast. III. Twentieth
Entries: Century-Fox Film Corporation. IV. Copyright Collection (Library of Congress)

168
Example 27: An unidentified silent film

[UNIDENTIFIED KLEINE. NO. 2, PERIOD DRAMA]. -- IT : Ambrosio [producer?],

[191-?].

Viewing print: 1 reel of ? (163 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., b&w, si. / USW FLA 1721.
Dupe neg: 1 reel of ? (163 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., b&w, si. / USW FRA 4296.

All titles and many scenes lacking; name of possible producer handwritten on
leader of original nitrate acquisition.
Summary: Miscellaneous segments of a period drama in which a priestly-looking
man wearing a Byzantine design pectoral cross over his robe and a large ring on his index
finger enters a formal salon and speaks with dramatic gestures, then sits down and opens
a book; no other people are visible in the room. In another room, three men with curled
wigs, ruffled shirts, knee breeches, and tri-cornered hats confer around a table. They exit,
and a well-dressed woman enters, is seated and fastidiously cared for by the butler. One
of the men from the former group returns and appears to plan an intrigue with the
woman. This scene repeats itself immediately. The man then incites a quarrel with
another man.
Source of acquisition: Both copies received ca. 1959 from USDA lab; they
replace 35mm. nitrate original material which was received 1947-03-27 as a purchase
from the George Kleine estate. Following copying, the nitrate was destroyed.

Access points:

Subjects: 1. Conspiracies. 2. Priests.

Genres: 1. Historical re-creations. 2. Unedited footage.
Added
Entries: I. Ambrosio (Firm). 2. Kleine (George) Collection (Library of Congress)

169
Example 28: A television news broadcast

CBS NEWS. 1987-06-15. EVENING. -- US : CBS News [producer], 1987 ; US : CBS

Television Network, 1987-06-15. -- Copyright: US : CBS, Inc. DCR 1987; PUB
15Jun87; REG 10Jul87.

Viewing copy: 1 videocassette of 1 (30 min.) ; 3/4 in. : col., sd. / USW VBE
8575.

Includes commercials for Kellogg’s Nut & Honey Crunch, Isuzu, Citrucel,
Cepacol, Post Grape-Nuts, Benjamin Moore Paints, Subaru, Total Cereal, Anacin, and
Fleischman’s Margarine.
Anchor: Dan Rather.
Reporters: Bill Plante, Robert Schakne, Bob Faw, Richard Wagner, Victoria
Corderi, Jerry Bowen, Martha Teichner, Bob McNamara.
Contents: Review of Reagan television address (2 min.) -- Goetz trial (1/2 min.) -
- Supreme Court decision on victims’ rights (7 min.) -- Anti-government rioting in South
Korea (2 min.) -- Anti-government rioting in Panama (2 min.) -- Corruption charges
against Ferdinand Marcos (2 min.) -- Recent Supreme Court decisions concerning
drunken driving and freedom of speech (1 min.) -- Ford Motor Company divestment in
South Africa (2 min.) -- Warsaw Pact accident in the Baltic Sea (1/2 min.) -- Limited
immunity for Col. North in Iran/Contra hearings (1/2 min.) -- Appeals court decision on
constitutionality challenge by defense in Michael Deaver case (1/2 min.) -- Stock market
report (1/2 min.) -- Mountain climbing in Colorado (2 min.).
Source of acquisition: Received: 1987-09-17 as a copyright deposit.

Access points:

Subjects: 1. Reagan, Ronald -- Speeches. 2. Arms control. 3. Budget deficits --

United States. 4. Goetz, Bernhard Hugo, 1947- -- Trials, litigation, etc. 5.
Victims’ rights -- United States. 6. United States. Supreme Court -- Decisions. 7.
Riots -- Korea (South). 8. Riots -- Panama. 9. Marcos, Ferdinand E. (Ferdinand
Edralin), 1917- -- Trials, litigation, etc. 10. Freedom of speech -- United States.
11. Drunk driving -- United States. 12. Corporate divestiture -- South Africa.
13. Ford Motor Company. 14. Marine accidents -- Baltic Sea. 15. North, Oliver -
- Trials, litigation, etc. 16. Iran Contra Affair, 1985- 17. Deaver, Michael K. --
Trials, litigation, etc. 18. Stock-exchange -- United States. 19. Mountaineering --
Colorado.
Genres: 1. Television. 2. News.
Added I. Rather, Dan, anchor. II. Plante, Bill, reporter. III. Schakne, Robert,
Entries: reporter. IV. Faw, Bob, 1944- , reporter. V.

170
(cont.)

Wagner, Richard, reporter. VI. Corderi, Victoria, reporter. VII. Bowen, Jerry,
reporter. VIII. Teichner, Martha, reporter. IX. McNamara, Bob, reporter. X.
CBS News. XI. CBS Television Network. XIII. Copyright Collection (Library of
Congress)

171
Example 29: A home movie

[Domestic record. Albert Einstein]. Albert Einstein at country home, Caputh, near
Berlin, May 1931. -- Germany, 1931.

Viewing print: 1 reel (205 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., b&w, si. / USW FAB 1175.
Dupe neg: 1 reel (205 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., b&w, si. / USW FRA 7570.
Archival positive: 1 reel (205 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., b&w, si. / USW FRA 9313.

Title, “Albert Einstein at country home, Caputh, near Berlin, May 1931” from
original container for archival positive.
Summary: Home movies of Albert Einstein, members of his family, and friends
in the garden of his country home, Caputh, near Berlin in May 1931. Various family
members and friends pose for the camera, then move over to a table, seat themselves and
converse with one another.
Source of acquisition: Archival positive and dupe neg received: ca. 1977 from an
unknown source. Viewing copy made from dupe neg at Capital Film Lab: 1977-10-02.

Access points:

Subject: 1. Einstein, Albert, 1879-1955 -- Family.

Genre: 1. Home movies and video.
Added I. Miscellaneous Collection (Library of Congress) II. Title: Albert
Entries: Einstein at country home, Caputh, near Berlin, May 1931.

172
Example 30: A television discussion program

CBS NEWS SPECIAL REPORT. ISSUE OF BUSING / executive producer, Ernest

Leiser. -- US : CBS News [producer], 1972 ; US : CBS Television Network,
1972-04-30. -- Copyright: US : Columbia Broadcasting System, Inc.; 30Apr72;
MP26508.

Viewing print: 2 reels of 2 (2071 ft.) ; 16 mm. : S., b&w, sd. / USW FCA 7383-
7384.

Host & speakers: News correspondent, Roger Mudd ; speakers, John Conyers,
John Tower, Norman Lent, Theodore Hesburgh, Roy Wilkins, Elliot Richardson, Roy
Innis, Richard Kleindienst, Arthur Goldberg.
Summary: A television special in which nine speakers, Rep. John Conyers, Sen.
John Tower, former Congressman Norman Lent, Father Theodore Hesburgh of Notre
Dame University, Roy Wilkins of the NAACP, HEW secretary Elliot Richardson, Roy
Innis of CORE, Attorney General Richard Kleindienst, and former Supreme Court Justice
Arthur Goldberg present opposing views on the issue of busing for racial integration of
the public schools of the United States. Includes excerpts of speeches by President
Richard Nixon on the issue.
Source of acquisition: Received on 1974-04-01 as a copyright deposit.

Access points:

Subjects: 1. Busing for school integration. 2. Discrimination in education. 3.

Separation of powers.
Genres: 1. Television. 2. Public affairs.
Added I. Leiser, Ernest, 1921- , production. II. Mudd, Roger, 1928- , reporter.
Entries: III. Conyers, John, 1929- IV. Tower, John. V. Lent, Norman, 1931- VI.
Hesburgh, Theodore Martin, 1917- VII. Wilkins, Roy, 1901- VIII. Richardson
Elliot L.,1920- IX. Innis, Roy, 1934- X. Kleindienst, Richard G., 1923- XI.
Goldberg, Arthur J. XII. CBS News. XIII. CBS Television Network. XIV.
Columbia Broadcasting System, Inc. XV. Copyright Collection (Library of
Congress) XVI. Title: Issue of busing.

173
Example 31: An educational film in a series

ABOIO E CANTIGAS : MUSICA FOLCLORICA BRASILEIRA / direção, Humberto

Mauro ; fotografia, José A. Mauro ; cenário musical de José Mauro ; arranjo do
maestro Aldo Taranto. -- BR : Instituto Nacional de Cinema Educativo [produção,
distribuição], 1954. -- Direitos legais: Fundação do Cinema Brasileiro.

Negativo original: 1I/1S de 1 (240I/260S m.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&p, son. / BRS
SN50278X e Y.
Contratipo: 1I/1S de 1 (220I/270S m.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&p, son. / BRS SNX e Y -
NE 00574.02 e 03.
Contratipo: 1I/1S de 1 (230I/240S m.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&p, son. / BRS SN50611X
e Y, contratipo 2.
Master: 1I/1S de 1 (220I/250S m.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&p, son. / BRS SP50567X e
Y.
(BRASILIANAS ; Nº 3)

Conjunto vocal “Os Cariocas.”

A metragem anotada no Livro de Tombo de INCE é 260 m.
Conteúdo: “ABOIO é o canto com que o vaqueiro acalma a boiada. E melodia
de caráter suave, um som prolongado e macio que tem como que o dom de transformar o
‘bravo’ em ‘manso.’ Aboiando pelos sertöes, o boiadeiro reune o gado das invernadas;”
“Depois de reunida, a boiada é conduzida para um does currais da região, onde tem lugar
a ‘apartação’ - separação do gado;” “Na tradição das vaquejadas, existem romances de
bois lendários, como as solfas do BOI SURUBI e MEU BOI MORREU. Essas cantigas,
como as de aboio e apartação constituem das mais belas melodias do folclore brasileiro”
(intertitulos do filme).
Sugestöes para descrição: Folclore. Música Folclórica. Bois.

174
Example 32: A feature film with holdings in several generations

DEUS E O DIABO NA TERRA DO SOL / direção, argumento, roteiro e diálogos,

Glauber Rocha ; fotografia, Waldemar Lima ; edição, Rafael [Justo] Valverde ;
música, [Heitor] Villa-Lobos e Sérgio Ricardo ; elenco, Geraldo del Rey, Yoná
Magalhães, Othon Bastos, Mauricio do Valle, Lidio Silva, Sonia dos Humildes. --
BR : Luiz Augusto Mendes [produção] : Herbert Richers S.A. [distribuição],
1964. -- Direitos legais: Espólio Glauber Rocha.

Negativo original: 13I/13S de 13 (3.299 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&p, son. / BRS
SN00777X e Y.
Contratipo combinado: 13 em 7 de 13 (2.845 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&p, son. / BRS
SN00878Z.
Cópia de som: 13 de 13 (3.090 m.) ; 35mm. : S., son. /BRS SP01758Y.
Master combinado: 13 de 13 (3.320 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&p, son. / BRS
SP50183Z.
Contratipo de imagem: 13 de 13 (3.320 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&p, son. / BRS
NE00955-01.
Negativo de som: 13 de 13 (3.320 m.) ; 35 mm. ; S., son. / BRS NE01029-01.
Cópia de difusão: 13 3m 7 de 13 (3.028 m.) ; 35 mm. : S., b&p, son. / BRS
SP00575Z.
Cópia de difusão: 13 partes em 2 de 13 (1.110 m.) ; 16 mm. : S., b&p, son. / BRS
SP02026Z.
Matriz de video: 2 fitas (120 min.) ; 3/4 in. : b&p, son. / BRS NE01066-03.

O Contratipo combinado SN00878Z é uma versão reduzida do filme; constam

todas as cenas, mas encurtadas. A matriz de copiagem é comp0o-;,sta pelo ?Contratipo
de imagem NE00955-01 e Negativo de som NE01029-01, tirados do Master combinado
SP50183Z, feito na França, que tinha anotado no rótulo “LE DIEU NOIR ET LA
DIABLE BLOND,” embora todos os créditos estemam em português.
Sinopse: Drama sobre um vaqueiro no sertão nordestino que, após matar seu
patrão, foge com a mulher, indeciso entre o misticismo de um beato ou a violência do
cangaço, ambos exterminados por um matador professional.
Sugestões para indexação: Nordeste - sertão nordestino. Messianismo. Cangaço.
Problemas sociais.
Bibliographia: ver livro Sertão/Mar, de Ismail Xavier.
(A descrição abaixo não entra no Banco de Dados.)
Conteúdo: (descrição a partir da cópia de difusão em 35 mm.) : 1º rolo: Sertão,
caatinga. O vaqueiro Manuel observa, a cavalo, a procissão de fiéis conduzida pelo beato

175
(cont.)

Sebastião. Chega ao seu casebre onde Rosa, sua mulher, bate o pilão sem querer ouvi-lo
falar sobre a figura do beato. Manuel mói a mandioca em uma roda rudimentar girada
por Rosa. Passando pela feira pública de um vilarejo, Manuel se defronta com o Coronel
Morais, seu patrão, para dar prestação de seu serviço. Sentindo-se explorado nos seus
negócios, Manuel o mata e foge, sendo perseguido por dois capangas do coronel que,
após matarem a mãe de Manuel, são mortos por ele (409 m.). -- 2º rolo: Manuel enterra a
mãe e decide juntar-se aos fiéis de Sebastião que, numa pregação, exorta a procura da
terra da fartura onde não há seca nem exploração. Rosa tenta impedir Manuel mas ele
ruma decidido ao encontro do beato, a quem beija os pés. Os pescadores são
massacrados pelo grup de Sebastião: as armas se juntam à penitência, compondo os fiéis
de Monte Santo. Rosa, idolada, tenta demover Manuel de seus novos valores, mas a
força de Sebastião a vence em seus intentos. Antonio das Mortes, “matador de
cangaceiros,” contratado por um padre e um fazendeiro, hesita, pondera e concorda afinal
em exterminador o grupo do beato Sebastião (517 m.). -- 3º rolo: O padre efetua o
pagamento a Antonio. Manuel e os fiéis aguardam a chegada da “ilha,” da terra do bem,
sob o olhar descrente de Rosa. Para redimir-se, Manuel de joelhos carrega, pela encosta
do morro, oma pedra na cabeça. Rosa, desesperada, não suporta mais as preces dos fiéis.
Sebastião pede a Manuel a alma de Rosa e a de uma criança para que o demônio se afaste
do grupo. Manuel, agarrando Rosa, passa a cumprir as ordens do beato (354 m.). -- 4º
rolo: Em nome da fé, Sebastião mata a criança que Manuel segura nos braços. Rosa,
acuada em um canto do “templo,” aguarda a sua vez, enquanto Manuel parece
arrepender-se de seus atos. Rosa, levantando-se, mata Sebastião, enquanto Antonio das
Mortes inicia o massacre dos fiéis. Ao encontrar Sebastião já morto, Antonio poupa Rosa
e Manuel. A um cantador cego, Antonio relata os acontecimentos de Monte Santo.
Manuel e Rosa, perambulando pelo sertão, encontram Corisco e seu grupo de
cangasceiros que vingam a morte de Lampião. Corisco acredita estar possuido pelo
expirito de seu ex-chefe que lhe dará força para acabar com a maldade do sertão.
Manuel, aos pés de Corisco, pede para ser integrado ao grupo (420 m.). -- 5º rolo: Dadá,
mulher de Corisco, e Roas se irmanam. O cantador relata a Corisco o massacre de Monte
Santo. Corisco relata a morte de Lampião e Maria Bonita na Toca does Angicos.
Novamente solicitado por

176
(cont.)

Manuel, Corisco o aceita no bando, batizando-o de Satanás. A vingança de Corisco

atinge a família de um “coronel.” Manuel, ainda indeciso entre a cruz e a espada, opta
afinal pelo cangaço, metando um noivo da família. A Rosa, novamente descrente com os
destinos, resta a aliança de paz com Dadá (464 m.). -- 6º rolo: Dadá tenta convencer
Corisco a “ir embora,” enquanto Rosa bate em Manuel para convencê-lo de que não há
justiça com sangue. Corisco, para Manuel, repete o ideal de Sebastião: o sertão vai virar
mar e or mar vai virar sertão. Antonio das Mortes, “comprindo seu destino,” continua
suas andanças à procura de Corisco. Para o cantador, que lhe fornece pequenos detalhes
de Manuel e Corisco, Antonio revela seu papel na grande luta do sertão. O cantador traz
para Corisco o aviso de morte de Antonio. Dadá tenta demover Corisco de sua entrega
volunária a Antonio, mas ele não de deixa convencer: a revolução só é feita pelo embate
das armas. Corisco dá ordens a Manuel e a Dadá para que se afastem no cumprimento de
suas tarefas (512 m.). -- 7º rolo: Sozinhos, Rosa se entrega ao amor (furioso) de Corisco.
De volta, Dadá fala de seu filho morto e Manuel fala do cerco inveitável de Antonio.
Indeciso entre ficar ou partir, Manuel procura a decisão de Rosa, que diz preferir a vida.
Antonio das Mortes, a caminho deles contudo, logo se defronta com Dadá e Corisco, que
são mortos, e com Manuel e Rosa, que fogem pelo sertão. Na corrida, Rosa cai e Manuel
continua seu caminho, enquanto o mar (invade o sertão) (352 m.).
Observações do catalogador: Cópia muito contrastada: ora superxposta, ora
subexposta. Som muito baixo em diversos trechos.

177
Example 33: Television news [1]

TUPI. 1954-01-02, 09, 13 E 16 / BR : TV Tupi [produção e emissão], 1954. -- Direitos

legais: Cinemateca Brasileira.

Negativo original: 1 rolo (330 m.) ; 16 mm. : S., b&p, mudo e son. / BSR.

Contém matérias dos telejournais REPORTER ESSO e IMAGENS DO DIA.

Rolo montado na Cinemateca.
Existe roteiro correspondente às edições integrais.
Conteúdo: 1954-01-02 - “Realizou-se hoje no Tribunal de Justiça do Estado [de
São Paulo] a ceremônia de posse do novo corregedor geral do Estado, sr. Pedro
Rodovalho Marcondes Chaves.” -- “Teve início hoje o prazo para o licenciamento de
veículos na capital [de São Paulo].” “Apesar da movimentação que se notou desde as
primeiras horas da manhã na recebedoria da prefeitura,” “a sétima seção da DST
continuava às moscas (...) pos os proprietários de veículos e os próprios despachantes
estão tateando ainda, sem ter descoberto a melhor maneira de conseguie rapidamente
lacrar um veículo.” -- “Eliminatórias para o Trampolim do Diabo, prova sensacional a se
realizar amanhã na Gávea [Rio de Janeiro]. Somente os volantes nacionais inscritos
retularmente participaram das eliminatórias.” “Os volantes internacionais, convidados
pelo Autómovel Club, são automaticamente classificados.” Chico Landi “vai largar no
primeiro pelotão. Este ano há uma dama inscrita - Madame Danille Foufounis, com um
Jaguar esporte. Nas eleminatórias o melhor tempo foi alcançado pelo barão de Grafereid,
competidor europeu. O volante urugauio Daniel Griapesoni sofreu um acidente na
elminatória e possivelmente não correrá amanhã.” -- A fechadura elétrica, “inventada
pelo sr. Johanes Alber,” põe-se “a buzinar estridentemente” quando “tocada por chave
falsa ou instrumento semelhante.” -- “Fechada a zona do baixo meretricio” em São Paulo.
-- “No salão nobre de A Gazeta, o sr. Carlos Joel Nelli abre a solenidade de entrega does
prêmios da São Silvestre.” Emil Zatopék “recebe a grande medalha de ouro;” “Franjo
Mihalic, da Iugoslávia, recebe a medalha de prata;” “o brasileiro Luiz Conzaga, terceiro
colocado, recebe também o seu galardão;” “Lucien They, da Bélgica, quarto colocado;”
“a equipe da Argentina recebe a troféu atribuido ao país vencedor por equipe;” Zatopék
recebe ainda o prêmio Governo de São Paulo e o troféu Quarto Centenário; Luiz Gonzaga
o prêmio Prefeitura de São Paulo, “como primeiro brasileiro colocado.” --

178
(cont.)

Declarações do “sr. Queiroz Filho, presidente do PDC, a propósito da renúncia do sr.

Franco Montoro” (SOM). -- “Realiza-se no ginásio do Estádio Municipal do Pacaembú a
apuração final do concurso para a eleição da Rainha dos Trabalhadores do Quarto
Centenário. As dez moças eleitas finalistas realizam o desfile perante os juizes;” “mais
de mil e quinhentos votos elegem Rainha dos Trabalhadores do Quarto Centenário a
senhorita Dora Manfredi.” “O sr. Ataliba Leonel, secretário do Trabalho, o sr. Antonio
Devisate e outras autoridades, presidem à festa de coroação da rainha dos
Trabalhadores.”
1954-01-09 - “um senhor que vinha dirigindo seu automóvel, ao atingir o inicio
da rua Vinte e Quatro de Maio [São Paulo] em frente a um grande magazine, faleceu
acometido de mau súbito, ainda preso ao volante. As providências ordinárias
determinadas pelas autoridades ainda retêm por algum tempo o automóvel no local
enquanto a multidão se aglomera espantada com insólita ocorrência.” -- “O Viveiro
Manequinho Lopes [São Paulo] determinou o construção de um restaurante para servir
aos seus trabalhadores. O prédio já está concluído e tudo se está aprestando para a
próxima inauguração.” -- “Em homenagem ao arquiteto Walter Gropius e senhora, que
atualmente se encontram em São Paulo, o Instituto dos Arquitetos do Brasil promove, nos
salões da boite Bambú, um jantar dançante.” -- “No grande audiotório do Teatro de
Cultura Artística, têm lugar as solenidades de colação de grau da turma denominada do
Quarto Centenário da cidade de São Paulo, da faculdade de Ciências Econômicas. E a
parte culminante do programa que se inicia pela manhã com Missa solene de Ação de
Braças. O professor Heraldo Darbuy, (...) escolhido para paraninfar a turma deste ano,
inicia a cerimônia de entrega dos certificados aos novos economistas.”
1954-01-13 - “Tiveram início as obras de remodelação do Jardim da Luz [São
Paulo].” -- “Estas cenas foram colhidas no Hospital Central do Câncer, e nos mostram a
bomba de radium” - “adquirida pelo Instituto Central da Associação Paulista de Combate
ao Câncer” - que “dentro dos próximos dias deverá entrar em funcionamento.” -- “Esta
manhã o delegado regional do IAPC [Instituto de Aposentadoria e Pensões dos
Comerciários], sr. Rolando Perri, propiciou à imprensa (...) uma visita às instalações do
Hospital [a ser inaugurado no dias 25 de janeiro], á avenida Brigadeiro Luiz Antônio.” --
Devido ao grande calor de hoje em São Paulo “as piscinas estiveram superlotadas.” “Os
vendedores de refrescos e

179
(cont.)

refrigerantes não tiveram mãos a medir. Os que não dispunham de piscina, também
deram um jeito na vida. Vejam esse garotinho.” -- “Quase no interior da estação do
Tucuruvi, ramal da Cantareira, linha Sorocabana, ocorreu logo às primeiras horas da
manhã de noje um descarrilamento de uma locomotiva que puxava uma composição de
seis vagões repletos de passageiros.” Não houve vítimas, mas “todos os trens que
procediam da direção da Guarulhos (...) ficaram paralisados”. -- “Em sessão solene
realizada no Tribunal de Justiça Militar do Estado de São Paulo, toma posse o novo
presidente [juiz Mário Severo Maranhão], em presença do coronel Melo Gaia,
comandante da Força Pública, desembargador Genésio de Moura, do Tribunal de Contas,
(...) e outras autoridades civis e militares.” -- “O engenheiro agrônomo João Aloisi [sic]
Sobrinho toma posse na manhã de hoje de suas funções de chefe do escritório de São
Paulo do Instituto Brasileiro do Café, em (...) solenidade levada a efeito na sede do
escritório. O engenheiro agrônomo Walter Lazarini, ao efetuar a transmissão do cargo,
cumprimenta o novo titular.” -- “O crak Aureko chega a São Paulo, viajando em avião
especial a fim de tomar parte na disputa do Grande Prêmio Quarto Centenário, no
próximo dia 24 de janeiro. Aureko, devido ao estafante calor de todo o dia de hoje, não
quis deixar o seu abrigo.” -- “Salão de exposições da Casa Pia São Vicente de Paula,
agora exibindo uma preciosa coleção de pinturas, esculturas e cerâmica em geral, fruto do
trabalho das alunas da casa.” -- “O motivo principal de quase todas as peças,
principalmente da parte de cerâmica, são os evocativos das glórias paulistanas.”
1954-01-16 - “Tiveram início hoje as obras que representam a execução do plano
de reforma do mercado municipal, proposto pela Divisão de Abastecimento da Prefeitura
[de São Paulo] (...). Aqui estão alguns aspectos colhidos na manhã de hoje quando já iam
adiantados os trabalhos de demolição das bancas das casas de carne.” -- “Atulamente é
aqui [Avenida Tiradentes, nas proximidades da estação da Luz] que os coletivos
procedentes dos bairros [da Zona Norte] fazem seu ponto final.” Para resolver a questão
da distância do local ao centro comercial da cidade “a prefeitura resolveu dar utilização
ao terreno de sua propriedade situado nos baixos do Viaduto Santa Ifigênia, (...)
atualmente servindo de estacionamento de automóvels.” -- Entre as hipóteses para a
construção de um jardim zoológico em São Paulo, surgiu agora a de um “no parque da
Água Branca,

180
(cont.)

onde aliás já existem alguns representantes da fauna brasileira.” -- “Perante o secretário

da Justiça, sr. Sales Filho (...), toma posse no cargo de Reitor da Universidade de São
Paulo, o Professor Melo Morais.” “A ceremônia tem lugar na Reitoria da Universidade
de São Paulo. O novo Reitor fax uso da palavra.” -- “A direção dos Diários Associados
reúne em uma noite de amizade e confratenização, no recinto da boite Oásis, figuras de
projeção nos circulos publicitários de São Paulo;” “o show é animado por William
Fournaut.” -- “O Centro Social de São Paulo, no pico do Jaraguá, ‘está servindo de sede
ao Congresso da Federação das Sociedades Metodistas de Senhoras,’ presidido por
‘Abigail Dutral Gelcich e reunindo cerca de duzentas senhoras no debate e exame de
teses numerosas sobre a fraternidade cristã.’” -- “O secretário do Trabalho, sr. Ataliba
Leonel, abre solenemente os trabalhos do Congresso dos Economistas, instalado em São
Paulo, inegrando a parte cultural do programa comemorativo do Quarto Centenário da
cidade. A sessão tem lugar na sede da Federação das Indústria.” -- “Recebido com
exuberante aclamação, chega ao recinto do auditório do Centro do Professorado Paulista,
o sr. André Franco Montoro, que vem de renunciar ao seu mandato de vereador à
Edilidade Paulistana.” -- André Franco Montoro expõe “os objetivos que movem o
comitê Contra os Abusos dos Institutos de Previdência à campanha ora iniciada” (SOM).
-- “Chega ao aeroporto de Congonhas o avião especial que conduz o crack peruano
Guignol.” O cavalo vem disputar o Grande Prêmio Quarto Centenário. -- Violento
incêndio “irrompeu cerca das 18,30 horas de hoje, hum depósito de material bélico da
Força Pública do Estado, situado à rua Jorge Miranda, na Ponte Pequena.”

181
Example 34: Television news [2]

TUPI. 1954-01-02. -- BR : TV Tupi [produção e emissão], 1954. -- Direitos legais:

Cinemateca Brasileira.

Negativo original: 16 mm. : S., b&p, mudo e son. / BSR.

Contém matérias dos telejournais REPORTER ESSO e IMAGENS DO DIA.

Este material não está agrupado em um rolo físico. Este é um formato de saída do
computador. Cada reportagem abaixo possui seu número próprio e uma metragem
aproximada de 9 metros.
Conteúdo: Posse do novo corregedor geral do Tribunal de Justiça do Estado de
São Paulo -- Licenciamento de veículos na capital de São Paulo -- Eliminatórias para o
Trampolim do Diabo, no Rio de Janeiro -- A fechadura elétrica -- Fechada a zona do
baizo meretrício em São Paulo -- Entrega dos prêmios da São Sivestre -- Declarações do
presidente do PDC, a propósito da renúncia do sr. Franco Montoro (SOM) -- Eleição da
Rainha dos Trabalhadores do Quarto Centenário.
Existe roteiro correspondente às edições integrais.

182
Example 35: A home movie

[DOCUMENTARIO DOMESTICO. CARMENCITA DA SILVEIRA JULLIEN.

CARMENCITA E PAIS NO NAVIO BAGE]. BAGE, DEC. 1934 - JANV. 1935.
-- BR, 1935-1936. -- Direitos legais: Cinemateca Brasileira (?).

Reversível original: 1 rolo (36 m.) ; 16 mm. : S., b&p, sil. / BSR SP02662X.

A titular possui cópia em vídeo.

Este material faz parte de um conjunto que cobre eventos ocorridos entre amigos
e familiares da titular: viagem a Paris e arredores, Roma, Veneza, Florença, Turim,
Lausanne, Genebra, Chamonix, Nice, Monte Carlo (anos 20); casa de Joana d’Arc; cenas
de São Paulo (1928 e 1950), Santos (1928), Rio de Janeiro (1928), Prais Grande (1930);
convívio com amigos; casamentos (1930 e 1954); formatura na Faculdade de Direito do
Largo de São Francisco (1948) e lançamento das pedras fundamentais da Clínica Infantil
Ipiranga e da capela do Colégio Sion. Todos materiais filmados em 16 mm. por Carmen
da Silveira, mãe da titular. Há também material de 35 mm., sob o título [BATISMO DE
CARMENCITA], da Guarani Films, de 1920.
Conteúdo: Carmencita, já adolescente, nada na piscina do navio, apoiando-se em
duas boias onde se lê “Bagé.” Grupo de pessoas reunidas em lugar coberto posa para a
câmera. Ao fundo, botes salva-vidas e o mar. Homem oriental carrega pequena máquina
fotográfica de fole, enquanto outro senhor aprentemente prepara-se para ser fotografado.
Vê-se bóia com a inscição “Bagé - Rio de Janeiro.” Várias tomadas de pessoas em
diferentes lugares do navio; entre elas identifica-se Carmencita, seus pais, e a poetisa
Cecília Meireles, debruçada na amurada do navio, à contra-luz. Panorâmica do mar,
avistando-se terra no horizonte. Vista do masr, mais próxima da terra. Distingue-se uma
grande cidade à beira-mar e ao fundo um morro, possivelmente o Pão de Açuncar. No
mar, várias embarcações, entre elas um enorme veleiro.
De acordo com depoimento da titular, o “Bagé” era um vapor brasileiro, no qual
seus pais resolveram viajar, por patriotismo. Arrependeram-se devido à falta de
condições higiênicas do navio.

(Neste registro, a classificação “Documentário doméstico” é anotada no campo “Gênero”,

do registro no Bando de Dados.)

183
APPENDIX B - GLOSSARY
 The following glossary includes general cataloging terms, cataloging terms adapted for
use in cataloging moving image materials, and terms used specifically for cataloging moving
image materials. The sources used for compiling this glossary are listed in Appendix G -
Bibliography. Relatively few credit and technical terms have been included. Sources for
definitions of additional credit and technical terms not noted here may also be found in Appendix
G.

Access point - a name, term, code, etc. under which a bibliographic record may be searched and
identified. See also Heading.

Accompanying material - non-moving image materials which are related to the production of
the item or are intended to be used with it.

Added entry - an entry, additional to the original release title, by which an item is represented in
a catalog, e.g., production company name, director name, cast names, variant titles, etc.; a
category of access point (q.v.).

Alternate title - see Variant title.

Alternative title - the second part of a title proper that consists of two parts, each of which is a
title; the parts are joined by the word “or” or its equivalent in another language, e.g. The
LIMEJUICE MYSTERY, OR, WHO SPAT IN GRANDFATHER’S PORRIDGE? (The
alternative title is, WHO SPAT IN GRANDFATHER’S PORRIDGE?)

Animator - the person responsible for moving image works or portions thereof which are
created by photographing drawings, sculptures, or other inanimate things in sequence to
create the illusion of movement.

Avant-tître - in library usage, other title information introducing the title proper and occurring
above the item’s title proper on the prescribed source of information for the title and
statement of responsibility.

Base - see Film base.

Bibliographic description - a set of bibliographic data recording and identifying an item.

185
B (cont.)

Body of the entry - that portion of the catalog record that begins with the title (area 1) and ends
with the production, distribution, etc. area (area 4).

Broadcast - see Telecast.

Broadcast date - see Original telecast date.

Caption - see Subtitle.

Cartridge - a permanently encased film or tape which has the ends joined together to form a
loop that provides playback without rewinding. Also, the case itself. See also Loop.

Cassette - a permanently encased film or tape that winds and rewinds from reel-to-reel.

Cast - a collective term for actors and their roles. Names of actors may be preceded by such
terms as: starring, co-starring, also starring, introducing, featuring, guest star, guest
appearances, cameo appearance, or with. A broad distinction is made between cast and
credits by defining cast as those in front of the camera and credits as those behind the
camera. See also Talent.

Catalog - a descriptive list of materials contained in a collection, an archive, or a group of

archives, arranged according to some definite plan, e.g., by title.

Cataloging agency - the organization or institution, etc. responsible for the creation of a catalog.

Cinematographer - the person in charge of all camera operations, who plans the technical
aspects of lighting and photographing of scenes, and also often assists the director in the
choice of angles and setups of the camera, and mood of lighting. He/she may also
supervise the further processing of filmed material up to completion of the workprint.

Claimant - the person or corporate body in whom is vested the rights of ownership and
protection against unauthorized use of any given published or unpublished work.

Clip(s) - a short section or sections extracted from a film. When created during the process of
editing, the short sections are often called cuts or trims (q.v.).

186
C (cont.)

Collective title - a title proper that is an inclusive title for an item containing several works.

Commercial - a short persuasive film, often of 15 to 60 seconds duration, usually highly

contrived and normally shown on television, which attempts to convince the audience to
buy a product, take some specific action, or adopt a favorable view towards some
product, institution, business or issue. See also Public service announcement.

Commercial sponsor - a person or corporate body who helps finance the production/broadcast
of a television program without control over the contents of the production. Such
sponsorship is normally done in order to advertise a product or for the purposes of public
relations, and usually also involves merely the purchase of a short time slot in which to
present a commercial. See also Sponsor; Commercial.

Compilation - a moving image work composed of thematically or graphically organized

segments of other works, edited together to present an altogether new work.

Container - any housing of an item, a group of items, or a part of an item, which is physically
separable from the material housed. (A film can is a container; a cassette or cartridge is
not.)

Contents note - a formally structured note beginning with the word “Contents:” which lists the
individual parts, segments, etc. of a moving image work which is so divided.

Cooperation/In association with - a credit for a corporate body or person, other than the main
production company or staff, who aids in one or more production functions.

Co-production - a moving image work resulting from the joint efforts of two or more
production companies often based in different countries. See also International co-
production.

Copy - any reproduction. For moving image works, the term is generally used to indicate or
describe any format or generation of a work, whether an original or a reproduction, as in
the phrase “the original copy.” In archival moving image cataloging, the term has been
defined quite specifically to mean “an item which is a duplicate in every physical
characteristic or which varies only in duration, and the variation is minor” (see p. 93).

187
C (cont.)

Copy status (generation) - the collective name for terms used to differentiate original material
and successive duplicates. The more generations away from the original (whether
photographic, magnetic, or on disc) an item is, the greater will be the degradation in
quality of image and/or sound.

Copyright - the exclusive legal right to reproduce and sell the matter and form of an intellectual
or artistic work.

Copyright registration - the public record of ownership in intellectual or artistic property.

Corporate body - an organization or group of persons that is identified by a particular name and
that acts, or may act, as an entity. Typical examples of corporate bodies are associations,
institutions, business firms, nonprofit enterprises, governments, government agencies,
religious bodies, local churches, and conferences.

Country of origin - the country or countries where the principal offices of the production
company (or companies) of a moving image work are located.

Country of production - see Country of origin.

Credit sequences - the sequences or succession of frames or images upon which titles and
cast/credit functions -- together with the names of persons performing those functions --
are placed. Credit sequences may occur before, during, and/or after the main action of
the moving image work.

Credits - the names and functions of persons responsible for the production and/or artistic or
intellectual content of a moving image work. The term “credits” is often used more
specifically to distinguish between those behind the camera from “cast,” those in front of
the camera.

Dailies - see Rushes.

Director - the person who has overall responsibility for interpreting meaning and expression
during the production of a moving image work. The extent of the director’s involvement
can depend upon the individual, or production company, or practices within the country
concerned.

Distribution - the sale, lease, and rental of moving image works. See also Telecast.

Distribution print - see Print.

188
D (cont.)

Distributor - the person or corporate body who acts as agent between the production company
and the exhibitors, or who sells, leases, rents, or in some manner makes available moving
image works.

Documentary - a moving image work depicting actual persons and/or events.

Domestic record - moving image material, the subjects of which are family events, usually
filmed or recorded by an amateur. Home movies are domestic records. See also Personal
record.

Editing - the selection, arrangement, and assembling of scenes following a script and in creative
cooperation with a director, or to the best advantage for the purpose at hand.

Edition - see Variation with minor changes; Version with major changes.

Edition statement - a word or phrase, or a group of characters indicating that an item belongs to
a particular version or variation. The edition statement may include statements of
responsibility and parallel and additional edition statements.

Educational film/video - a moving image work designed to inform, edify, or instruct.

Element - a word, phrase, or a group of characters representing a distinct unit of bibliographic

information and forming part of an area of the bibliographic description.

Emulsion - the coating, consisting of gelatin and silver salts (unprocessed film) or gelatin and
metallic silver (processed film) or iron oxide (for magnetic sound) bonded to and
supported by a film base. The type of emulsion mixture determines whether the film is
positive or negative.

Entry - a record of an item in a catalog. See also Heading.

Episode title - a title assigned to the individual parts of a series or serial and which, together
with the series/serial title, form an integral part of the title proper of a moving image
work.

Excerpt - a part, usually a complete scene or sequence, taken from a complete moving image
work. An excerpt is distinguished from a clip by the fact that an excerpt is usually longer
and gives a more detailed sense of the complete work than a clip does.

189
E (cont.)

Explanatory reference - an elaborated “see” or “see also” reference that explains the
circumstances under which the headings involved should be consulted.

Feature - a commercially released motion picture of four or more 35 mm. reels in length, i.e.,
1200 m. (4000 ft.) or the equivalent in time -- ca. 40 min. See also Short.

Film base - the material, e.g., acetate, nitrate, diacetate, or polyester, that supports the
photographic emulsion.

Film clip - see Clip(s).

Film stock - unprocessed film and the various sizes of rolls in which it is available. Also, any
specific type of film, usually designated by a manufacturer’s number.

Flash frame - a single frame inserted into a shot to provide an instant of a different image.

Flash title - temporary form of titles for cutting, usually 2-3 frames in length, used merely to
mark the places in films where titles belong.

Formal note - see Note.

Format - in its widest sense, any particular physical presentation of an item, e.g., film,
videocassette, videodisc.

Gauge - the width of motion picture film in millimeters.

General material designation - a term indicating the broad class of material to which an item
belongs, e.g., motion picture, videorecording. See also Specific material designation.

Generation - see Copy status (generation).

Heading - a name, word, or phrase placed at the head of a catalog entry to provide an access
point in the catalog. See also Access point; Added entry.

190
H (cont.)

Home movies - see Domestic record; Personal record.

In association with - see Cooperation/In association with.

Informal note - see Note.

Interior titles - see Intertitles/Interior titles.

International co-production - a moving image work resulting from the joint efforts of two or
more production companies based in different countries.

International Standard Book Number (ISBN) - see Standard number.

International Standard Serial Number (ISSN) - see Standard number.

Intertitle rolls/title bands - the printed titles that have been separated from their corresponding
picture.

Intertitles/Interior titles - titles within the main body of a film, such as dialogue, continuity,
and informational titles. Silent films used intertitles.

Issue - those copies of a version of a moving image work that were offered for distribution by a
specified source or combination of sources at a single time.

Item - a document, a group of documents or a part of a document in any physical form,

considered as an entity and as such forming the basis for a single bibliographic
description.

Key title - the unique name assigned to a serial by the International Serials Data System and
inseparably associated with its International Standard Serial Number (ISSN).

Laboratory - the name of the corporate body/place where the moving image item has been
developed and printed. When a laboratory credit appears on a film, it indicates the
laboratory which processed the negative and/or release print.

191
L (cont.)

Leader - in general, any strip of blank film attached to action-image film or sound track and
used for equipment threading purposes. Also, strips of blank, clear, or black film used
for spacing purposes in the editing of workprints and the preparation of A and B rolls.

Loop - a length of film or tape that is joined together at both ends in order to permit playback
without rewinding. See also Cartridge.

Magazine format film/program - a non-fiction film or program which takes the form of a
number of stories on topics of current interest which are treated in a more general, in-
depth, and/or reflective way than they would be on a newsreel or hard-news television
program.

Main entry - 1. the complete catalog record of an item, presented in the form by which the entity
is to be uniformly identified and cited. The main entry may include the tracings of all
other headings under which the record is to be represented in the catalog. 2. the single
element which is chosen to begin the complete record and under which it is filed.

Material - one of a range of physical forms for the recording of data.

Mixing tracks - separate sound tracks which are combined to produce the final soundtrack of a
film. Mixing tracks may include music, sound effects, and dialog tracks. See also Music
and effects tracks.

Monographic item - a non-serial item, either complete in one physical unit or complete in a
finite number of units.

Motion picture - a length of film, with or without recorded sound, bearing a sequence of images
that create the illusion of movement when projected in rapid succession.

Moving image materials - a range of physical forms upon which visual images, with or without
sound, have been recorded or registered and which create the illusion of movement when
projected, broadcast, or played back.

Multi-part item - a limited series or serial comprising two or more distinct items, no one of
which is identifiable as being of primary importance.

Music and effects track - a sound tape or track containing all sound except the spoken word,
often intended for international use to allow the easier production of different language
versions. See also Mixing tracks.

Mute - a film whose geometry reflects the expectation that a sound track may be added, but
which lacks sound.

192
N

Network - see Television network.

Newsclip(s) - one or more segments edited form newsreels and/or television news broadcasts.

Newsfilm - spot news, interviews, features, sports, etc., used on television news programs. Also
used to describe footage that appears to have been intended for a theatrical newsreel or
photographed by a newsreel company, but cannot be positively identified as such.

Newsreel - a non-fiction film, or series of such films, released theatrically in periodic issues,
each issue consisting of a number of stories reporting and commenting on recent events.

Note - a brief comment or explanation about the bibliographic description, history, or content of
a moving image work, which does not readily fit into other areas of a standardized
catalog record. Notes are formal when they are introduced by a standardized word or
phrase, followed by a colon, space. Otherwise, they are considered informal.

Original release date - the year, and if known the day and month, on which a film was first
offered for distribution. Also, in certain circumstances, the date of first public screening
in the form finally offered for distribution.

Original release title - the title used on the first release or broadcast in the country of origin of
the version of the film or videorecording which is being described. The original title is
used as the title proper for archival film and video recordings, in recognition of the
impermanence of film titling.

Original telecast date - the day, month, and year, and optionally also the time (indicated by the
use of the twenty-four-hour clock) at which a program was first broadcast in the country
of origin.

Other title information - a word or phrase, or a group of characters appearing in conjunction

with, and subordinate to, the title proper of the item. Other title information also occurs
in conjunction with and subordinate to: parallel titles, variations of the title proper,
episode titles, contents titles, titles of series, or of subseries. Other title information
qualifies, explains or completes that title to which it applies, or is indicative of the
character, contents, etc. of the item or the works contained in it, or is indicative of the
motive for, or the occasion of, the item’s production. The term includes subtitles and
avant-tîtres.

193
O (cont.)

Other title information of series - see Other title information.

Outtakes - in general, any shot which is removed from a moving image work. More
specifically, shots which are not included in the moving image work as originally
released or broadcast.

Parallel edition statement - the edition statement in another language and/or script; also any
edition statement, additional to the first, and corresponding to a given parallel title.

Parallel series title - the title of a series in another language and/or script; also, any series title
qualifying as an original series title but which is not chosen for inclusion as the first
named title (other than variant forms of the same title) and reissue/rerelease series titles
appearing on the item described.

Parallel title - the title proper in another language and/or script; any title qualifying as an
original title but which is not used as the title proper; any title appearing on the item
described which is not an original title, and any title by which the work in hand is
commonly known to users and researchers.

Part title - the title of one of the subordinate units into which an item has been divided. See also
Episode title.

Personal record - moving image materials, the subjects of which are normally personal events,
usually filmed or recorded by an amateur. Home movies may be personal records. See
also Domestic record.

Physical description - a set of physical data recording and characterizing a moving image work.

Playback mode - the identification of the system required to reproduce the images and sound
recorded on a videotape or disc.

Prescribed punctuation - grammatical marks or signs used according to standardized rules to

precede or enclose the information in each element or area (other than the first) of a
bibliographic description.

Prescribed source - the documents or reference works, designated by cataloging codes, from
which information may be taken for entry in each element or area of the bibliographic
description. See also Principal source.

194
P (cont.)

Presenter - for film: a vanity credit; in the early years of motion picture production normally the
head of a studio; currently a person or corporate body who is associated with production,
finance, or distribution in some unspecified way. In British television usage: a
newscaster who is in overall control of the presentation of a news or current affairs
program.

Preview - see Trailer.

Principal source - in traditional library usage, a prescribed portion of the item being cataloged
which is considered to take precedence over any other information when recording
elements of the bibliographic description (e.g., the title page). For moving image
cataloging, the established body of knowledge concerning original moving image works -
as determined by those involved in their production and by scholars, researchers, and
archivists. See also Prescribed source.

Print - the positive picture made from an original or duplicate negative in which the tonal values
and colors in the original subject matter are duplicated. In archival moving image
cataloging, two categories of prints are specified: (1) a viewing or reference print which
may be viewed by individuals within archives, usually on editing tables, and (2) a
distribution print which was made for projection and can be lent for screenings at other
institutions.

Producer - the person who bears the ultimate administrative and financial responsibility for a
film. In practice, the role of a producer may be much wider and can include artistic
involvement.

Production company - the name of the company under whose financial, technical, and
organizational management a moving image work is made. In a broad sense, the
production company is responsible for the overall creation of the work.

Production date - the year in which the production of a moving image work was completed; or
sometimes the period of time from the beginning of shooting until completion of the
work.

Production number - a number given to a television program or feature film as a means of

insuring accuracy in assigning costs and other accounting information. Production
numbers may appear on the item itself, the leader, can, housing, accompanying
documentation, etc.

Production rolls - a general term for the various types of production elements (film usually
wound on cores) before they are cut and assembled into reels.

Program - a fictional or nonfictional presentation or performance broadcast on television.

195
P (cont.)

Projection format - the identification of the equipment required to reproduce, normally on a

screen, the images recorded on a film and to amplify any accompanying sound.

Pseudonym - a fictitious name assumed by an individual or a group of individuals.

Public service announcement - a short film or videorecording presented by a nonprofit

organization which attempts to persuade the audience to take some specific action or
adopt a favorable view towards some service, institution, issue, or cause. See also
Commercial.

Publication - see Distribution.

Record - 1. in archival moving image cataloging: a noun used as an introductory word in a

supplied title to describe unedited moving image material that appears to be coverage of
events not specifically staged for the purposes of filming or taping. See also Unedited
materials. 2. in general use as a verb: to register information, permanently or in a
reproducible form, by photographic, electronic, mechanical, or manual means; to set
down in writing.

Reel - 1. a unit in which film or videotape is handled. For film, at one time, the length of a reel
was not greater than 400 m. (1000 ft.) of 35 mm. film, corresponding to about 10 minutes
of projection time. 2. the term used for the spool upon which a reel of film or tape is
handled. See also Roll.

Reference - a direction from one heading or entry to another.

Reference print - see Print.

Reference source - any source, often but not always a publication, from which authoritative
information may be obtained. Not limited to formal reference works.

Reissue - see Rerelease/reissue.

Related title - the name of a separate work upon which the item being cataloged is based, or
which has some other established connection with it.

Release - the distribution and exhibition of a moving image work.

Release date - see Original release date.

196
R (cont.)

Releaser - the agent or agency responsible for the distribution of a moving image work.

Remake - the later production, with different credits, scripts, or casts, of a story previously
filmed or recorded.

Rerelease/reissue - revival and redistribution of a film.

Roll - a short length of film, usually wound on a core. When cut and assembled into longer
lengths, rolls become known as reels. See also Reel.

Romanization - conversion to roman-alphabet form of names or text not written in the roman
alphabet.

Rushes - picture and sound workprints of a day’s shooting, often shown before the next day’s
shooting begins.

Screenwriter - the writer of an original script or the adapter of a preexisting work for the
purposes of creating a film or video production.

Segment - a constituent part of a moving image work; in newsreels, newsfilm, or magazine

format programs, one of the separate stories of a given issue or broadcast.

Serial - 1. film usage (theatrical serial): a type of “short subject” film which was characterized
principally by the episodic development of a story which was presented in installments
over a period of several weeks. The serial engaged audience interest in a hero or heroine
whose exploits reached an unresolved crisis at the end of each episode. The predominant
genre of the serial was melodrama. Serials remained popular with motion picture
audiences until production of them ceased in the early 1950s. 2. television usage
(television serial): a group of programs with storyline continued from episode to episode.
3. library usage: a publication in any medium issued in successive parts bearing
numerical or chronological designations and intended to be continued indefinitely.
Serials include periodicals; newspapers; annuals (reports, yearbooks, etc.); the journals,
memoirs, proceedings, transactions, etc., of societies; and numbered monographic series.

Series - a group of separate items related to one another by the fact that each item bears, in
addition to its own title proper, a collective title applying to the group as a whole. The
individual items may or may not be numbered. See also Television series.

197
S (cont.)

Series statement - the main elements identifying a series, or a series and one or more subseries,
including any numbering of the separate items within the series or the subseries.

Short - commercially released moving image material that is brief in length, usually not more
than three 35 mm. reels (or the equivalent in time), i.e., not a feature. See also Feature.

Sine loco - without place, i.e., without the name of the place of production or distribution, etc.

Sine nomine - without name, i.e., without the name of the production company or distributor,
etc.

Sound track - the recorded patterns or modulations in a specific area of a tape or film that
represents the dialogue, sound effects, and/or music which accompanies or is designed to
accompany the picture information of a moving image work.

Specific material designation - a term indicating the special class of material (usually the class
of physical object) to which an item belongs, e.g., videocassette.

Sponsor - a person or corporate body who commissions and/or finances the production of a film,
usually for other than theatrical exhibition, and almost always for furtherance of public
relations, or similar purposes. Typically, the sponsor exercises some measure of control
over the artistic and/or intellectual content of a work. See also Commercial sponsor.

Standard number - the International Standard Number (ISN), e.g., International Standard Book
Number (ISBN), International Standard Serial Number (ISSN), or any other
internationally agreed upon standard number, that uniquely identifies an item. At this
time there is no standard number for moving image material, although some items may
have been assigned an ISBN.

Statement of responsibility - a statement relating to the identification and/or function of any

persons credited with participation in the creation and/or production of a moving image
work.

Station - see Television station.

Stock - see Film stock.

Studio - the name of the place where motion pictures are made or which is equipped for the
production of television programs.

Subsequent copyright owner - the person or corporate body to whom rights of ownership are
sold or otherwise given.

198
S (cont.)

Subseries - a series within a series; i.e., a series which always appears in conjunction with
another, usually more comprehensive, series of which it forms a part. Its title may or
may not be dependent on the title of the main series.

Subseries statement - the main elements identifying a subseries, including any numbering of the
separate items within the subseries. In the case of a subseries, the title of which is
dependent on the title of the main series, the subseries statement includes both the title of
the series and the subseries and may also include a subseries designation.

Subtitle - 1. a title superimposed over action, usually at the bottom of the frame, used to translate
foreign language dialogue, or to identify the scene. 2. any phrase appearing in
conjunction with the title proper, parallel titles, or other titles, indicative of the character,
contents, etc., of the item or the motives for, or occasion of its production. See also
Other title information.

Summary - a short, accurate, and objective written description of the contents of a moving
image work.

Supplied title - a title provided by the cataloger when an item has no title, and no title can be
identified from any other source.

Talent - term used in television to identify those in front of the camera. See also Cast.

Telecast - to broadcast on television, thereby making a work available to an audience. See also
Distribution.

Telecast date - see Original telecast date.

Telefeature - a movie of 40 or more minutes in length, made for television broadcast rather than
for theatrical release.

Television commercial - see Commercial.

Television news - coverage of current events on regularly scheduled broadcasts.

Television network - a group of television stations in different locations that share facilities and
programs. Also the parent company which coordinates functions for the group, often
producing programs for broadcast over the network.

199
T (cont.)

Television promo - a short message intended for telecast, advertising a television program.

Television serial - see Serial 2. television usage.

Television series - a group of programs created or adapted for television broadcast with a
common series title, usually related to one another in subject or otherwise. Often,
television series appear once a week during a prescribed time slot; however, they may
appear with more or less frequency. Television series are usually created to be open-
ended, not with a predetermined number of episodes. In a fiction series, the programs
typically share the same characters and basic theme.

Television sponsor - see Commercial sponsor; Sponsor.

Television station - a complete assemblage of television equipment for transmitting or

receiving, or the name of a place where such a complete assemblage is located.

Television trailer - see Trailer -- TV.

Theatrical serial - see Serial 1. film usage.

Theatrical newsreel - see Newsreel.

Theme - an introductory word in a supplied title used to describe partially edited moving image
materials which probably never had official titles, were probably not intended to be
complete productions, or may or may not have been organized, but appear to be
composed of footage on related topics.

Title - a word, phrase, character, or group of characters, normally appearing in an item, naming
the item or the work contained in it.

Title bands - see Intertitle rolls/title bands.

Title proper - the chief name of an item, including any alternative title but excluding parallel
titles and other title information, normally the original release title.

Tracing - the record of the headings under which an item is represented in the catalog. Tracings,
if they are present, usually appear at the bottom of a catalog record.

Track - see Sound track.

Trade mark/Trade name - a symbol or brand name associated with all or some of the products
of a publisher or production company.

200
T (cont.)

Trailer - a publicity film, usually consisting of short excerpts from a forthcoming presentation,
to be shown in a theater. A trailer is shown as part of a current program. Also called a
preview.

Trailer--TV - a televised publicity message usually consisting of short excerpts from a

forthcoming presentation to be shown in a theater. A trailer--TV is intended for
television broadcast.

Transliterate - to represent or spell in the characters of another alphabet.

Trims - unused remnants cut from shots in a film. Trims may be carefully classified and put
away since, in the progress of working from a rough cut towards a fine cut, they may be
needed for incorporation in the film.

Umbrella series - a broad title identification for a group of separate television series which have
been linked together, primarily for publicity purposes.

Unedited materials - moving image records, either film or video, which have not been subjected
to any systematic selection, arranging, or cutting procedures.

Uniform title - in library usage, the particular title by which a work that has appeared under
varying titles is to be identified for cataloging purposes. See also Original release title.

Variant title - any variation of the title proper (original release title). Examples include: parallel
titles, rerelease/reissue titles, translation titles, working titles, etc.

Variation with minor changes - the deliberate issue of a moving image work with minor (non-
significant) changes from the original issue. A variation with minor changes is
distinguished form a version with major changes by the type and extent of the alterations.

Version with major changes - a deliberate issue of a moving image work with significant
changes from the original issue. A version with major changes is distinguished from a
variation with minor changes by the type and extent of the alterations. In popular usage,
the term “version” has often been applied generically to indicate the presence of some
change, either major or minor.

Videodisc - see Videorecording.

201
V (cont.)

Videorecording - a recording on which visual images, usually in motion and accompanied by

sound, have been registered; usually designed for playback by means of a television set.
Current mediums for videorecordings include aluminum discs plated with magnetic
alloys and magnetic tape.

Videotape - see Videorecording.

Viewing print - see Print.

Working title - a title given to a film or videorecording during the course of its production.

Workprint - a print from original camera footage which is edited to a fine degree to achieve the
final version.

202
APPENDIX C - ISO DATE STANDARD
[PHOTOCOPIED MATERIAL FROM “INTERNATIONAL STANDARD - ISO - 2014”]

3 PAGES - PP.204-206

204
 APPENDIX D

CONVERSION CHARTS: METERS, FEET, MINUTES

Table 1: Length/Running Time Conversion Chart: Feet/Minutes
(based on 1 foot = 16 frames at 35mm., 40 frames at 16mm.)

FRAMES LENGTH IN FEET RUNNING TIME IN MINUTES

AT
35 mm. 16 mm. 16 fps. 24 fps. 25 fps.
80 5 2 0.08 0.06 0.05
160 10 4 0.17 0.11 0.11
320 20 8 0.33 0.22 0.21
480 30 12 0.50 0.33 0.32
640 40 16 0.67 0.44 0.43
800 50 20 0.83 0.56 0.53
960 60 24 1.00 0.67 0.64
1120 70 28 1.17 0.78 0.75
1280 80 32 1.33 0.89 0.85
1440 90 36 1.50 1.00 0.96
1600 100 40 1.67 1.11 1.07
2000 125 50 2.08 1.39 1.33
2400 150 60 2.50 1.67 1.60
2800 175 70 2.92 1.94 1.87
3200 200 80 3.33 2.22 2.13
4800 300 120 5.00 3.33 3.20
6400 400 160 6.67 4.44 4.27
8000 500 200 8.33 5.56 5.33
9600 600 240 10.00 6.67 6.40
11200 700 280 11.67 7.78 7.47
12800 800 320 13.33 8.89 8.53
14400 900 360 15.00 10.00 9.60
16000 1000 400 16.67 11.11 10.67
32000 2000 800 33.33 22.22 21.33
48000 3000 1200 50.00 33.33 32.00
64000 4000 1600 66.67 44.44 42.67
80000 5000 2000 83.33 55.56 53.33
96000 6000 2400 100.00 66.67 64.00

NOTE: The figure of 16 fps. is a notional running speed only, and is not meant to be a standard
for silent film projection.

208
Table 2: Length/Running Time Conversion Chart: Metres/Minutes
(Running times are calculated on the basis that these lengths of film each correspond to one
second of running time:
0.304 metres of 35 mm. at 16 fps.
0.456 metres of 35 mm. at 24 fps.
0.475 metres of 35 mm. at 25 fps.
0.1219 metres of 16 mm. at 16 fps.
0.1829 metres of 16 mm. at 24 fps.
0.1905 metres of 16 mm. at 25 fps.
These formulae may of course be applied by archives themselves for more precise calculations.)
35 mm. 16 mm.
METRES RUNNING TIME IN MINUTES METRES RUNNING TIME IN MINUTES
16 fps 24 fps 25 fps 16 fps 24 fps 25 fps
1 0.05 0.04 0.04 1 0.14 0.09 0.09
2 0.11 0.07 0.07 2 0.27 0.18 0.17
3 0.16 0.11 0.11 3 0.41 0.27 0.26
4 0.22 0.15 0.14 4 0.55 0.36 0.35
5 0.27 0.18 0.18 5 0.68 0.46 0.44
10 0.55 0.37 0.35 10 1.37 0.91 0.87
20 1.10 0.73 0.70 20 2.73 1.82 1.75
30 1.64 1.10 1.05 30 4.10 2.73 2.62
40 2.19 1.46 1.40 40 5.47 3.64 3.50
50 2.74 1.83 1.75 50 6.84 4.56 4.37
60 3.29 2.19 2.11 60 8.20 5.47 5.25
70 3.84 2.56 2.46 70 9.57 6.38 6.12
80 4.39 2.92 2.81 80 10.94 7.29 7.00
90 4.93 3.29 3.16 90 12.31 8.20 7.87
100 5.48 3.65 3.51 100 13.67 9.11 8.75
125 6.85 4.57 4.39 125 17.09 11.39 10.94
150 8.22 5.48 5.26 150 20.51 13.67 13.12
175 9.59 6.40 6.14 175 23.93 15.95 15.31
200 10.96 7.31 7.02 200 27.34 18.22 17.50
300 16.45 10.96 10.53 300 41.02 27.34 26.35
400 21.93 14.62 14.04 400 54.69 36.45 35.00
500 27.41 18.27 17.54 500 68.36 45.56 43.74
600 32.89 21.93 21.05 600 82.03 54.67 52.49
700 38.38 25.58 24.56 700 95.71 63.79 61.24
800 43.86 29.24 28.07 800 109.38 72.90 69.99
900 49.34 32.89 31.58 900 123.05 82.01 78.74
1000 54.82 36.55 35.09 1000 136.72 91.12 87.49
2000 109.65 73.10 70.18 2000 273.45 182.25 174.98
3000 165.47 109.65 105.26 3000 410.17 273.37 262.47
4000 219.30 146.20 140.35 4000 546.90 364.50 349.96
5000 274.12 182.75 175.44 5000 683.62 455.62 437.45
6000 328.95 219.30 210.53 6000 820.34 546.75 524.93
NOTE: The figure of 16 fps. is a notional running speed only, and is not meant to be a standard for silent film
projection.

209
Table 3: Length Conversion Chart: Feet/Meters and Meters/Feet
(based on 1 foot = 0.3048 meters / 1 meter = 3.28086 feet)

METERS FROM FEET UNIT FEET FROM METERS

0.305 1 3.281
0.610 2 6.562
0.914 3 9.843
1.219 4 13.123
1.524 5 16.404
1.829 6 19.685
2.134 7 22.966
2.438 8 26.247
2.743 9 29.528
3.048 10 32.809
6.096 20 65.617
7.620 25 82.022
9.144 30 98.426
12.192 40 131.234
15.240 50 164.043
18.288 60 196.852
21.336 70 229.660
22.860 75 246.065
24.384 80 262.469
27.432 90 295.277
30.480 100 328.086
38.100 125 410.108
45.720 150 492.129
53.340 175 574.151
60.960 200 656.172
76.200 250 820.215
91.440 300 984.258
121.920 400 1312.344
152.400 500 1640.430
182.880 600 1968.516
213.360 700 2296.602
228.600 750 2460.645
243.840 800 2624.688
274.320 900 2952.744
304.800 1000 3280.860
609.600 2000 6561.720
914.400 3000 9842.580
1219.200 4000 13123.440
1524.000 5000 16404.300

210
 APPENDIX E

ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THE TEXT AND APPENDICES

Numbers and Symbols
1º [etc.] - primeiro [etc.] (ordinal number)
1st - first (ordinal number)
2d (or 2nd) - second (ordinal number)
3rd - third (ordinal number)
4th [etc.] - fourth [etc.] (ordinal number)
& - and
© - copyright

ABC - American Broadcasting Company

AFI - American Film Institute
A.G. (or AG) - Aktiengesellschaft
All.Mil.Z. - Alliierte Militärzensur
Aug. - August

B - Bild
b. - birth date
b&p - branco & preto
b&w - black and white
bar. - barevny

C
c - cassette(s), cartridge(s)
(c) - copyright
ca. - Latin: circa; about, approximately, around
Cal. (or Calif.) - California
cb. - cernobíly
CED - capacitance electronic disc
cf. - confer, compare
Chas. - Charles
Co. - company
col. - color
cont. - continued
Corp. - corporation
coul. - couleur
cy. - copy
cys. - copies

D
D. - safety diacetate
d - disc(s)

212
D (cont.)

d. - death date (with personal name)

D.C. - District of Columbia
DCR - date of creation (in US copyright statements)
D.D.R. - Deutsche Demokratische Republik
Dec. - December, décembre
Dem. - Democratic
Dez. - Dezember
DST - Divisão de Seguranca de Trânsito
dup - Duplikat
dupe - duplicate

ed. - edition
e.g. - Latin: exampli gratia; for example
Eng. - England
EST - Eastern Standard Time
etc. - Latin: et cetera; unspecified additional persons or things
et al. - Latin: et alii; and others

F. - Farbe
Feb. - February
FIAF - Fédération Internationale des Archives du Film
fps. - frames per second
FSK - Freiwillige Selbstkontrolle der Filmwirtschaft
ft. - foot, feet

Geo. - George
GMD - general material designation

I
I - imagem
i.e. - Latin: id est; that is
IFLA - International Federation of Library Associations
in. - inch(es)
Inc. (or inc.) - Incorporated (with corporate names)
inc. - incomplete (with descriptions of length)
Ind. - Indiana
ISBD - International Standard Bibliographic Description

213
I (cont.)

ISBD (NBM) - International Standard Bibliographic Description for Non-Book Materials

ISO - International Organization for Standardization
ISO/TC - International Organization for Standardization / Technical Committee
ISSN - International Standard Serial Number
IWM - Imperial War Museum

Janv. - janvier
Jh. - Jahre(n)
Jr. - Junior (with personal names)

K. - Karton
Komb. - Kombinat

LC - Library of Congress
Ltd. - Limited

m. - meter(s)
M.A. - Master of Arts
Mfg. - Manufacturing
min. - minute(s)
mm. - millimeter(s)
MPAA - Motion Picture Association of America
mu. - mute

N. - Nitrate
Nº - número
n&b - noir et blanc
NBC - National Broadcasting Company
neg. - negative
nff. - nichtfeiertagsfrei
N.H. - New Hampshire
NM - new material (in US copyright statements)

214
N (cont.)

no. - number
nos. - numbers
Nov. - November
Nr. - Nummer

P. - polyester [estar]
P. - Peoples’ (in ISO Date Standard)
p. - page(s)
PDC - Partido Democrata Cristão
Ph.D. - Doctor of Philosophy
PM - Latin: post meridian; after 12 noon on the twelve hour clock
pos. - positive
pp. - pages
Prev. reg. - previously registered
PUB - Publication date (in US copyright statements)

Que - Québec
q.v. - Latin: quod vide; which see

R. - Rolle(n)
r. - reel(s)
REG - registration date (in US copyright statements)
Rep. - Republic
rev. - revised

S
S - Som; cópia de som (Português - in physical descriptions)
S. - safety triacetate (in physical descriptions)
S. - Seite (Deutsch - in bibliographic citations)
s. - sächlich, siehe
S.A. - Société anonyme; Sociedade Anônima
sd. - sound
sec. - second(s)
SECAM - Séquentiel couleur à mémoire
si. - silent
sil. - silencioso
s.l. - Latin: sine loco; place of production, distribution, etc. unknown

215
S (cont.)

s.n. - Latin: sine nomine; name of production, distribution, etc. company unknown
son. - sonoro
sr. - senhor
SW (or S/W) - schwarzweiss
sync. - synchronization

T - Ton
TV - television

UBC - Universal Bibliographic Control

UDC - Universal Decimal Classification
U.K. - United Kingdom
U.S. - United States
U.S.A. - United States of America
USDA - United States Department of Agriculture

v. - volume
VHS - Video Home System
vol. - volume

YMCA - Young Men’s Christian Association

216
APPENDIX F - FIAF ARCHIVE CODES
 City Archive Name Code

Alger Cinémathèque Algérienne DZ

Amsterdam Nederlands Filmmuseum NLA

Athinai Tainothiki tis Ellados GR

Bangkok The National Film Archive TH

Barcelona Filmoteca/Generalitat de Catalunya ESB

Beijing Zhongguo Dianying Ziliaoguan CN

Beograd Jugoslovenska Kinoteka YU

Berkeley Pacific Film Archive USB

Berlin (DDR) Staatliches Filmarchiv der DDR DDS

Berlin (BRD) Stiftung Deutsche Kinemathek DES

Bogotà Cinemateca Distrital de Bogotà COB

Fundación Patrimonio Filmico Colombiano COF

Bois d’Arcy Service des Archives du Film FRB

Bologna Cineteca del Comune di Bologna ITB

Bruxelles Cinémathèque Royale BE

Budapest Magyar Filmintezet/Filmarchivum HU

Buenos Aires Fundación Cinemateca Argentina AR

Cairo Al-Archive Al-Kawmy Lil-Film EG

Canberra National Film and Sound Archive AUC

Dhaka Bangladesh Film Archive BD

Dublin The Irish Film Institute IE

Frankfurt Deutsches Institut für Filmkunde/Filmarchiv DED

Deutsches Filmmuseum DEF

Gemona Cineteca de Friuli ITG

218
City Archive Name Code

Glasgow Film Archive/Scottish Film Council GBG

Habana Cinemateca de Cuba CU

Hanoi Vien Tu Lieu Phim Viet Nam VN

Harare National Archives of Zimbabwe ZW

Helsinki Suomen Elokuva-Arkisto FI

Istanbul Sinema-TV Enstitüsü TR

Jakarta Sinematek Indonesia ID

Jerusalem Archion Israeli Leseratim ILA

Steven Spielberg Jewish Film Archive ILS

Koblenz Bundesarchiv - Filmarchiv DEB

Køpenhavn Det Danske Filmmuseum DK

La Paz Cinemateca Boliviana BO

Lausanne La Cinémathèque Suisse CH

Lima Cinemateca Universitaria del Peru PEC

Filmoteca de Lima/Museum de Arte-Edubanco PEF

Lisboa Cinemateca Portuguesa PT

London Imperial War Museum GBI

National Film Archive GBN

Los Angeles National Center for Film and Video USA

Preservation / AFI
UCLA Film and Television Archive USL

Luanda Cinemateca Nacional de Angola AO

Luxembourg Cinémathèque Municipale de Luxembourg LU

Lyon Musée du Cinéma de Lyon FRL

Madison Wisconsin Center for Film & Theater Research USC

219
City Archive Name Code
Madrid Filmoteca Española ESM

Managua Cinemateca de Nicaragua NI

Manila Film Archive of the Philippines PH

Mexico Cineteca Nacional MXN

Filmoteca de la UNAM MXU

Milano Cineteca Italiana ITC

Montevideo Archivo Nacional de la Imagen - Sodre UYS

Cinemateca Uruguaya UYU

Montréal La Cinémathèque Québécoise CAQ

Moskva Gosfilmofond SU

München Filmmuseum/Münchner Stadtmuseum DEM

New York Museum of Modern Art USM

Anthology Film Archive USN

Oslo Norsk Filminstitutt NO

Ottawa Moving Image and Sound Archives CAN

Paris La Cinémathèque Française FRC

Cinémathèque Universitaire FRU

Perth State Film Archives of Western Australia AUW

Poona National Film Archive of India IN

Praha Ceskoslovensky Filmovy Ústav - CS

Filmovy Archiv

Pyongyang Choson Minjujui Inmingonghwaguk KP

Kugga Yonghwa Munhongo

Quito Cinemateca Nacional de Ecuador EC

Reykjavik Kvikmyndasfn Islands IS

Rio de Janeiro Cinemateca do Museum de Arte Moderna BRR

Rochester International Museum of Photography USR

220
City Archive Name Code

Roma Cineteca Nazionale ITN

São Paulo Cinemateca Brasileira BRS

Seoul Korean Film Archive KR

s’ Gravenhage Audiovisual Archive of the Netherlands NLS

Information Service

Sofia Bulgarska Nacionalna Filmoteka BG

Stockholm Cinemateket/Svenska Filminstitutet SE

Tehran Film-khane-ye Milli-e Iran IR

Tirana Arkivi Shteteror i Filmit i R.P.S. te Shqiperise AL

Tokyo National Film Center/ JP

National Museum of Modern Art

Torino Museum Nazionale de Cinema ITT

Toulouse Cinémathèque de Toulouse FRT

Valencia Filmoteca/Generalitat de Valencia ESV

Vaticano Filmoteca Vaticana VA

Warszawa Filmoteca Narodowa PL

Washington Human Studies Film Archives USH

Library of Congress USW
National Archives USD

Wellington The New Zealand Film Archive NZ

Wien Oesterreichisches Filmarchiv ATA

Oesterreichisches Filmmuseum ATM

221
APPENDIX G - BIBLIOGRAPHY
Anglo-American Cataloguing Rules. Prepared by the American Library Association ... [et al.].
Edited by Michael Gorman and Paul W. Winkler. 2d ed. Chicago: ALA, 1978. xvii,
620 p. (rev. 1988. xxv, 677 p.)

Aslib. Film Production Librarians Group. Cataloguing Committee. Film Cataloguing Rules.
London: Aslib, 1963. 71 p.

Australian MARC Specification: Projected Media. Canberra, National Library of Australia,

1980. 139 p.

Bibliographic Control of Nonprint Media. Edited by Pearce S. Grove and Evelyn G. Clement.
Chicago: American Library Association, 1972. 415 p.

Bruns, Phyllis A. National Level Bibliographic Record -- Films. Washington, D.C.: Library of
Congress, distributed by Cataloging Distribution Service, 1981- . 1 v. (looseleaf).

The Focal Encyclopedia of Film & Television Techniques. London: Focal Press, Ltd., 1969.
xxiv, 1100 p.

Gartenberg, Jon. Film Cataloguing Manual: a Computer System. New York: Museum of
Modern Art, 1979. 206 p.

Gartenberg, Jon. Glossary of Filmographic Terms. Burssels: FIAF, 1985. 141 p. (rev. 1989.
149 p.)

Harrison, Helen P. Film Library Techniques. London: Focal Press, 1973. 277 p.

Horner, John. Special Cataloguing, with Particular Reference to Music, Films, Maps, Serials,
and the Multi-Media Computerized Catalogue. London: Clive Bingley, Ltd., 1973. 327 p.

International Conference of the Cataloguing of Audiovisual Materials, London, 1973. [London]:

International Film and Television Council, [1974?]. 150 p.

International Federation of Film Archives. Cataloguing Commission. Film Cataloging. New

York: Burt Franklin & Co., Inc., 1979. viii, 174 p.

International Federation of Library Associations and Institutions. Working Group on Corporate

Headings. Form and Structure of Corporate Headings. Recommendations of the
Working Group on Corporate Headings, approved by the Standing Committees of the
IFLA Section on Cataloging and the IFLA Section on Official Publications. London:
IFLA, 1980. x, 15 p.

223
International Federation of Television Archives. Panorama of Audiovisual Archives, a
Contribution to the Development of International Film and Video Archive Practice.
[S.l.]: IFTA/BBC Data Publications, 1986. ca. 273 p.

Karnstadt, Hans and Schulz, Gunter. Guidelines for the Description of Technical Data on Film
and Video Material in Film Archives. Brussels: FIAF, 1990. (In press).

Lamy-Rousseau, Francoise. Traitement Automatise des Documents Multi-Media avec les

Systemes ISBD Unifie, Lamy-Rousseau et Precis: Propositions S.I.L.P. Quebec:
Ministere de l’Education du Quebec, Service General des Moyens d’Enseignements,
1974. x, 214 p.

Levitan, Eli L. An Alphabetical Guide to Motion Picture, Television and Videotape Production.
New York: McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1970. xvii, 797 p.

Names of States: an Authority List of Language Forms for Catalogue Entries. Compiled by the
IFLA International Office for UBC. London: IFLA International Office for UBC, 1981.
viii, 49 p.

National Film Archive. Cataloguing Department. Rules for Use in the Cataloguing Department
of the National Film Archive. 5th rev. ed. London: British Film Institute, 1960. 46 p.

Ravilious, C. P. A Survey of Existing Systems and Current Proposals for the Cataloguing and
Description of Non-Book Materials Collected by Libraries: with Preliminary
Suggestions for Their International Coordination. Paris: Unesco, 1975. 132 p.

Simmons, Peter and Hopkinson, Alan. CCF: the Common Communications Format. PG
-84/WS/4. Paris, Unesco, 1984. 183 p.

Smither, Roger. Second FIAF Study on the Usage of Computers for Film Cataloguing. Prepared
and edited by Roger Smither for the FIAF Cataloguing Commission. Brussels: FIAF,
1985. iv, 275 p.

Strachota, Vaclav a kol. Katalogizacni pravidla pro zpracovani karet a identifikacnich listu
hraneho filmu. Praha: Ceskoslovensky filmovy ustav - Filmovy archiv, 1986. 31 p.

Taylor, Sheila. Archival Film Cataloguing; a Survey of the Informational Requirements of Users
and Potential Users of the Australian National Film Archive at the National Library of
Australia. Master’s thesis, Monash University, 1982. 224 p.

224
Tillin, Alma M. and Quinley, William J. Standards for Cataloging Nonprint Materials: an
Interpretation and Practical Application. 4th ed. Washington, D.C.: Association for
Educational Communications and Technology, 1976. xiii, 230 p.

Urgosíková, Blazena a kol. Zánry. Praha: Ceskoslovensky filmovy ústav - Filmovy archiv,
1988. 60 p.

USMARC Format for Bibliographic Data; Including Guidelines for Content Designation.
Prepared by Network Development and MARC Standards Office. Washington, D.C.:
Cataloging Distribution Service, Library of Congress, 1988- . 1 v. (looseleaf).

Vodicková, Hana a kol. Pravidla jmenného záznamu speciálních dokumentu a analytického

popisu. Praha: SPN, 1972. 199 p.

Webster’s New Collegiate Dictionary. Springfield, Mass.: G. & C. Merriam Co., 1977. 1532 p.

Weihs, Jean Riddle, Lewis, Shirley and Macdonald, Janet. Nonbook Materials, the Organization
of Integrated Collections. In consultation with the CLA/ALA/AECT/EMAC/CAML
Advisory Committee on the Cataloging of Nonbook Materials. 2d ed. Ottawa: Canadian
Library Association, 1979. vii, 134 p.

White-Hensen, Wendy. Archival Moving Image Materials: a Cataloging Manual. Washington,

D.C.: Cataloging Distribution Service, Library of Congress, 1984. ii, 156 p.

White-Hensen, Wendy. Visual Materials Online Input Manual - M/B/RS. 1986. Unpublished.
1 v. (looseleaf).

Working Group on the International Standard Bibliographic Description for Non-Book

Materials. ISBD (NBM): International Standard Bibliographic Description for Non-Book
Materials. Recommended by the Working Group on the International Standard
Bibliographic Description for Non-Book Materials set up by the IFLA Committee on
Cataloging. London: IFLA International Office for UBC, 1977. viii, 61 p. (rev. 1987.
vii, 74 p.)

Yee, Martha M. Moving Image Materials: Genre Terms. Compiled by Martha M. Yee for the
National Moving Image Database Standards Committee, National Center for Film and
Video preservation at the American Film Institute. 1st ed. Washington, D.C.: Cataloging
Distribution Service, Library of Congress, 1988. 108 p.

225
INDEX
 INDEX

The index covers the introduction to the rules, the rules, and appendices, but not generally
examples or works cited in any of the rules or appendices.

AACR 2 (Anglo-American Cataloging

Rules, 2d ed.), ix, 0.1.3, 1.6. Additional series statements, 6.9.

Abbreviations, 0.6., Appendix E. Additional titles

see Other title information
Abbreviated titles, 1.4.2. Parallel titles
Variant titles
Access points
see Added entries Additions to titles, 1.4.3.
Subject access
Alternative titles, 1.1.1.
Access restrictions definition, Appendix B.
see Restrictions
Alternatives within the rules, x.
Accompanying material, 7.2.11.
definition, Appendix B. Amateur produced material, 1.5.2.5.
see also Related materials. see also Domestic record
Personal record
Acetate film base, 5.5.1.
Anglo-American Cataloging Rules
Acquisition see AACR 2
note on, 7.2.24.
Archive codes
Added entries, viii, ix. see FIAF archive codes
definition, Appendix B.
for cast, performers, 7.2.6.2. Areas of description, 0.2.1.
for contents, 7.2.16. definition, Appendix B.
for copyright owner, 4.3. see also Copyright area
for corporate names, 3.3.1, 7.2.8.2. Edition/version/variation area
for credits, 1.6, 7.2.6.1. Notes area
for parallel titles, 1.3. Physical description area
for statements of responsibility, 1.6. Production, distribution, etc.
for titles, 1.1.1, 1.5.1.2, 7.2.4, 7.2.16. area
Series area
Additional corporate names, 3.3.5. Title and statement of
responsibility area
Additional edition/version/variation
statements, 2.8. Asterisk
use with physical description, 5.3.2.4.
Additional functions
see Function(s) Audience, 7.2.14.

Additional places
see Place

227
INDEX
Avant-tître, 1.4.1-1.4.2. Character names, 7.2.6.2.
definition, Appendix B. as parts of titles, 1.1.1.
for series, 6.4.
Chief source of information
Awards, 7.2.21. see Prescribed source of information

Circa
B&w see Ca.
see Color characteristics
Citations for related publications, 7.2.26.
Base, film, 5.5.1.
City option for place name, 3.2.1.
Based on notes
see Related works Claimant
see Copyright
Black and white
see Color characteristics Classification, ix, 7.2.17.

Brackets Clips, 1.4.3.

see Square brackets definition, Appendix B.

Broadcast Collective titles, 1.5.1.

see Telecast definition, Appendix B.

Color characteristics, 5.5.2.

Ca. (circa) note on, 7.2.10.5.
use with dates, 3.5.4.
use with duration, 5.3.4.2. Commercial sponsors for television, 3.7.
use with length, 5.3.4.1. definition, Appendix B.
see also Sponsor
Capitalization, 0.7.
of alternative titles, 1.1.1. Commercials, 1.5.2.6.
of other title information, 1.4.1.3. definition, Appendix B.
of part titles, 1.1.2.2. note on, 7.2.8.5.

Cartridge, 5.3. Compilations, 1.1.2.1.2, 1.5.1.

definition, Appendix B. contents note, 7.2.16.
definition, Appendix B.
Cassette, 5.3.
definition, Appendix B. Completeness
incomplete items, 5.3.2.1.
Cast, 7.2.6.2. incomplete reels, 5.3.2.4.
definition, Appendix B. note on, 7.2.10.3.
original release length unknown, 5.3.2.3.
Cataloger opinion, 7.2.17, 7.2.27. unit numbering uncertain or unknown,
5.3.2.2.
Censorship, 7.2.20.

Chapter numbers of serials, 1.1.2.2.2.

228
INDEX
Contents Credit function, 1.6.2.
newsclips, 1.5.2.2.1-1.5.2.2.3. choice of terms, 1.6.3.
note on, 7.2.16. language of terms, 1.6.3.
definition, Appendix B.
numerous works and no predominant part, Credit sequences, 7.2.10.9.
1.5.1.2. definition, Appendix B.
unedited material, 1.5.2.4.1.
Credits, 1.6.
Cooperation/in association with, 3-introduction. definition, Appendix B.
definition, Appendix B. note on, 7.2.6.1.

Co-productions, 3-introduction.
definition, Appendix B. Date(s)
estimated, 3.5.4.
Copy (copies) ISO standard, Appendix C.
definition, Appendix B. note on, 7.2.8.3.
number designation, 5.6.1. of copyright, 4.3, 4.4.
of production, distribution, etc., 3.5.
Copy status (generation), 5.2.1. of receipt, 7.2.24.
definition, Appendix B.
note on, 7.2.10.1. Diacetate film base, 5.5.1.

Copyright, x, 4. Diameter
claimant (copyright owner), 4.3.-4.4. of videodiscs, 5.4.
country, 4.2.
date, 4.3-4.4. Dimensions, 5.4.
definition, Appendix B.
registration notice, 4.3. Disc, 5.3.
status unknown, 4.6.
subsequent ownership, 4.7. Dissertations, 7.2.13.
unprotected materials, 4.5.
see also Restrictions Distribution
date, 3.5.
Copyright area, 4. definition, Appendix B.
for a variation with minor changes, 2.7.
Corporate bodies (names), 3.3. for a version with major changes, 2.4.
additional names, 3.3.5. name of distributor, 3.3.
definition, Appendix B. note on, 7.2.8.
place of distribution, 3.2.
Country reissue, rerelease, 3.3.4.
of copyright, 4.2. statement of function, 3.3.
of origin, viii, 1.1.1.
definition, Appendix B. Distributor, 3.3.
of production, distribution, etc., 3.2. definition, Appendix B.
note on, 7.2.8.1.
Country codes
see ISBD alpha 2 country codes

229
INDEX
Domestic record, 1.5.2.5. Extent of item, 5.3.
dates, 3.5.5.
definition, Appendix B.
omission of statement of responsibility, 1.6.2. FIAF archive codes, 5.6, Appendix F.
physical description, 5.3.3.1.
production, distribution, etc. area, 3.3.3. Film base, 5.5.1.
definition, Appendix B.
Duration, 5.3.4.2.
conversion charts feet/meters/minutes, Form of name, ix, 1.6.
Appendix D.
notes on, 7.2.10.2, 7.2.10.4. Formal notes, 7.1.3.
see also Length
Formats other than the original, 5.3.3.

Edition Function(s)
see Edition/version/variation area compound statements of responsibility, 1.6.6.
Edition/version/variation statements corporate, 3.4.
Reissue/rerelease additional functions, 3.4.3.
Remake uncertain functions, 3.4.2.
Variations with minor changes note on, 7.2.8.2.
Versions with major changes personal, 1.6.2, 7.2.6.1.

Edition/version/variation area, 2.
GMD
Edition/version/variation statements, vii-viii, 2. see General material designation
note on, 7.2.7.
General material designation, 1.2.
Ellipsis, 0.3.9. definition, Appendix B.
abridging other title information, 1.4.2.
Generation
Episode number(s) see Copy status (generation)
for television series, 1.1.2.2.1.
for theatrical serials, 1.1.2.2.2. Genre, 7.2.1.

Episode titles, 1.1.2.2. Glossary, Appendix B.

definition, Appendix B.

Errors Holdings
see Inaccuracies see Physical description

Examples, xi, 0.8, Appendix A. Home movies

see Domestic record
Excerpts, 1.4.3. Personal record
definition, Appendix B.

IFLA, ix, 0.1.3.

230
INDEX
ISBD International Standard Bibliographic Description
alpha 2 codes for countries, 3.2.1. see ISBD
punctuation, 0.3.
see also Punctuation International Standard Bibliographic Description
for Non Book Materials
ISBD (NBM), v-vi, 0.1.1-0.1.2. see ISBD (NBM)

ISO date standard, Appendix C. International Standard Serial Number

see ISSN
ISSN, 6.1.1, 6.6.
of subseries, 6.8.3. International Standards Office date standard
see ISO date standard
Ideal copy, vi, 0.1.1.
Introductory words
Illustrations, 7.2.10.8. use in constructing supplied titles, 1.5.2.
use in notes, 7.1.1, 7.1.3.
In association with
see Cooperation/in association with Items without a title, 1.5.

Inaccuracies, 0.9. Inventory or location number, 5-introduction,

copyright inaccuracies, 4.3. 5.6.
dates, 3.5.2.
Inventory title, 1.3.2.
Incomplete work(s), 5.3.2.1.
as distinguished from fragments, 2I.
as distinguished from shortened version, 2I. Laboratory, 3-introduction
see also Excerpts definition, Appendix B.
incomplete reels, 5.3.2.4.
note on, 7.2.10.3. Language
original release length unknown, 5.3.2.3. note on, 7.2.2.
unit numbering uncertain, 5.3.2.2. of description, 0.5.
of function terms, 1.6.2.
Informal notes, 7.1.3. of item, 0.3.10, 5.5.3.
of statements of responsibility, 1.6.3.
Intended audience, 7.2.14.
Length, 5.3.4.1.
International co-productions conversion chart, feet/meters, Appendix D.
definition, Appendix B. note on, 7.2.10.4.
note on order of release, 7.2.8.1. original release length, 5.3.2.
parallel titles, 1.3.4. see also Duration
production, distribution information, 3-
introduction. Location number
see Inventory or location number
International Federation of Library Associations
see IFLA Location of shooting, 7.2.8.1.

231
INDEX
Loop, 5.3. Newsclips, 1.5.2.2.
definition, Appendix B. definition, Appendix B.

Newsreels, 1.1.2.2.3.
Magazine programs definition, Appendix B.
contents note, 7.2.16. contents note, 7.2.16.
definition, Appendix B. edited news segments, 1.5.2.2.
slogans, 1.4.2.
Main entry, viii.
definition, Appendix B. Nitrate film base, 5.5.1.

Major changes Non-commercial footage

see Edition/version/variation statements dates, 3.5.5.
Versions with major changes
Notes, 7.
Mandatory elements, 0.2.1, 0.1.3. definition, Appendix B.
formal, 7.1.3.
Method of acquisition informal, 7.1.3.
see Provenance introductory wording, 7.1.1.
order, 7.1.3.
Minor changes
see Edition/version/variation statements Notes area, 7.
Variations with minor changes
Numbering
Multi-part items, 1.1.2. copy number, 5.6.1.
compilations, 1.1.2.1.2. inventory or location number, 5.6.
definition, Appendix B. note on numbers borne by item, 7.2.18.
one work with separate sections, 1.1.2.1.1. of educational and technical series, 1.1.2.2.4.
series, 1.1.2.2. of newsreels, 1.1.2.2.3.
of reels or other physical units, 5.3.2.
Multiple variations with minor changes, 2.9. of television episodes, 1.1.2.2.1.
of theatrical serials, 1.1.2.2.2.
Multiple works on a single item of unidentified material, 1.5.2.1.
duration, 5.3.4.3. production number, 1.1.2.2.1, 7.2.18.
note on, 7.2.19. unit numbering uncertain or unknown,
5.3.2.2.
Mute, 5.5.3. within series, 1.1.2.2, 6.7.
definition, Appendix B. within subseries, 6.8.1.
see also ISSN

Network
see Television network Old safety base film, 5.5.1.

News Omissions to statements of responsibility, 1.6.6.

see Newsclips
Newsreels Optional elements, 0.1.3, 0.2.1.
Television news

232
INDEX
Optional rules, x. Parallel titles, 1.3.
definition, Appendix B.
Order of elements, 0.1.1, 0.2. note on, 7.2.5.
of international co-productions, 1.3.4.
Order of notes, 7.1.3. of series, 6.3.
of subseries, 6.8.2.
Order of parallel titles, 1.3.3. order of titles, 1.3.3.
related production, distribution, etc.
Order of physical descriptions, 5-introduction, information, 3-introduction.
5.2.2.
Part titles, 1.1.2.2.
Order of statements of responsibility, 1.6.2. definition, Appendix B.

Original release length, 5.3.2, 5.3.4.1. Performers

see Cast
Original release title, viii, 1.1.1.
definition, Appendix B. Personal names
see also Title proper additions to, 1.6.4.
in statement of responsibility, 1.6.
Other physical details, 5.5. note on, 7.2.6.
note on, 7.2.10.10.
Personal record, 1.5.2.5.
Other title information, 1.4. dates, 3.5.5.
abridging or omitting, 1.4.2. definition, appendix B.
capitalization, 1.4.1.3. physical description, 5.3.3.1.
definition, Appendix B. production, distribution, etc. information,
note on, 7.2.5. 3.3.3.
of series, 6.4. statements of responsibility, 1.6.2.
punctuation, 1.4.1.2.
treatment of nouns or noun phrases appearing Physical description, vi-vii, 5.
in conjunction with statements of completeness, 5.3.2.
responsibility, 1.6.5. definition, Appendix B.
note on, 7.2.10.
Outtakes, 1.4.3. of reissues, rereleases, 3-introduction.
dates, 3.5.5. of variant copies, 2-introduction.
definition, Appendix B. order of descriptions, 5.2.2.
physical description, 5.3.3.1.
Physical description area, 5.

Parallel edition statements Physical units, 5.3.

see Multiple variations with minor changes

233
INDEX
Place, 3.2. Production company, 3.3.
additional places, 3.2.3. definition, Appendix B.
note on, 7.2.8.1. relation to dates, 3.5.1.
of copyright, 4.2. statement of function, 3.4.
of personal works, 3.2.5.
of shooting, 7.2.8.1. Production, distribution, etc. area, 3.
uncertain, 3.2.2.
Production numbers, 7.2.18.
Playback mode/projection format, 5.2.3. definition, Appendix B.
notes on, 7.2.10.2, 7.2.10.10. for television programs, 1.1.2.2.1.

Polyester film base, 5.5.1. Projection format

see Playback mode/projection format
Possessive forms in titles, 1.1.1.
Provenance, 7.2.24.
Possible title, 1.5.2.1.
Public service announcements, 1.5.2.6.
Prescribed source of information, vi, viii, 0.1.1, definition, Appendix B.
0.4. note on, 7.2.8.5.
definition, Appendix B.
Publications, 7.2.26.
Presenter, 3-introduction.
definition, Appendix B. Punctuation, 0.2.1-0.3.
copyright statement, 4.1.1.
Principle source of information edition/version/variation statement, 2.1.1.
see Prescribed source of information notes area, 7.1.1.
other title information, 1.4.1.2.
Probable dates of production, distribution, etc., parallel titles, 1.3.1.
3.5.2. physical description, 5.1.1.
note on, 7.2.8.3. production, distribution, etc. area, 3.1.1.
series, 6.1.1.
Probable place of production, distribution, etc., statements of responsibility, 1.6.2.
3.2.2. title proper, 1.

Producer, 1.6.1.
definition, Appendix B. Quotations
note on, 7.2.6. within notes area, 7.1.1.

Production, 3.
date of production, 3.5. Rating designations
for a variation with minor changes, 2.7. awards, 7.2.21.
for a version with major changes, 2.4. censorship and other rating designations,
note on, 7.2.8. 7.2.20.
place of production, 3.2. users/intended audience, 7.2.14.

234
INDEX
Record Review citations, 7.2.15.
definition, Appendix B.
introductory word in titles for unedited Roll, 5.3.
footage, 1.5.2.4.2. definition, Appendix B.

Reduction copies, 5.3.3. Romanization title, 7.2.4.

Reel, 5.3.1. Rushes, 1.4.3.

completeness, 5.3.2.4. definition, Appendix B.
definition, Appendix B.
length, 7.2.10.4.
S.l. (sine loco), 3.2.2.
Reference sources definition, Appendix B.
see Sources of information
S.n. (sine nomine), 3.3.2.
Registration systems (of copyright), 4.3. definition, Appendix B.

Reissue/rerelease, 3-introduction. Safety-diacetate film base, 5.5.1.

corporate names, 3.3.4.
definition, 2I, Appendix B. Safety-triacetate film base, 5.5.1.
notes on, 7.2.7, 7.2.8.2.
Scope
Related materials, 7.2.25. of rules, 0.1.1.
see also Accompanying material of work cataloged, 7.2.1.

Related works Script

note on, 1.3.2, 7.2.7. alphabet of description, 0.5.
punctuation with scripts written right
Release, 3. to left, 0.3.11.
definition, Appendix B. two or more scripts, 0.3.10.
see also Distribution titles on film scripts, 1.3.2.

Release date, 3.5.1. Separation negatives, 5.5.2.

Remake Serials, 1.1.2.2.1-1.1.2.2.2.

definition, 2I, Appendix B. definition, Appendix B.
note on, 7.2.7. see also Theatrical serials

Rerelease
see Reissue/rerelease

Research, viii-ix.

Restrictions
on access, 7.2.22.
on use, 7.2.23.
see also Copyright

235
INDEX
Series, 1.1.2.2, 6. Sources of information, viii, 0.4.
definition, Appendix B. copyright area, 4.1.2.
educational and technical series titles, edition/version/variation area, 2.1.2.
1.1.2.2.4. note area, 7.1.2.
ISSN of series, 6.6. notes on
more than one series statement, 6.9. copyright, 7.2.9.
newsreels, 1.1.2.2.3. history of edition/version/variation, 7.2.7.
note on, 7.2.12. parallel title and other title information,
numbering within series, 1.1.2.2, 6.7. 7.2.5.
other title information of series, 6.4. research notes for physical description,
parallel titles of series, 6.3. 7.2.10.11.
relationship to trade names, 3.6. series, 7.2.12.
series titles as beginning elements of statements of responsibility, 7.2.6.
title proper, 1.1.2.2. title proper, 7.2.3.
statements of responsibility relating to variations in titles, 7.2.4.
series, 6.5. physical description area, 5.1.2.
subseries, 1.1.2.2.1, 6.8. production, distribution, etc. area, 3.1.2.
television series titles, 1.1.2.2.1. series, 6.1.2.
title proper of series, 6.2. statements of responsibility, 1.6.1-1.6.2.
see also Multi-part items summaries, 7.2.17.
title proper, 1.1.
Series area, 6. see also Prescribed source of information

Sic, use of, 0.9. Special projection requirements, 7.2.10.2.

copyright inaccuracies, 4.3. other physical details important for use or
storage, 7.2.10.10.
Silent film
see Sound characteristics Specific material designation, 5.2.
definition, Appendix B.
Sine loco note on, 7.2.10.1.
see S.l.
Sponsor, 3-introduction.
Sine nomine definition, Appendix B.
see S.n. note on, 7.2.8.
television sponsors, 7.2.8.5.
Sound characteristics, 5.5.3.
note on, 7.2.10.6.
separate sound track material, 5.2.2.

Source of acquisition, 7.2.24.

236
INDEX
Square brackets, use of, vi, 0.3.8, 0.3.9, 0.4. Subject access, ix, 0.1.3, 7.2.17.
cast names, 7.2.6.2. Subsequent copyright owner, 4.7.
cataloger supplied titles, 1.5.2. definition, Appendix B.
dates, 3.5.4.
functions, 3.1.1, 3.4, 7.2.6.1. Subseries, 6.8.
general material designation, 1.2.1. definition, Appendix B .
notes, 7.1.1. punctuation, 6.1.1.
personal names, 1.6.4. television subseries, 1.1.2.2.1.
place, 3.2.2.
titles, 1.4.3, 1.5. Subtitle
variation statement, 2.5.3. see Other title information
version statement, 2.2.3. Summary, 7.2.17.
definition, Appendix B .
Standard number numerous works on one item and no
definition, Appendix B. predominant part, 1.5.1.2.
of series, 6.6. unedited material, 1.5.2.4.
of subseries, 6.8.3.
Supplied dates, 3.5.4.
Standardized names, ix, 0.1.3.
corporate names, 3.3.1. Supplied titles, 1.5.
personal names, 1.6. definition, Appendix B.
for misidentified works, 1.5.2.
Statements of responsibility, 1.6. for unidentified works, 1.5.2.1.
as part of title proper, 1.1.1. for untitled compilations, 1.5.1.2.
definition, Appendix B.
notes on, 7.6.2. Symbols
cast, 7.2.6.2. appearing in titles, 0.5.
credits, 7.2.6.1.
punctuation, 1.6.2. Technical series, 1.1.2.2.4.
relating to personal/domestic records, 1.6.2.
relating to series, 6.5. Telecast
relating to subseries, 6.8.2. date, 3.5.1.
relating to variations with minor changes, definition, Appendix B.
2.6.
relating to versions with major changes, 2.3. Television commercials
see Commercials
Stock footage
see Unedited material Television network, 3-introduction.
definition, Appendix B.
Storage location number Television news, 1.1.2.2.5.
see Inventory or location number definition, Appendix B.
edited news segments, 1.5.2.2.
Studio, 3-introduction.
definition, Appendix B. Television promo, 1.5.2.6.
note on, 7.2.8. definition, Appendix B.
Television series, 1.1.2.2.1.
Style of rules, v. definition, Appendix B.

237
INDEX
Television sponsors, 7.2.8.5. Transcription, vi.
of original release titles, 1.1.1.
Television station, 3-introduction. of other title information, 1.4.1.1.
definition, Appendix B. of parallel titles, 1.3.1.
of statements of responsibility, 1.6.3.
Television titles, 1.1.2.2.1. of title proper, 1.1.1.

Theatrical series, 1.1.2.2.2. Translation

of credit function, 1.6.3.
Theme films, 1.5.2.3.
definition, Appendix B. Translation of titles, 1.3.2.
production, distribution, etc., 3.3.3.
Transliteration, 0.5.
Theses definition, Appendix B.
see Dissertations for titles, 1.1.1.

Title and statement of responsibility area, 1. Triacetate film, 5.5.1.

Title proper, 1.1. Trims, 1.4.3.

definition, Appendix B. definition, Appendix B.
note on, 7.2.3.
of series, 6.2. UDC, ix, 7.2.17.
of subseries, 6.8.
Umbrella series, 1.1.2.2.1, 6-introduction
Titles, 1, 6. definition, Appendix B.
abbreviated titles, 1.4.2.
additions to titles, 1.4.3. Uncertain function
definition, Appendix B. see Function
introductory words for supplied titles,
1.5.2.1-1.5.2.6. Unedited material, 1.5.2.4.
items without a title, 1.5. corporate names, 3.3.3.
of related works, 7.2.7. definition, Appendix B.
supplied by cataloger, 1.5.2. dates, 3.5.5.
physical description, 5.3.3.1.
Trade names, 3.6.
definition, Appendix B. Unidentified material, 1.5.2.1.
for color systems, 5.5.2.
for playback/projection format, 5.2.3. Universal Decimal Classification
note on, 7.2.8.4. see UDC

Trailer, 1.4.3. Unknown copyright status, 4.6.

definition, Appendix B.
Unknown dates of production, distribution, etc.,
Trailer-TV, 1.4.3. 3.5.4.
definition, Appendix B.
Unknown place of production, distribution, etc.,
3.2.2.

238
INDEX
Unknown production company, distributor, etc., Videorecording
3.3.2. definition, Appendix B.
playback mode, 5.2.3.
Unprotected materials (copyright), 4.5. video copies of film, 5.3.3.

Untitled works, 1.5. Voices, 7.2.6.2.

Use
restrictions on access, 7.2.22. Width, 5.4.
terms governing use, 7.2.23.
“With” notes, 1.5.1.1, 7.2.19.
Users separate works on a single item, 5.3.4.3.
note on intended users, 7.2.14.
Working title, 1.3.2.
definition, Appendix B.
Variant copies, 7.2.10.7.

Variant titles, viii.

definition, Appendix B.
note on, 7.2.4.
of series, 6.2.
note on, 7.2.12.

Variations with minor changes, vii-viii, 2I-II.

definition, Appendix B.
edition/variation statement for a work with
minor changes, 2.5.
multiple variations with minor changes, 2.9.
note on, 7.2.7.
production, distribution, etc. information
relating to work with minor changes, 2.7.
statements of responsibility relating to a work
with minor changes, 2.6.

Versions with major changes, vii, 2I-II.

definition, Appendix B.
edition/version statement for a work with
major changes, 2.2.
note on, 7.2.7.
production, distribution, etc. information
relating to a work with major changes,
2.4.
statements of responsibility relating to a work
with major changes, 2.3.

239
[K.G. SAUR AD FOR INTERNATIONAL DIRECTORY OF CINEMATOGRAPHERS, SET- AND
COSTUME DESIGNERS IN FILM]